Home

Lexmark X736DE

1. BORAR LEANE CE A alf o CREER AT BR RF EMSA gt MEO ERE HEI TREAD MANAM f be sae CS USA RA Se Gros LSE gt BR EE PSC THE Notice to users in the European Union Products bearing the CE mark are in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council directives 2004 108 EC 2006 95 EC and 1999 5 EC on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility safety of electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits and on radio equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment Notices 322 Compliance is indicated by the CE marking A declaration of conformity with the requirements of the directives is available from the Director of Manufacturing and Technical Support Lexmark International S A Boigny France Refer to the table at the end of the Notices section for further compliance information Products equipped with 2 4GHz Wireless LAN option are in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council directives 2004 108 EC 2006 95 EC and 1999 5 EC on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility safety of electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits a
2. J Note Notice the maximum fill line on the side of the tray which indicates the maximum height for loading paper Do not overload the tray 7 Insert the tray Loading paper and specialty media 73 Linking and unlinking trays Linking trays Tray linking is useful for large print jobs or multiple copies When one linked tray is empty paper feeds from the next linked tray When the Paper Size and Paper Type settings are the same for any trays the trays are automatically linked The Paper Size setting is automatically sensed according to the position of the paper guides in each tray except the Standard 550 sheet tray and the multipurpose tray The Paper Size setting for the Standard 550 sheet tray and the multipurpose tray must be set manually from the Paper Size menu The Paper Type setting must be set for all trays fromthe Paper Type menu The Paper Type menu and the Paper Size menu are both available from the Paper Size Type menu Unlinking trays Unlinked trays have settings that are not the same as the settings of any other tray To unlink a tray change the following tray settings so that they do not match the settings of any other tray Paper Type for example Plain Paper Letterhead Custom Type lt x gt Paper Type names describe the paper characteristics If the name that best describes your paper is used by linked trays assign a different Paper Type name to th
3. Specifies the output bin where fax logs are printed XR Bin lt x gt Speaker Settings Speaker Mode Notes ae 4 Always Off turns the speaker off Abi se PECE On until Connected is the factory default setting The speaker is on and issues Always On a noise until the fax connection is made e Always On turns the speaker on Speaker Volume High Low Controls the volume setting Note High is the factory default setting Ringer Volume On Off M Controls the fax speaker ringer volume Note On is the factory default setting M Distinctive Rings Single Ring Answers calls with a one ring pattern On Note On is the factory default setting Off Double Ring Answers calls with a double ring pattern On Note On is the factory default setting Off Understanding printer menus 198 Menu item Triple Ring Description Answers calls with a triple ring pattern Note On is the factory default setting Fax Mode Fax Server Setup menu Fax Server mode sends the fax job to a fax server for transmission Fax Server Setup Menu item Description To Format Lets you enter the information using the virtual keyboard on the printer touch screen Reply Address Subject Message Primary SMTP Gateway Specifies SMTP server port information Note 25 is the default SMTP gateway port Secondary SMTP Gateway Specifies SMTP server port information Note 25 is the default
4. Power consumption Product power consumption The following table documents the power consumption characteristics of the product Note Some modes may not apply to your product Mode Description Power consumption Watts Printing The product is generating hard copy output from electronic inputs 490 W X734 560 W X736 X738 Copying The product is generating hard copy output from hard copy original 530 W X734 600 W X736 X738 documents Scanning The product is scanning hard copy documents 90 W X734 105 W X736 X738 Ready The product is waiting for a print job 60 W X734 70 W X736 X738 Power Saver The product is in energy saving mode 24 W X734 26 W X736 X738 Off The productis plugged into a wall outlet but the power switch is turned O W off Nii 7 The power consumption levels listed in the previous table represent time averaged measurements Instantaneous power draws may be substantially higher than the average Values are subject to change See www lexmark com for current values Notices 316 Power Saver This product is designed with an energy saving mode called Power Saver The Power Saver Mode is equivalent to the Sleep Mode The Power Saver Mode saves energy by lowering power consumption during extended periods of inactivity The Power Saver Mode is automatically engaged after this product is not used for a specified period of time called the Power Saver
5. Understanding printer menus 206 Menu item Use Multi Page TIFF On Off Transmission Log Print log Do not print log Print only for error Description Provides a choice between single page TIFF files and multiple page TIFF files For a multiple page scan to FTP job either one TIFF file is created containing all the pages or multiple TIFF files are created with one file for each page of the job Notes On is the factory default setting This menu item applies to all scan functions Specifies whether the transmission log prints Note Print log is the factory default setting Log Paper Source Tray x Manual Feeder Specifies a paper source for FTP logs Note Tray 1 isthe factory default setting FTP bit Depth 8 bit 1 bit Enables the Text Photo mode to have smaller file sizes by using 1 bit images when Color is set to Off Note 8 bit is the factory default setting Base File Name Lets you enter a base file name Note There is an image limitation of 53 characters Custom Job Scanning Lets you copy a document that contains mixed paper sizes into a single job On Note Off is the factory default setting Off Scan Preview Specifies whether a preview will appear on the display for scan jobs On Note Off is the factory default setting Off Allow Save as Shortcut Enables shortcut creation for FTP addresses On Note On is the factory default setting Off Background Removal Adj
6. CMYK Image US CMYK Applies color correction to approximate the SWOP CMYK Text Specifications for Web Offset Publishing color output CMYK Graphics Euro CMYK Applies color correction to approximated EuroScale color output Vivid CMYK Increases the color saturation of the US CMYK color correction setting Off No color correction is implemented Troubleshooting 509 How can I match a particular color such as a corporate logo From the printer Quality menu nine types of Color Samples sets are available These are also available from the Color Samples page of the Embedded Web Server Selecting any sample set generates a multiple page printout consisting of hundreds of colored boxes Either a CMYK or RGB combination is located on each box depending onthe table selected The observed color of each box is obtained by passing the CMYK or RGB combination labeled on the box through the selected color conversion table By examining Color Samples sets a user can identify the box whose color is the closest to the desired color The color combination labeled on the box can then be used for modifying the color of the object in a software program For more information see the software program Help topics Manual color correction may be necessary to utilize the selected color conversion table for the particular object Selecting which Color Samples set to use for a particular color matching problem depends on the Color
7. E mail images sent as Attachment Web Link Specifies how the images will be sent Note Attachment is the factory default setting Use Multi Page TIFF On Off Provides a choice between single page TIFF files and multiple page TIFF files For a multiple page scan to e mail job either one TIFF file is created containing all the pages or multiple TIFF files are created with one file for each page of the job Notes Onisthe factory default setting This menu item applies to all scan functions Transmission Log Print log Do not print log Print only for error Specifies whether the transmission log prints Note Print log is the factory default setting Log Paper Source Tray x Manual Feeder Specifies a paper source for printing e mail logs Note Tray 1 is the factory default setting E mail Bit Depth Enables the Text Photo mode to have smaller file sizes by using 1 bitimages when 8 bit Color is set to Off 1 bit Note 8 bit is the factory default setting Custom Job scanning Lets you copy a document that contains mixed paper sizes into a single job On Note Off is the factory default setting Off Scan Preview Specifies whether a preview will appear on the display for scan jobs On Note Off is the factory default setting Off Understanding printer menus 203 Menu item Allow Save as Shortcut On Off Description Lets you save e mail addresses as shortcuts Notes O
8. 7 Touchthe arrow button next to Power Saver to select the light setting the standard exit bin will use when in Power Saver mode Note For more information on Power Saver mode see Adjusting Power Saver on page 61 8 Touch Submit 9 Touch idi Recycling Lexmark provides collection programs and environmentally progressive approaches to recycling For more information see The Notices chapter The Environmental Sustainability section of the Lexmark Web site at www lexmark com environment The Lexmark recycling program at www lexmark com recycle Recycling Lexmark products To return Lexmark products to Lexmark for recycling 1 Visit our Web site at www lexmark com recycle 2 Find the product type you want to recycle and then select your country from the list 3 Follow the instructions on the computer screen Recycling Lexmark packaging Lexmark continually strives to minimize packaging Less packaging helps to ensure that Lexmark printers are transported in the most efficient and environmentally sensitive manner and that there is less packaging to dispose of These efficiencies result in fewer greenhouse emissions energy savings and natural resource savings Lexmark cartons are 10096 recyclable where corrugated recycling facilities exist Facilities may not exist in your area Minimizing your printer s environmental impact 63 The foam used in Lexmark packaging is recyclable where foam recycling facilities exist
9. Between Pages inserts a blank sheet between each page of the print job This setting is useful when printing transparencies or inserting blank pages in a document for notes Separator Source Tray x Multipurpose Tray N up pages side Specifies the paper source for separator sheets Notes Tray 1 standard tray is the factory default setting From the Paper menu Configure MP must be set to Cassette in order for Multipurpose Tray to appear as a menu setting Specifies that multiple page images be printed on one side of a sheet of paper Off 2 Up 3 Up 4 Up 6 Up 9 Up 12 Up 16 Up Notes e Off is the factory default setting The number selected is the number of page images that will print per side N up Ordering Horizontal Reverse Horizontal Reverse Vertical Vertical Specifies the positioning of multiple page images when using N up pages sides Notes Horizontal is the factory default setting Positioning depends on the number of images and whether the images are in portrait or landscape orientation Orientation Auto Long Edge Short Edge Specifies the orientation of a multiple page sheet Notes Auto is the factory default setting The printer chooses between portrait and landscape Long Edge uses landscape Short Edge uses portrait Understanding printer menus 216 Menu item N up Border None Solid Quality menu Print Mode Color Black Onl
10. Choose Network ist of available networks Lets you select an available network for the printer to use View Signal Quality Lets you view the quality of the wireless connection View Security Mode Mi Lets you view the encryption method for the wireless connection Disabled indicates that the wireless network is not encrypted Understanding printer menus 165 AppleTalk menu This menu is available from the Network Ports menu Network Ports gt Standard Network or Network x gt Std Network Setup or Net x Setup gt AppleTalk NetWare menu Activate Activates AppleTalk support On Note On is the factory default setting Off View Name Shows the assigned AppleTalk name Note The name can be changed only from the Embedded Web Server View Address Shows the assigned AppleTalk address Note The address can be changed only from the Embedded Web Server Set Zone Provides a list of AppleTalk zones available on the network lt list of zones available on the Note The default setting is the default zone for the network If no default zone network gt exists the zone marked with an is the default setting This menu is available from the Network Ports menu Network Ports gt Standard Network or Network x gt Std Network Setup or Net x Setup gt NetWare Menu item Activate Yes No Description Activates NetWare support Note No is the factory default sett
11. Printing 53 dBA Scanning 54dBA Copying 54 dBA Ready 35 dBA Values are subject to change See www lexmark com for current values Notices 514 Waste from Electrical and Electronic Equipment WEEE directive The WEEE logo signifies specific recycling programs and procedures for electronic products in countries of the European Union We encourage the recycling of our products If you have further questions about recycling options visit the Lexmark Web site at www lexmark com for your local sales office phone number Mercury notice This product contains mercury in the lamp 5mg Hg Disposal of mercury may be regulated due to environmental considerations For disposal or recycling information contact your local authorities or the Electronic Industries Alliance www eiae org Static sensitivity notice This symbol identifies static sensitive parts Do not touch in the areas near these symbols without first touching the metal frame of the printer ENERGY STAR Any Lexmark product bearing the ENERGY STAR emblem on the product or on a start up screen is certified to comply with Environmental Protection Agency EPA ENERGY STAR requirements as configured when shipped by Lexmark ENERGY STAR Laser notice The printer is certified in the U S to conform to the requirements of DHHS 21 CFR Subchapter J for Class 1 laser products and elsewhere is certified as a Class laser product conforming to the requirements
12. Install a new toner cartridge Troubleshooting 502 A TONER CARTRIDGE IS WORN OR DEFECTIVE Replace the worn or defective toner cartridge Repeating defects i3 These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following REPEATING MARKS OCCUR IN ONLY ONE COLOR AND MULTIPLE TIMES ON THE PAGE Replace a toner cartridge if the defects occur every 33 0 mm 1 30 in e 35 3 mm 1 39 in Replace a photoconductor if the defects occur every 28 3 mm 1 11 in e 724 mm 2 85 in REPEATING MARKS OCCUR IN ALL COLORS AND MULTIPLE TIMES ON THE PAGE Replace the fuser if the defects occur every e 474 mm 1 87 in 94 8 mm 3 73 in 113 0 mm 4 45 in Skewed print These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following CHECK THE PAPER GUIDES Move the guides in the tray to the correct positions for the paper size loaded CHECK THE PAPER Make sure you are using paper that meets the printer specifications Troubleshooting 503 Solid color pages These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following MAKE SURE THE PHOTOCONDUCTORS ARE PROPERLY INSTALLED Remove and then reinstall the photoconductors THE PHOTOCONDUCTOR IS DEFECTIVE Replace the defective photoconductor THE PRINTER REQUIRES SERVICING Call for service Streaked horizontal lines These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following A TONER CARTRIDGE IS DEFECTIVE EMPTY OR WORN Replac
13. Touch the arrows to select the desired width or height Loading paper and specialty media 65 8 Touch Submit to save your selection Submitting Selection appears followed by the Paper menu 9 Touch l to return to the home screen Loading trays Note Do not remove trays while a job prints or while Busy appears on the display Doing so may cause a jam 1 Pull the tray completely out 2 Squeeze and slide the width guides to the correct position for the size of paper you are loading Use the size indicators on the bottom of the tray to help position the guides 3 Squeeze and slide the length guides to the correct position for the size of paper you are loading Note The length guide has a locking device To unlock the tray slide the button on top of the length guide to the left To lock the tray once a length has been selected slide the button back to the right Loading paper and specialty media 66 4 Flex a stack of paper back and forth to loosen the sheets and then fan them Do not fold or crease the paper Straighten the edges on a level surface 5 Load the paper stack toward the back of the tray with the recommended print side faceup The load line on the left side of the paper tray indicates the maximum height for loading paper When loading preprinted letterhead for simplex printing place the header toward the front of the tray Loading paper and specialty media 67 6 Insert the tray 7 If
14. Try one or more of the following Touch Continue to clear the message Complete the Analog Fax Setup If the message appears again contact your system support person Fax Station Number not set up The Fax Station Number has not been entered Sending and receiving faxes is disabled until fax is configured properly Try one or more of the following Touch Continue to clear the message Complete the Analog Fax Setup If the message appears again contact your system support person Load src with x src is a tray or feeder and x is a paper type or size Try one or more of the following Load the specified paper in the tray Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing If the printer finds a tray that has the correct paper type and size it feeds from that tray If the printer cannot find atray with the correct paper type and size it prints from the default source e Cancel the current job Troubleshooting 258 Load manual feeder with lt x gt x is a paper type or size Try one or more of the following Load the specified paper in the multipurpose feeder Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing If the printer finds a tray that has the correct paper type and size then it feeds from that tray If the printer cannot find a tray with the correct paper type and size then it prints from the default source e Cancel the current job Memory full cannot prin
15. 6 Restart the printer If the error occurs again 1 Turn the printer off 2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet 3 Remove the tray 4 Contact Customer Support Touch Continue to clear the message and print without using the tray Disk corrupted The printer attempted a hard disk recovery on a corrupted hard disk and the hard disk cannot be repaired The hard disk must be reformatted Touch Reformat disk to reformat the hard disk and clear the message Note Reformatting the disk deletes all the files currently stored on the disk Troubleshooting 257 Fax memory full There is not enough memory to send the fax job Touch Continue to clear the message Fax partition inoperative Contact system administrator The fax partition appears to be corrupted Try one or more of the following Touch Continue to clear the message e Turn the printer off and then back on to reset the printer If the message appears again then contact your system support person Fax server To Format not set up Contact system administrator The printer is in Fax Server mode but the Fax Server setup has not been completed Try one or more of the following Touch Continue to clear the message Complete the Fax Server setup If the message appears again contact your system support person Fax Station Name not set up The Fax Station Name has not been entered Sending and receiving faxes is disabled until fax is configured properly
16. Alternate Message lt text entry gt Displayed Information continued Paper Jam Load Paper Service Errors Description Specifies what is displayed on the upper left and right corners of the home screen For the Left side and Right side options choose from the following options None IP Address Hostname Contact Name Location Date Time mDNS DDNS Service Name Zero Configuration Name Cartridge Level Custom Text lt x gt Notes e IP Address is the factory default setting for Left side Date Time is the factory default setting for Right side Offis the factory default setting for Display When Supply Registers Default is the factory default setting for Type of Message to Display The displayed information for Paper Jam Load Paper and Service Errors can be customized with the following options Activate Yes No Type of Message to Display Default Alternate Default Message lt text entry gt Alternate Message lt text entry gt Notes No is the factory default setting for Activate Default is the factory default setting for Type of Message to Display Understanding printer menus 181 Menu item Home screen customization Change Language Copy Copy Shortcuts Fax Fax Shortcuts E mail E mail Shortcuts FTP FTP Shortcuts Search Held Jobs Held Jobs USB Drive Profiles Bookmarks Jobs by user Description Additional buttons can be added to the Home screen and default buttons can be r
17. Auto Auto is the factory default setting The Disabled setting turns off job buffering Any jobs already buffered on the disk are printed before normal processing is resumed 3kto maximum size allowed The USB buffer size value can be changed in 1k increments The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the printer the size of the other link buffers and whether the Resource Save setting is On or Off To increase the maximum size range for the USB Buffer disable or reduce the size of the parallel serial and network buffers Changingthis setting from the control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart The menu selection is updated Job Buffering Temporarily stores jobs on the printer hard disk before printing On Notes Off ute e Off is the factory default setting The On setting buffers jobs on the printer hard disk The Auto setting buffers print jobs only if the printer is busy processing data from another input port Changing this setting from the control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart The menu selection is updated Mac Binary PS Sets the printer to process Macintosh binary PostScript print jobs On Notes Off Auto Auto is the factory default setting The Off setting filters print jobs using the standard protocol The On setting processes raw binary PostScript print jobs ENA Address Sets the network address inform
18. Click Setup E mail Server Fill in the fields with the appropriate information Click Add Nn QQ Ui A A WN E mailing 105 Configuring the e mail settings 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser Note If you do not know the IP address of the printer then print a network setup page and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Click Settings 3 Click E mail FTP Settings 4 Click E mail Settings 5 Fill in the fields with the appropriate information 6 Click Submit Creating an e mail shortcut Creating an e mail shortcut using the Embedded Web Server 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser Note If you do not know the IP address of the printer then print a network setup page and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section Click Settings Under Other Settings click Manage Shortcuts Click E mail Shortcut Setup Uu A W N Type a unique name for the recipient and then enter the e mail address Note If you are entering multiple addresses then separate each address with a comma fo Select the scan settings Format Content Color and Resolution 7 Enter a shortcut number and then click Add If you enter a number that is already in use then you are prompted to select another number Creating an e mail shortcut using the touch screen 1 On the home screen touch E mail 2 Type the recipient s e mail address To cr
19. Note If you do not know the IP address of the printer then print a network setup page and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section Click Scan Profile Click Create Select your scan settings and then click Next Select a location on your computer where you want to save the scanned output file a uu B WwW N Enter a scan name The scan name is the name that appears in the Scan Profile list on the display Click Submit N 8 Review the instructions on the Scan Profile screen Scanning to a computer or flash drive 141 Ashortcut number was automatically assigned when you clicked Submit You can use this shortcut number when you are ready to scan your documents a Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass b If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides Press and then enter the shortcut number using the keypad or touch Held Jobs on the home screen and then touch Profiles d After you enter the shortcut number the scanner scans and sends the document to the directory or program you specified If you touched Profiles on the home screen then locate your shortcut on the list 9 Return to the computer to view the file The output file is saved in the location y
20. On the home screen touch Fax Use the keypad to enter the fax number Touch Options From the Resolution area touch the arrows to change to the resolution you want Touch Fax It Making a fax lighter or darker 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 Ifyou are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides Faxing 129 3 Onthe home screen touch Fax 4 Use the keypad to enter the fax number 5 Touch Options 6 From the Darkness area touch the arrows to adjust the darkness of the fax 7 Touch Fax It Sending a fax at a scheduled time 1 Nn Oo Uu A WUN Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides On the home screen touch Fax Enter the fax number using the numbers on the touch screen or keypad Touch Options Touch Advanced Options Touch Delayed Send Note If Fax Mode is set to Fax Server the Delayed Send button will not appear Faxes waiting for
21. is the factory default setting Mirror Image Creates a mirror image of the original document On Note Off is the factory default setting Off Negative Image Creates a negative image of the original document On Note Off is the factory default setting Off Shadow Detail Adjusts the amount of shadow detail visible on a scanned image 4 4 Note 0 is the factory default setting Scan edge to edge On Specifies whether the original document is scanned edge to edge Note Off is the factory default setting Off Sharpness Adjusts the amount of sharpness on a scanned image 1 5 Note 3 is the factory default setting Print Settings Copies Specifies a default number of copies for each print job 1 999 Note 1 is the factory default setting Paper Source Sets a default paper source for all print jobs Tray lt x gt Note Tray 1 is the factory default setting Manual Feeder Color Specifies color for a print job Off Note On is the factory default setting On Collate Stacks the pages of a print job in sequence when printing multiple copies Off 1 1 1 2 2 2 On 1 2 1 2 1 2 Note On is the factory default setting Understanding printer menus 211 Sides Duplex 2 sided 1 sided Controls whether the job prints on one side or both sides of the paper Note 1 sided is the factory default setting Duplex Binding Defines the way duplexed pages are bound and how the prin
22. 84 color photoconductor nearly low or84 color photoconductor low 1 Open the upper front door and then open the lower front door Warning Potential Damage To avoid overexposing the photoconductors do not leave the front doors open for more than 10 minutes 2 Pull the specified photoconductor up and then slide it to the right to remove it from the printer Maintaining the printer 239 3 Unpack the replacement photoconductor T m mW S o o0 4 Align and insert the left end of the photoconductor and then press the right end into place lin P i lm p 6 Place the old photoconductor into the replacement photoconductor box and then place the return label on the box and mail it to Lexmark for recycling Maintaining the printer 240 7 Close the lower front door and then close the upper front door Resetting the maintenance counter After installing a new photoconductor the maintenance counter must be reset Use one of the following two procedures If a replace or low message appears Use these steps when a photoconductor is replaced and 84 Replace color photoconductor 84 color photoconductor nearly low or 84 color photoconductor low appears 1 On the home screen touch Status Supplies 2 Touch Supply Replaced 3 When Replaced color photoconductor appears touch Yes Notes e f more than one photoconductor is replaced you may nee
23. If On is selected the Allow Custom Job Scans setting can be enabled for specific jobs Scanner Jam Recovery Job level Page level Specifies how a scanned job should be reloaded if a paper jam occurs in the ADF Notes e f Joblevelis selected the entire job must be rescanned if any pages jam f Page level is selected rescan from the jammed page forward Web Page Refresh Rate 30 300 Specifies the number of seconds between Embedded Web Server refreshes Note 120 seconds is the factory default setting Contact Name Specifies a contact name for the printer Note The contact name will be stored on the Embedded Web Server Understanding printer menus 183 Menu item Description Location Specifies the location of the printer Note The location will be stored on the Embedded Web Server Alarms Sets an alarm to sound when the printer requires operator Alarm Control intervention Cartridge Alarm Available selections for each alarm type are Off Single Continuous Notes Single is the factory default setting for Alarm Control Single sounds three quick beeps Offis the factory default setting for Cartridge Alarm Off means no alarm will sound Continuous repeats three beeps every 10 seconds Timeouts Specifies the number of minutes of inactivity before the system Standby Mode enters a lower power state Disabled Note 15 minutes is the factory default setting 2 240 Tim
24. Kerberos 5 Specifies the type of user authentication required for scan to e mail privileges Note No authentication required is the factory default setting Device Initiated E mail None Use Device SMTP Credentials User Initiated E mail None Use Device SMTP Credentials Use Session User ID and Password Use Session E mail address and Password Prompt User Device Userid Device password Kerberos 5 Realm NTLM Domain Specifies server information Notes The message boxes have a limitation of 512 characters None is the factory default setting for Device Initiated E mail and User Initiated E mail Understanding printer menus 162 Network Reports menu This menu is available from the Network Ports menu Network Ports gt Standard Network or Network x gt Std Network Setup or Net x Setup gt Reports or Network Reports Print Setup Page Print NetWare Setup Page Prints a report containing information about the current network setup Notes The Setup Page contains information about the network printer settings such as the TCP IP address The NetWare Setup Page menu item appears only on modelsthat support NetWare and shows information about NetWare settings Menu item Description TCP IP menu Use the following menu items to view or set the TCP IP information Note This menu is available only for network models or printers attached to print serve
25. The menu selection is updated Serial Protocol Selects the hardware and software handshaking settings for the serial port DTR Notes DTR DSR XON XOFF DTRisthe factory default setting XON XOFF DTR DTR DSRis a hardware handshaking setting XONXOFF DTRDSR XON XOFF is a software handshaking setting XON XOFF DTR and XON XOFF DTR DSR are combined hardware and software handshaking settings Understanding printer menus 172 Menu item Description Robust XON Determines whether or not the printer communicates availability to the computer On Notes Off e Off is the factory default setting This menu item applies only to the serial port if Serial Protocol is set to XON XOFF Baud Specifies the rate at which data can be received through the serial port 1200 Notes 2400 4800 9600 is the factory default setting 9600 138200 172800 230400 and 345600 baud rates are only displayed in the 19200 Standard Serial menu These settings do not appearin the Serial Option 1 Serial Option 2 or Serial Option 3 menus 38400 57600 115200 138200 172800 230400 345600 Data Bits Specifies the number of data bits that are sent in each transmission frame 7 Note 8 is the factory default setting 8 Parity Sets the parity for serial input and output data frames Even Note None is the factory default setting Odd None Ignore Honor DSR Determines whether the printer uses the DSR Signal DSR is a handshaking signal On used by
26. Touch Done O OnN Au AB WN Touch Copy It Placing an overlay message on each page An overlay message can be placed on each page The message choices are Urgent Confidential Copy or Draft To place a message on the copies 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 On the home screen touch Copy 4 Touch Options Copying 100 5 Touch Overlay 6 Touch the button containing the overlay you want to use 7 Touch Done 8 Touch Copy It Canceling a copy job Canceling a copy job while the document is in the ADF When the ADF begins processing a document the scanning screen appears To cancel the copy job touch Cancel Job on the touch screen A Canceling scan job screen appears The ADF clears all pages in the ADF and cancels the job Canceling a copy job while copying pages using the scanner glass Touch Cancel Job on the touch screen A Canceling scan job screen appears Once the job is canceled the copy screen appears Canceling a copy job while the pages are being printed 1 Touch Cancel Job on the touch screen or press Q on the keypad 2 Touch the job you want to cancel 3 Touch Delete Selected
27. att denna produkt st r i verensst mmelse med de v sentliga egenskapskrav och vriga relevanta best mmelser som framg r av direktiv 1999 5 EG Statement of Limited Warranty Lexmark X730 Series Lexmark International Inc Lexington KY This limited warranty applies to the United States and Canada For customers outside the U S refer to the country specific warranty information that came with your product This limited warranty applies to this product only if it was originally purchased for your use and not for resale from Lexmark or a Lexmark Remarketer referred to in this statement as Remarketer Limited warranty Lexmark warrants that this product ls manufactured from new parts or new and serviceable used parts which perform like new parts ls during normal use free from defects in material and workmanship If this product does not function as warranted during the warranty period contact a Remarketer or Lexmark for repair or replacement at Lexmark s option Notices 324 If this product is a feature or option this statement applies only when that feature or option is used with the product for which it was intended To obtain warranty service you may be required to present the feature or option with the product If you transfer this product to another user warranty service under the terms of this statement is available to that user for the remainder of the warranty period You shoul
28. cleaning 230 replacing 245 ADF pick assembly ordering 238 ADF pick pad ordering 238 air filter replacing 245 AppleTalk menu 166 attaching cables 42 Automatic Document Feeder ADF 14 black and white printing 90 blinking indicator light 43 brightness adjusting 62 buttons home screen 17 Index 331 buttons printer control panel 16 buttons touch screen 19 C cables Ethernet 42 USB 42 calling Customer Support 311 canceling a job from Macintosh 91 from the printer control panel 90 from Windows 91 card stock tips 84 Change src to x 257 Check tray x connection 257 checking an unresponsive printer 256 checking an unresponsive scanner 286 checking device status on Embedded Web Server 254 cleaning ADF parts 230 exterior of the printer 229 printhead lenses 234 scanner glass 230 collating copies 97 Confidential print jobs 85 printing from Macintosh computer 86 printing from Windows 85 Confidential Print menu 174 configuration information wireless network 46 configurations printer 12 Configure MP menu 150 configuring port settings 54 configuring the e mail settings 106 connecting the printer to answering machine 117 computer modem 124 distinctive ring service 116 regional adapters 119 telephone 117 conservation settings brightness adjusting 62 Eco Mode 59 Power Saver 61 Quiet Mode 60 standard exit bin lighting 62 conserving supplies 58 contacting Customer Support 311 control panel print
29. lt maximum size allowed gt Description Sets the size of the network input buffer Notes Auto is the factory default setting The value can be changed in 1 K increments The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the printer the size of the other link buffers and whether Resource Save is set to On or Off To increase the maximum size range for the Network Buffer disable or reduce the size of the parallel serial and USB buffers Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart The menu selection is updated Job Buffering Temporarily stores jobs on the printer hard disk before printing This menu only Off appears if a formatted disk is installed On Notes Auto 2 e Off is the factory default setting TheOnvalue buffers jobs onthe printerhard disk This menu selection appears only when a formatted disk is installed and is not defective The Auto setting buffers print jobs only if the printer is busy processing data from another input port Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart The menu selection is updated Mac Binary PS Sets the printer to process Macintosh binary PostScript print jobs On Notes Off Ati Auto is the factory default setting The Off setting filters print jobs using the standard protocol The On setting processes raw binary PostScrip
30. paper 84 letterhead 82 transparencies 83 toner cartridges ordering 237 recycling 64 replacing 242 touch screen buttons 19 transparencies loading 68 making 93 printing 83 tips on using 83 tray linking 74 75 tray unlinking 74 75 trays linking 74 loading 66 unlinking 74 troubleshooting checking an unresponsive printer 256 checking an unresponsive scanner 286 contacting Customer Support 311 FAQ about color printing 308 indicator light is blinking 256 solving basic printer problems 256 troubleshooting copy copier does not respond 284 partial document or photo copies 286 poor copy quality 285 poor scanned image quality 287 scanner unit does not close 284 troubleshooting display display is blank 280 display shows only diamonds 280 troubleshooting fax blocking junk faxes 131 caller ID is not shown 288 can receive but not send faxes 291 can send but not receive faxes 290 cannot send or receive a fax 289 received fax has poor print quality 291 troubleshooting paper feed message remains after jam is cleared 294 Index 337 troubleshooting print error reading USB drive 280 held jobs do not print 282 incorrect characters print 283 incorrect margins 299 jammed page does not reprint 295 job prints from wrong tray 283 job prints on wrong paper 283 job takes longer than expected 282 jobs do not print 281 Large jobs do not collate 283 multiple language PDFs do not print 280 paper curl 300 paper frequently jams
31. wireless network installation 47 wired network setup using Windows 51 wired networking using Macintosh 51 Wireless menu 165 wireless network configuration information 46 installation using Macintosh 49 installation using Windows 47 X XPS menu 228 Index 338
32. 0 is the factory default setting Scan edge to edge On Specifies if the original document is scanned edge to edge prior to copying Note Off is the factory default setting X Off Sharpness Adjusts the amount of sharpness of a copy 1 5 Note 3 is the factory default setting Sample Copy Creates a sample copy of the original document re Note Off is the factory default setting O Fax Settings menu Fax Mode Analog Fax Setup menu Analog Fax Setup mode sends the fax job by way of a telephone line Understanding printer menus 191 General Fax Settings Menu item Description Fax Cover Page Fax Cover Page Off by default On by default Never Use Always Use Include To field On Off Include From field On Off From Include Message field On Off Message Include Logo On Off Include Footer lt x gt Footer lt x gt Station Name Configures the fax cover page Note Off is the factory default setting for all Fax Cover Page options Specifies the name of the fax within the printer Station Number Specifies a number associated with the fax Station ID Station Name Station Number Specifies how the fax is identified Enable Manual Fax Sets the printer to fax manually only which requires a line splitter and a telephone On hand set Off Notes Usearegular telephone to answer an incoming faxjob and to dial a fax number Touch 0 on the numeric keypad to go d
33. 1 2 3 4 Enter the security information necessary for the printer to join your wireless network 5 Click Submit 6 Open the AirPort application on your computer In Mac OS X version 10 5 or later a From the Apple menu choose System Preferences b Click Network c Click AirPort In Mac OS X version 10 4 and earlier a From the Finder desktop click Go gt Applications b From the Applications folder double click Internet Connect c From the toolbar click AirPort 7 From the Network pop up menu select your wireless network Configure your computer to use the printer wirelessly To print to a network printer each Macintosh user must install a custom PostScript Printer Description PPD file and create a printer in the Print Center or Printer Setup Utility 1 Install a PPD file on the computer a Insertthe Software and Documentation CD in the CD or DVD drive b Double click the installer package for the printer c From the Welcome screen click Continue d Click Continue again after viewing the Readme file e Click Continue after viewing the license agreement and then click Agree to accept the terms of the agreement h Select a Destination and then click Continue From the Easy Install screen click Install Q h Type the user password and then click OK All necessary software is installed on the computer i Click Restart when installation is complete 2 Add the printer a For IP printing In Mac OS X v
34. 1 cet appareil ne doit pas provoquer d interf rences et 2 il doit accepter toute interf rence recue y compris celles risquant d alt rer son fonctionnement Cet appareil a t concu pour fonctionner uniquement avec l antenne fournie L utilisation de toute autre antenne est strictement interdite par la r glementation d Industry Canada En application des r glementations d Industry Canada l utilisation d une antenne de gain sup rieur est strictement interdite Pour emp cher toute interf rence radio au service faisant l objet d une licence cet appareil doit tre utilis l int rieur et loin des fen tres afin de garantir une protection optimale Si le mat riel ou son antenne d mission est install l ext rieur il doit faire l objet d une licence L installateur de cet quipement radio doit veiller ce que l antenne soit implant e et dirig e de mani re n mettre aucun champ HF d passant les limites fix es pour l ensemble de la population par Sant Canada Reportez vous au Code de s curit 6 que vous pouvez consulter sur le site Web de Sant Canada www hc sc gc ca rpb Le terme IC pr c dant le num ro de d accr ditation inscription signifie simplement que le produit est conforme aux sp cifications techniques d Industry Canada Taiwan NCC RF notice statement NCCHA BREER E a Ae Se d AS E AEA EE O CES JET gt Hata ae REB ATR RE aa FIRE EAE Ed
35. 2 Loading the rmultipurposeTeetclel secet trennt necnon sg ete He E HAS eee trea HE 68 Loading the2000 shieet Fay ooo devo ato e iw abet d sin aM Sen HAE ile nde b D Mee 71 Linking and unlinking trays ete nee odit bonia dietis Disia Hd PRG au ees 74 Paper and specialty media guidelines 76 Paperguideline monica quet dte p qoe d dudit dudo dte aep a n dde a anis 76 Supported paper sizes types and WEIGHTHS essessccsscssscceecsssensccsseeseecsseesecesseeseecsseessccssecseecssecssesseeseccsseeseeesseesses 79 PANNO eee me ato in one eters oor AB consuetu icone T aci noir Id 82 Printing A ere 1 0 RR 82 PRICING ori specialty Triadia s osa Ud added betae a aede ta a re Rd ess 82 Printing confidential and other held Jobs saa acie ERE RUE URN qi ERE EP RERERRRDR IU eis 85 Printing from a flash d VO evene rentes een noe ee es ito RR ven ORE ARRAS AR S Re ON HALE Y PIRA 87 Printing photos from a PictBridge enabled digital camera ees eeeetetenttntnntnnnes 88 Printing information pages o RP RE d a tke e bn Qua eme ode e Gea 89 Printing in DIAC AR cl White oss TR RR DER EE TE ened op RES U DE ando es 90 Using Max Speed and Max Yield eserinin ee icti ida edes an iesus A Gap doe 90 Cariceling OMI ING JOD asse S eA UR RENE DOMUS RU MERE otia ae AI E eM ed 90 CODVIIO Mets een T DOD ubi c D DC DEDE LITE 92 Making COPIES oque toic edfudiod PSU anh teo wakes cestode adda pl ad AN IR ote er
36. 294 tray linking does not work 283 unexpected page breaks occur 284 troubleshooting print quality blank pages 296 characters have jagged edges 296 clipped images 298 color misregistration 297 fine horizontal lines 298 ghost images 298 gray background 299 light colored line white line or incorrectly colored line 300 poor transparency quality 307 print irregularities 301 print is too dark 301 print is too light 302 print quality test pages 295 repeating defects 303 skewed print 303 solid color pages 304 streaked horizontal lines 304 streaked vertical lines 305 toner fog or background shading 305 toner rubs off 306 toner specks 306 uneven print density 307 troubleshooting printer options flash memory card 293 hard disk with adapter 293 internal print server 293 Internal Solutions Port 293 memory card 294 option not working 292 trays drawers 293 USB parallel interface card 294 troubleshooting scan cannot scan from a computer 288 partial document or photo scans 288 scan was not successful 287 scanner unit does not close 284 scanning takes too long or freezes the computer 287 U Universal Paper Size 157 setting 65 Universal Setup menu 157 unlinking trays 74 Unsupported disk 259 USB port 42 Utilities menu 220 V Verify print jobs 85 printing from Macintosh computer 86 printing from Windows 85 viewing reports 255 W waste toner box ordering 238 replacing 251 Web site finding 9 Windows
37. Card Custom Scan Size lt x gt A4 A5 Oficio Mexico JIS B5 Book Original Auto Size Sense Mixed Letter Legal Sides Duplex Specifies how the text and graphics are oriented on the page Off Notes Long edge Short edge e Off is the factory default setting Long edge assumes binding along the long edge of the page left edge for portrait orientation and top edge for landscape orientation Short edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page top edge for portrait orientation and left edge for landscape orientation Understanding printer menus 202 Menu item Description JPEG Quality Sets the quality of a JPEG photo image in relation to file size and the quality of the Best for content image 5 90 Notes Best for content is the factory default setting 5reduces the file size but the quality of the image is lessened 90 provides the best image quality but the file size is very large This menu item applies to all scan functions Text Default Sets the quality of a text image in relation to file size and the quality of the image 5 90 Note 75 is the factory default setting Text Photo Default 5 90 Sets the quality of a text or photo image in relation to file size and the quality of the image Note 75 is the factory default setting Photo Default 5 90 Sets the quality of a photo image in relation to file size and the quality of the image Note 50 is the factory default setting
38. Clear any error messages THE SCANNER GLASS MAY BE DIRTY Clean the scanner glass with a clean lint free cloth dampened with water For more information see Cleaning the scanner glass on page 230 ADJUST THE SCAN RESOLUTION Increase the resolution of the scan for a higher quality output CHECK THE QUALITY OF THE ORIGINAL DOCUMENT Make sure the quality of the original document is satisfactory Troubleshooting 287 CHECK THE DOCUMENT PLACEMENT Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner Partial document or photo scans These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following CHECK THE DOCUMENT PLACEMENT Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner CHECK THE PAPER SIZE SETTING Make sure the paper size setting matches the paper loaded in the tray 1 From the printer control panel check the Paper Size setting from the Paper menu 2 Before sending the job to print specify the correct size setting For Windows users specify the size from Print Properties For Macintosh users specify the size from the Page Setup dialog Cannot scan from a computer These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following CHECK THE DISPLAY FOR ERROR MESSAGES Clear any error messages CHECK THE POWER Make sure the printer is plugged in the power is on and Ready appears CHECK THE CABLE CONNECTIONS M
39. Color can be turned on or off with any of the Content choices Content affects the quality and size of your e mail Text Emphasizes sharp black high resolution text against a clean white background Text Photo Used when the original documents are a mixture of text and graphics or pictures e Photograph Tells the scanner to pay extra attention to graphics and pictures This setting increases the time it takes to scan but emphasizes a reproduction of the full dynamic range of tones in the original document This increases the amount of information saved Color Sets the scan type and output for the e mail Color documents can be scanned and sent to an e mail address Advanced Options Touching this button opens a screen where you change Advanced Imaging Custom Job Transmission Log Scan Preview Edge Erase and Darkness settings e Advanced Imaging Adjusts Background Removal Contrast Scan Edge to Edge Shadow Detail and Mirror Image before you copy the document Custom Job Job Build Combines multiple scanning jobs into a single job Transmission Log Prints the transmission log or transmission error log E mailing 110 Scan Preview Displays the first page of the image before it is included in the e mail When the first page is scanned the scanning is paused and a preview image appears Edge Erase Eliminates smudges or information around the edges of a document You can choose to eliminate an equal ar
40. Continue to clear the message and continue printing Troubleshooting 264 84 lt color gt photoconductor nearly low 1 Order a replacement photoconductor 2 When print quality is reduced install the new photoconductor using the instruction sheet that came with the replacement part 3 Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing 88 Replace color cartridge The specified toner cartridge is exhausted 1 Replace the specified toner cartridge 2 Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing 88 color cartridge nearly low 1 Order a replacement toner cartridge 2 Remove the specified cartridge 3 Firmly shake the cartridge side to side and front to back several times to redistribute toner 4 Reinsert the cartridge and then touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing Note Repeat this procedure multiple times until the print remains faded and then replace the cartridge 88 color cartridge low 1 Order a replacement toner cartridge immediately 2 Remove the specified cartridge 3 Firmly shake the cartridge side to side and front to back several times to redistribute toner 4 Reinsert the cartridge and then touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing Note Repeat this procedure multiple times until the print remains faded and then replace the cartridge 840 01 Scanner Disabled This message indicates that the scanner has been disabled by the system support
41. Copy Shortcuts Profile Shortcuts Depending on the printer setup this menu item appears as Standard Network or Network x This menu appears only when one or more DLEs are installed Understanding printer menus 145 Supplies menu Menu item Replace Supply All Photoconductors Cyan Photoconductor Magenta Photoconductor Yellow Photoconductor Black Photoconductor Separator Pad Description Provides the option to reset the supply counter for the photoconductor just replaced or for all photoconductors Select the photoconductor and then select Yes or No Select Yes to reset the supply counter Select No to exit Cyan Magenta Yellow or Black Cartridge Early Warning Low Replace Missing OK Shows the status of the toner cartridges Cyan Magenta Yellow or Black Photoconductor Early Warning Low Replace Missing OK Shows the status of the cyan yellow magenta and black photoconductors Separator Pad OK Replace Waste Toner Box Near Full Replace Missing OK Shows the status of the separator pad Shows the status of the waste toner box Fuser Early Warning Low Replace Missing OK Shows the status of the fuser Transfer Module Early Warning Low Replace Missing OK Shows the status of the transfer module Understanding printer menus 146 Paper menu Default Source menu Default Source Tray lt x gt MP feeder Manual paper Manual envelope Paper Siz
42. Correction setting being used Auto Off or Manual the type of object being printed text graphics or images and how the color of the object is specified in the software program RGB or CMYK combinations When the printer Color Correction setting is set to Off the color is based on the print job information and no color conversion is implemented Note The Color Samples pages are not useful if the software program does not specify colors with RGB or CMYK combinations Additionally certain situations exist in which the software program or the computer operating system adjusts the RGB or CMYK combinations specified in the program through color management The resulting printed color may not be an exact match of the Color Samples pages What are detailed Color Samples and how do access them Detailed Color Samples sets are available only through the Embedded Web Server of a network printer A detailed Color Samples set contains a range of shades displayed as colored boxes that are similar to a user defined RGB or CMYK value The likeness of the colors in the set are dependent on the value entered in the RGB or CMYK Increment box To access a detailed Color Samples set from the Embedded Web Server 1 Open a Web browser In the address bar type the network printer IP address Click Configuration Click Color Samples Click Detailed Options to narrow the set to one color range When the Detailed Options page appears select a color conve
43. Cotton Recycled Card stock vV vV X v v Transparencies vV V X v T Labels JV vV X V Paper Vinyl Glossy paper vV vV X vV v Envelopes X X X V U Do not use inkjet or 3M CG3710 transparencies Paper and specialty media guidelines 81 Printing This chapter covers printing printer reports and job cancelation The selection and handling of paper and specialty media can affect how reliably documents print For more information see Avoiding jams on page 266 and Storing paper on page 79 Printing a document Printing a document 1 From the printer control panel Paper menu set the Paper Type and Paper Size to match the loaded paper 2 Send the print job For Windows users a With a document open click File Print b Click Properties Preferences Options or Setup and then adjust the settings as needed Note To print on a specific size or type of paper adjust the paper size or type settings to match the loaded paper or select the appropriate tray or feeder c Click OK and then click Print For Macintosh users a Customize the settings as needed in the Page Setup dialog 1 With a document open choose File Page Setup 2 Choose a paper size or create a custom size to match the loaded paper 3 Click OK b Customize the settings as needed in the Print dialog 1 With a document open choose File gt Print If necessary click the disclosure triangle
44. Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 Ifyou are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 On the home screen touch Fax Faxing 126 4 Enter the fax number or a shortcut using the touch screen or keypad To add recipients touch Next Number and then enter the recipient s telephone number or shortcut number or search the address book Note To place a dial pause within a fax number press L The dial pause appears as a comma in the Fax to box Use this feature if you need to dial an outside line first 5 Touch Fax It Sending a fax using the computer Faxing from a computer lets you send electronic documents without leaving your desk This gives you the flexibility of faxing documents directly from software programs Note In order to perform this function from your computer you must use the PostScript printer driver for your printer 1 From your software program click File gt Print 2 From the Print window select your printer and then click Properties 3 Choose the Other Options tab and then click Fax 4 Click OK and then click OK again 5 Onthe Fax screen type the name and number of the fax recipient 6 Click Send Creating shortcuts Creating a fax destination shortcut using the Embedded Web Server Instead of entering the entire phone number of a fax rec
45. Embedded Web Server type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser Notes f you do not know the IP address of the printer then print a network setup page and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section For more information see the Networking Guide on the Software and Documentation CD and the Embedded Web Server Administrator s Guide on the Lexmark Web site at www lexmark com Checking the device status Using the Embedded Web Server you can view paper tray settings the level of toner in the print cartridge the percentage of life remaining in the maintenance kit and capacity measurements of certain printer parts To view the device status 1 Type the printer IP address in the address field of your Web browser Note If you do not know the IP address of the printer then print a network setup page and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Click Device Status Setting up e mail alerts You can have the printer send you an e mail when the supplies are getting low or when the paper needs to be changed added or unjammed Administrative support 254 To set up e mail alerts 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser Note If you do not know the IP address of the printer then print a network setup page and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Click Settings 3 Under Other Settings click E mail Alert Setup 4 Select the items for notification
46. Ethernet ISP MarkNet N81 10 V 34 Fax Card Additional printer setup 23 Accessing the system board to install internal options A CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD If you are installing memory or option cards sometime after setting up the printer then turn the printer off and unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before continuing If you have any other devices attached to the printer then turn them off as well and unplug any cables going to the printer Note This task requires a flathead screwdriver 1 Remove the cover a Tum the screws on the cover counterclockwise to loosen them but do not remove them I I CEE EEE p pl CEES jo SSE gt SS Additional printer setup 24 b Lift up on the tabs to align each screw with the corresponding keyhole Pull the cover forward to remove it Use the following illustration to locate the appropriate connector Warning Potential Damage System board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity Touch something metal on the printer before touching any system board electronic components or connectors Additional printer setup 25 Z 1 Fax card connector Firmware and flash memory card connectors Hard disk connector Internal print server connector uw A W N Memory card connector Installing a memory card A CAU
47. Fax Setup 5 Click inside the Station Name box and then enter the name to be printed on all outgoing faxes 6 Click inside the Station Number box and then enter the printer fax number 7 Click Submit Faxing 125 Setting the date and time You can set the date and time so that they are printed on every fax you send If there is a power failure you may have to reset the date and time To set the date and time 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser Note If you do not know the IP address of the printer then print a network setup page and locate the address in the TCP IP section 2 Click Settings 3 Click Set Date and Time 4 Click inside the Set Date amp Time box and then enter the current date and time 5 Click Submit Turning daylight saving time on or off The printer can be set to automatically adjust for daylight saving time 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser Note If you do not know the IP address of the printer then print a network setup page and locate the address in the TCP IP section 2 Click Settings 3 Click Set Date and Time 4 Inthe Daylight Savings box click on one of the following Yes turns daylight saving on No turns daylight saving off 5 Click Submit Sending a fax Sending a fax using the printer control panel 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note
48. If you do not know the IP address of the printer then print a network setup page and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Click Settings 3 Click Fax Settings Troubleshooting 291 4 Click Analog Fax Setup 5 Inthe Max Speed box click on one of the following 2400 4800 9600 14400 33600 6 Click Submit Solving option problems Option does not operate correctly or quits after it is installed These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following RESET THE PRINTER Turn the printer off wait for about 10 seconds and then turn the printer on CHECK TO SEE IF THE OPTION IS CONNECTED TO THE PRINTER 1 Turn the printer off 2 Unplug the printer from the wall outlet 3 Checkthe connection between the option and the printer MAKE SURE THE OPTION IS INSTALLED Print a menu settings page and check to see if the option is listed in the Installed Options list If the option is not listed then reinstall it MAKE SURE THE OPTION IS AVAILABLE IN THE PRINTER DRIVER It may be necessary to manually add the option in the printer driver to make it available for print jobs For more information see Updating available options in the printer driver on page 45 MAKE SURE THE OPTION IS SELECTED From the program you are using select the option Mac OS 9 users should make sure the printer is set up in the Chooser Troubleshooting 292 Trays Drawers MAKE SURE THE PAPER IS LOADED CORRECTLY 1 Open the pape
49. Jobs The remaining print job is canceled The home screen appears Understanding the copy screens and options Copy from This option opens a screen where you can enter the size of the documents you are going to copy Touch a paper size button to select it as the Copy from setting The copy screen appears with your new setting displayed e When Copy from is set to Mixed Letter Legal you can copy an original document that contains mixed paper sizes When Copy from is set to Auto Size Sense the scanner automatically determines the size of the original document Copying 101 Copy to This option opens a screen where you can enter the size and type of paper on which your copies will be printed Touch a paper size button to select it as the Copy to setting The copy screen appears with your new setting displayed If the size settings for Copy from and Copy to are different the printer automatically adjusts the Scale setting to accommodate the difference If the type or size of paper that you want to copy onto is not loaded in one of the trays touch Manual Feeder and manually send the paper through the multipurpose feeder When Copy to is set to Auto Size Match each copy matches the size of the original document If a matching paper size is not in one of the trays the printer scales each copy to fit loaded paper Scale This option creates an image from your copy that is proportionally scaled anyw
50. Note Your telephone adapter may look different than the one shown It will fit the wall jack used in your location Faxing 121 Faxing 122 4 Ifyouwould like to use the same line for both fax and telephone communication then connect a second telephone line not provided between the telephone and the F slot of an active analog telephone wall jack 5 If you would like to use the same line for recording messages on your answering machine then connect a second telephone cable not provided between the answering machine and the other N slot of the active analog telephone wall jack Faxing 123 Connecting to a computer with a modem Connect the printer to a computer with a modem to send faxes from the software program Note Setup steps may vary depending on your country or region 1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the printer LINE port L 2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to an active analog telephone wall jack Faxing 124 4 Connect your telephone to the computer telephone jack Setting the outgoing fax name and number To have the designated fax name and fax number printed on outgoing faxes 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser Note If you do not know the IP address of the printer then print a network setup page and locate the address in the TCP IP section 2 Click Settings 3 Click Fax Settings 4 Click Analog
51. OS X version 10 4 and earlier 1 From the Go menu choose Applications 2 Double click Utilities and then double click Print Center or Printer Setup Utility 3 Double click the printer icon 4 From the printer window select the job to cancel 5 From the icon bar at the top of the window click the Delete icon Printing 91 Copying ADF Scanner glass Use the ADF for multiple page documents Use the scanner glass for single pages small items such as postcards or photos transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings Making copies Making a quick copy 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 From the printer control panel press KD 4 If you placed the document on the scanner glass then touch Finish the Job to return to the home screen Copying using the ADF 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 Adjustthe paper guides 3 On the home screen touch Copy or use the
52. P lt gt Login Password Path Base file name Web Link Format Specifies the format of the file PDF pdf Note PDF pdf is the factory default setting Secure PDF TIFF tif JPEG jpg XPS xps PDF Version Sets the version of the PDF file that will be scanned to e mail 1 2 1 6 Note 1 5 is the factory default setting Content Specifies the type of content that will be scanned to e mail Text Photo Notes Photograph Text Text Photo is the factory default setting Text Photo is used when the documents are mostly text or line art Photograph is used when the document is a high quality photograph or print Text is used when the document is mostly text Color Specifies whether a job prints in grayscale or color Gray Note Color is the factory default setting Color Understanding printer menus 201 Menu item Description Resolution Specifies how many dots per inch are scanned 75 Note 150 dpi is the factory default setting 150 200 300 400 600 Darkness Lightens or darkens the output 1 9 Note 5 is the factory default setting Orientation Specifies the orientation of the scanned image Portrait Note Portrait is the factory default setting Landscape Original Size Specifies the paper size of the document that is being scanned Letter Note Letter is the US factory default setting A4 is the international factory default Legal setting Executive Folio Statement Universal 4x6in 3x5 in Business
53. Pme vod foa oa Ra dfe eA d ven perit dne 174 Settings Ieru iac e reete eet ee e a ie eee dons eee tbt saad regenti Ue tiae ee ie eese E 178 i si odit aL O10 BACON RN RE II RR DEN NM RUN RCM 228 Maintaining the printer 00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 229 Cleaning the Exterior of the DEIDEOE onde or e ERR Wd Fe Orbe eee on Oa f Ov PvE NEUE HE etched 229 Cleaning the scanner elass asc deae eH do RR Saa The Rats a Do aas NEM REB ir E 230 Cleaning theADP Datlsscadndom ou Wb ARN b RR GP Made a ER EE INMEMIBIIQUMt 230 Contents 4 Cleaning the printhead lehsBs sees teen bern e HN PESE ROI tr ten pecie er o ce anre Rees ite 234 Adj sting scanner registrat Diae XR AR ET Rei rete PORRO pH Ert Fea S DN da te ld ia DR 235 Storing SUDDIIBssss si e epo did eite tnthtu deep abe detienen apad td p pA CN ee pha d pd 236 Checking the status OF SUD PILES esaet rtocts te t REN Se ie ERR Seo e ENDS REASONS ORE Ia Et 237 Orderihd SUID PUES inier atero oa aou rada OR a OMA d A aN 237 Replacing Supplies te ERR RO RR ADU GU RU CUR P AGRAR at e tUn USD RE QUT s RN UE RU ER ER 239 Moving the printer to anether ocatloDioso iain dn ep UD EB UI qUED ER SERVED UR E RUD 253 Shipping the printerserie etah Ie eio e eo iai eR D e RAE Road ee 253 Administrative SUpport 0000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000022 2 DA Finding advanced networking and administrator information eese 254 Using the Embed
54. SMTP gateway port Image Format PDF pdf XPS xps TIFF tif Specifies the image type for scan to fax Content Text Text Photo Photograph Specifies the type of content that will be scanned to fax Notes Text is used when the document is mostly text Text Photo is the factory default setting Text Photo is used when the documents are mostly text or line art Photograph is used when the document is a high quality photograph or inkjet print Fax Resolution Specifies the resolution level for scan to fax Standard Fine Super Fine Ultra Fine Darkness Lightens or darkens the output 1 9 Note 5 factory default setting Orientation Specifies the orientation of the scanned image Portrait Landscape Understanding printer menus 199 Original Size Letter Legal Executive Folio Statement Universal 4x6in 3x5 in Business Card Custom Scan Size lt x gt A4 A5 Oficio Mexico JIS B5 Book Original Auto Size Sense Mixed Letter Legal Use Multi Page TIFF On Off Enable Analog Receive On Off E mail Settings menu Menu item Description E mail Server Setup Subject Message Menu item Description Specifies the paper size of the document that is being scanned Note Letter is the US factory default setting A4 is the international factory default setting Provides a choice between single page TIFF files and multiple page TIFF files For a multiple page scan to
55. Specifies whether a border is printed around the edge of the page at the margins On Note Off is the factory default setting Off Collate Keeps the pages of a print job stacked in sequence when making multiple copies On of the job Off Note On is the factory default setting Original Size Specifies the paper size of the original document Letter Note Letter is the US factory default setting A4 is the international factory default Legal setting Executive Folio Statement Universal 4x6in 3x5in Business Card Custom Scan Size x A4 A5 Oficio Mexico JIS B5 Book Original Auto Size Sense Mixed Letter Legal Copy To Source Tray lt x gt Manual Feeder Auto Size Match Specifies the paper source for copy jobs Note Tray 1 is the factory default setting Transparency Separators On Places a sheet of paper between transparencies Note On is the factory default setting Off Separator Sheets Places a sheet of paper between pages copies or jobs based on the value selected None Note None is the factory default setting Between Copies Between Jobs Between Pages Separator Sheet Source Tray x Manual Feeder Specifies the paper source the separator sheet prints from Note Tray 1 is the factory default setting Darkness 1 9 Specifies the level of darkness for the copy job Note 5 is the factory default setting Understanding printer menus 187 Menu item Description Number o
56. and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation The FCC Class A limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense The manufacturer is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by using other than recommended cables or by unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment Unauthorized changes or modifications could void the user s authority to operate this equipment Note To assure compliance with FCC regulations on electromagnetic interference for a Class A computing device use a properly shielded and grounded cable such as Lexmark part number 1021231 for parallel attach or 1021294 for USB attach Use of a substitute cable not properly shielded and grounded may result in a violation of FCC regulations Noise emission levels The following measurements were made in accordance with ISO 7779 and reported in conformance with ISO 9296 Note Some modes may not apply to your product
57. and type in the e mail addresses 5 Click Submit Note See your system support person to set up the e mail server Viewing reports You can view some reports from the Embedded Web Server These reports are useful for assessing the status of the printer the network and supplies To view reports from a network printer 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser Note If you do not know the IP address of the printer then print a network setup page and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Click Reports and then click the type of report you want to view Restoring the factory default settings If you want to retain a list of the current menu settings for reference then print a menu settings page before you restore the factory default settings For more information see Printing a menu settings page on page 44 Warning Potential Damage Restoring factory defaults returns most printer settings to the original factory default setting Exceptions include the display language custom sizes and messages and Network Port menu settings All downloads stored in RAM are deleted Downloads stored in flash memory or on a printer hard disk are not affected 1 Make sure the printer is on and Ready appears On the home screen touch Touch Settings Touch General Settings Touch the down arrow until Factory Defaults appears Touch the left or right arrow until Restore Now appears Touch Submi
58. dev ad esce efe 129 Cariceling an outgoing axons OD D RM Re MN ai NR 131 Understanding fax opUoriss oai edet ei ien ER RERNIBRRE UP ME PEIMBREADEC hase an eae Dee 132 Improving fax quadlib ucso eo oto cm eet Oger igiene poe Po pa ed er er RN DENEN UE RIRURG TEIG RETOUR UI 133 Holding and forwarding axes nano ates tea a aso a Nase p wi Mee aud adn 134 Scanning to an FTP address 00000000000000000000000000000000000000000 136 Scanning toan FIP addres Sini o debudat De pide a o Bo v te AD DH a dre boot dns 136 Creating Shot eULs cset bos en afta idt SEHR RERUM IDE NU d AT dd I 137 Undsrstandihig FTPOODEO S es AD e RUD REND RO Nen RODEO DI dU 138 Improving za Pei rijs e 140 Scanning to a computer or flash drive 141 Scanriing to d compU tler so eerie e iei dde ett ee ette edet ie eee eue 141 Scannirigto a flashdrive e e b RT aortas ee ne ot SONG s ANDE ARM RR Da is na 142 Understanding scan profile Options 6 ande o IRR RED NR EON I RE D DID Oa da aa IER 142 Irprovirig scan quality messiaanse e rdc ire eerie aa bee dette bulis 144 Understanding printer menus ccce 145 Ies TiS ost e be A at ob E ead tta cp MOM ee 145 Supplies men re ea sonona I Rd dab abe a eH RAV ARO IU REOR A 146 Paper MAT RU 147 Reports ellus cerei tht ese d ed tee ec etri edt e i edd t et ac eed eins 158 Network POorts Yen sso cet va aai PC Ede A Sv edita eet 160 Sec rity Ieblu seen Tu VESPERE NE
59. factory default setting Custom x Loading is available only if the custom type is supported Notes Duplex sets the printer default to 2 sided printing for every print job unless 1 sided printing is selected from Print Properties ee If Duplex is selected then all print jobs are sent through the duplex unit including 1 sided jobs Understanding printer menus 155 Custom Types menu Custom Type lt x gt Menu item Description Associates a paper or specialty media type with a factory default Custom Paper Type x name or a user defined Custom Name created from the Card Stock Embedded Web Server or MarkVision Professional Transparency Notes Gloss pud Paperis the factory default setting Vinyl Labels The custom media type must be supported by the selected tray or y multipurpose tray in order to print from that source Envelope Recycled Specifies a paper type when the Recycled setting is selected in other menus Paper Notes Card Stock Transparency Paperis the factory default setting Glossy The custom media type must be supported by the selected tray or Labels multipurpose tray in order to print from that source Vinyl Labels Envelope Custom Names menu Menu item Definition Custom Name lt x gt Specify a custom name for a paper type This name replaces a Custom Type lt none gt lt x gt name in the printer menus Understanding printer menus 156 Custom S
60. factory default setting Dial Prefix Lets you enter a dialing prefix such as 99 A numeric entry field is provided Establishes a dialing prefix rule Automatic Redial 0 9 Specifies the number of times the printer tries to send the fax to a specified number Note 5 is the factory default setting Redial Frequency 1 200 Specifies the number of minutes between redials Behind a PABX Off On Enables switchboard blind dialing without a dial tone Enable ECM On Off Enables Error Correction Mode for fax jobs Enable Fax Scans On Off Lets you send faxes by scanning at the printer Driver to fax On Off Allows driver to fax jobs to be sent by the printer Allow Save as Shortcut On Off Lets you save fax numbers as shortcuts in the printer Understanding printer menus 194 Dial Mode Tone Pulse Menu item Description Specifies the dialing sound either as a tone or a pulse Max Speed 2400 4800 9600 14400 33600 Custom Job scanning On Off Specifies the maximum speed in baud at which faxes are sent Lets you scan a document that contains mixed paper sizes into a single file Scan Preview On Off Specifies whether a preview will appear on the display for scan jobs Background Removal 4to 4 Adjusts the amount of background visible on a copy Note 0 is the factory default setting Auto Center On Off Color Dropout Color Dropout Lets you au
61. fax job either one TIFF file is created containing all the pages or multiple TIFF files are created with one file for each page of the job Notes Onis the factory default setting This menu item applies to all scan functions Enables analog fax receive Note Off is the factory default setting Specifies e mail server information Notes The subject box has a limitation of 255 characters The message box has a limitation of 512 characters E mail Server Setup Send me a copy Never appears On by default Off by default Always On Sends a copy of the e mail back to the creator of the e mail Note Never appears is the factory default setting Understanding printer menus 200 Menu item E mail Server Setup Max E mail size 0 65535 KB Description Specifies the maximum e mail size in kilobytes Note E mail above the specified size is not sent E mail Server Setup Size Error Message E mail Server Setup Limit destinations Sends a message when an e mail is greater than the configured size limit Sends an e mail only when the address contains the domain name such as a company domain name Notes E mail can be sent only to the specified domain The limit is one domain E mail Server Setup Defines the e mail server path name for example directory path Web Link Setup Note The following characters or symbols are invalid entries for a path name Server 2
62. following steps Otherwise go to step 9 a Click Fax Holding Schedule b From the Action menu select Hold faxes c From the Time menu select the time you want the held faxes released d From the Day s menu select the day you want the held faxes released 9 Click Add Forwarding a fax This option lets you print and forward received faxes to a fax number e mail address FTP site or LDSS 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser Note If you do not know the IP address of the printer then print a network setup page and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Click Settings 3 Click Fax Settings 4 Click Analog Fax Setup 5 From the Fax Forwarding menu select one of the following Print Print and Forward Faxing 134 Forward 6 From the Forward to menu select one of the following Fax E mail e FTP LDSS eSF 7 Click inside the Forward to Shortcut box and then enter the shortcut number where you want the fax forwarded Note The shortcut number must be a valid shortcut number for the setting that was selected in the Forward to menu 8 Click Submit Faxing 135 Scanning to an FTP address ADF Scanner glass Use the ADF for multiple page documents Use the scanner glass for single pages small items such as postcards or photos transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings M P i The scanner l
63. for the bottom left of the page Notes e Off is the factory default setting for Bottom left All pages is the factory default setting for Print on Header Footer Bottom middle Bottom middle Off Date Time Page number Bates number Custom text Print on All pages First page only All but first page Enter custom text Specifies header footer information for the bottom middle of the page Notes e Off is the factory default setting for Bottom middle All pages is the factory default setting for Print on Header Footer Bottom right Bottom right Off Date Time Page number Bates number Custom text Print on All pages First page only All but first page Enter custom text Specifies header footer information for the bottom right of the page Notes e Off is the factory default setting for Bottom right e All pages is the factory default setting for Print on Understanding printer menus 189 Menu item Overlay Off Confidential Copy Draft Urgent Custom Description Specifies overlay text that is printed on each page of the copy job Note Off is the factory default setting Custom Overlay Specifies custom overlay text Note A maximum of 64 characters is allowed Allow priority copies On Allows interruption of a print job to copy a page or document Note On is the factory default setting Off Custom Job scanning Lets you copy ina single copy job a document
64. frames of failed login attempts from a computer before Login failures all remote users are locked out Failure time frame Notes Lockout time or Login failures specifies the number of failed login attempts before users are Login timeout locked out Settings range from 1 50 3 attempts is the factory default setting Failure time frame specifies the time frame during which failed login attempts can be made before users are locked out Settings range from 1 60 minutes 5 minutes is the factory default setting Lockout time specifies how long a user is locked out after exceeding the login failures limit Settings range from 0 60 minutes 5 minutes is the factory default setting 0 indicates the printer does not impose a lockout time Login timeout specifies how long the remote interface remains idle before automatically logging the user off Settings range from 1 900 seconds 300 seconds is the factory default setting Confidential Print menu Menu item Description Max Invalid PIN Limits the number of times an invalid PIN can be entered Off Notes 2 10 e Off is the default setting This menu item appears only if a printer hard disk is installed Once a limit is reached the jobs for that user name and that PIN are deleted Understanding printer menus 174 Menu item Job Expiration Off 1 hour 4 hours 24 hours 1 week Description Limits the amount of time a confid
65. in isolating the source of a print job problem Activate Notes When Activate is selected all data sent to the printer is printed in hexadecimal and character representation and control codes are not executed To exit or deactivate Hex Trace turn the printer off or reset the printer Coverage Estimator Off On Provides an estimate of the percentage coverage of black on a page The estimate is printed on a separate page at the end of each print job Note Off is the factory default setting Understanding printer menus 220 Menu item LCD Contrast 1 10 Description Adjusts the contrast lighting of the display Notes e 5is the factory default setting Ahigher setting makes the display appear lighter Alower setting makes the display appear darker LCD Brightness 1 10 PDF menu Scale to Fit Yes No Adjusts the brightness of the backlight on the display Notes e 5isthe factory default setting Ahighersetting makes the display appear lighter Alower setting makes the display appear darker Menu item Description Scales page content to fit the selected paper size Note No is the factory default setting Annotations Do Not Print Print PostScript menu Print PS Error Prints annotations in a PDF Note Do Not Print is the factory default setting Menu item Description Prints a page containing the PostScript error On Note Off is the factory de
66. into a tray Surface roughness measured in Sheffield units impacts print clarity and how well toner fuses to the paper Surface friction determines how easily sheets can be separated Paper and specialty media guidelines 77 Grain and formation impacts curling which also influences the mechanics of how the paper behaves as it moves through the printer Brightness and texture look and feel Recycled papers are better than ever however the amount of recycled content in a paper affects the degree of control over foreign matter And while recycled papers are one good path to printing in an environmentally responsible manner they are not perfect The energy required to de ink and deal with additives such as colorants and glue often generates more carbon emissions than does normal paper production However using recycled papers enables better resource management overall Lexmark concerns itself with the responsible use of paper in general based on life cycle assessments of its products To gain a better understanding of the impact of printers on the environment the company commissioned a number of life cycle assessments and found that paper was identified as the primary contributor up to 8096 of carbon emissions caused throughout the entire life of a device from design to end of life This is due to the energy intensive manufacturing processes required to make paper Thus Lexmark seeks to educate customers and partners on
67. is not possible remove a 1 6 mm 0 06 in strip on the leading and driver edge and use a non oozing adhesive Portrait orientation works best especially when printing bar codes Tips on using card stock Card stockis heavy single ply specialty media Many ofits variable characteristics such as moisture content thickness and texture can significantly impact print quality Print samples on the card stock being considered for use before buying large quantities When printing on card stock Make sure the Paper Type is Card Stock Select the appropriate Paper Texture setting Be aware that preprinting perforation and creasing may significantly affect the print quality and cause jams or other paper handling problems Check with the manufacturer or vendor to ensure the card stock can withstand temperatures up to 190 C 374 F without releasing hazardous emissions Do not use preprinted card stock manufactured with chemicals that may contaminate the printer Preprinting introduces semi liquid and volatile components into the printer Use grain short card stock when possible Printing 84 Printing confidential and other held jobs Holding jobs in the printer When sending a job to the printer you can specify that you want the printer to hold the job in memory until you start the job from the printer control panel All print jobs that can be initiated by the user at the printer are called held jobs Note Confidential Veri
68. is turned on Parallel Mode 2 On Off Determines whether or not the parallel port data is sampled on the leading or trailing edge of strobe Note On is the factory default setting Understanding printer menus 170 Menu item Description Mac Binary PS Sets the printer to process Macintosh binary PostScript print jobs On Notes Off Auto Auto is the factory default setting The Off setting filters print jobs using the standard protocol The On setting processes raw binary PostScript print jobs ENA Address Sets the network address information for an external print server that is attached 00C XXX 000 0000 to the printer using a USB cable Note This menu item is available only if the printer is attached to an external print server through the USB port ENA Netmask Sets the netmask information for an external print server that is attached to the OO 0C XXX XXX printer using a USB cable Note This menu item is available only if the printer is attached to an external print server through the USB port ENA gateway Sets the gateway information for an external print server that is attached to the 00 XXX XXX 000 printer using a USB cable Note This menu item is available only if the printer is attached to an external print server through the USB port Serial x menu Menu item Description PCL SmartSwitch Sets the printer to automatically switch to PCL emula
69. kg 40 Ib and requires two or more trained personnel to move it safely A CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY Follow these guidelines to avoid personal injury or printer damage Turn the printer off using the power switch and then unplug the power cord from the wall outlet Disconnect all cords and cables from the printer before moving it Use the handholds located on both sides and rear of the printer to lift it Make sure your fingers are not under the printer when you set it down Before setting up the printer make sure there is adequate clearance around it Use only the power cord provided with this product or the manufacturer s authorized replacement Use only the telecommunications RJ 11 cord provided with this product or a 26 AWG or larger replacement when connecting this product to the public switched telephone network CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD Make sure that all external connections such as Ethernet and telephone system connections are properly installed in their marked plug in ports This product is designed tested and approved to meet strict global safety standards with the use of specific manufacturer s components The safety features of some parts may not always be obvious The manufacturer is not responsible for the use of other replacement parts A CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY Do not cut twist bind crush or place heavy objects on the power cord Do not subject the power cord to abrasion or stress Do not pinch the
70. of IEC 60825 1 Notices 315 Class laser products are not considered to be hazardous The printer contains internally a Class Illb 3b laser that is nominally a 7 milliwatt gallium arsenide laser operating in the wavelength of 655 675 nanometers The laser system and printer are designed so there is never any human access to laser radiation above a Class level during normal operation user maintenance or prescribed service condition Laser advisory label A laser notice label may be affixed to this printer as shown DANGER Invisible laser radiation when cartridges are removed and interlock defeated Avoid exposure to laser beam Perigo Emiss o invisivel de laser quando os cartuchos s o removidos e a trava aberta Evite exposi o ao feixe Opasnost Nevidljivo lasersko zra enje kada su kasete uklonjene i poni tena sigurnosna veza Izbjegavati izlaganje zracima Pozor Nebezpe v skytu neviditeln ho laserov ho z en p i odstran n kazet a odblokov n pojistky Nevystavujte se paprsk m Fare Usynlig laserstr ling nar tonerkassetterne fjernes og aflasning oph ves Undg at komme i kontakt med str len Pas op Onzichtbare laserstraling als cartridges worden verwijderd en vergrendeling open is Voorkom blootstelling aan de stralen Danger Radiations invisibles lors du retrait des cartouches et du d verouillage des loquets Eviter toute exposition au rayon laser Vaara N kym t nt lasers teily on va
71. only the black toner cartridge Note Off is the factory default Note The printer driver is capable of overriding this setting Download Target RAM Flash Disk Sets the storage location for downloads Notes RAM is the factory default setting Storing downloads in flash memory or on a printer hard disk places them in permanent storage Downloads remain in flash memory or on the printer hard disk even when the printer is turned off Storing downloads in RAM is temporary This menu appears only if a flash and or disk option is installed Job Accounting On Off Specifies whether the printer stores statistical information about the most recent print jobs on the hard disk Notes Offis the factory default setting Off means the printer does not store job statistics The statistics include a record of print errors the print time the job size in bytes the requested paper size and type the total number of printed pages and the total number of copies requested Job Accounting is available only when a printer hard disk is installed and working properly It should not be Read Write or Write protected Job Buffer Size should not be set to 100 Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to reset The menu selection is updated Understanding printer menus 214 Menu item Resource Save On Off Description Specifies how t
72. outlet 3 Remove the excess flash memory 4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded outlet 5 Turn the printer back on Troubleshooting 262 58 TOO many trays attached 1 Turn the printer off 2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet 3 Remove the additional trays 4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded outlet 5 Turn the printer back on 59 Incompatible tray lt x gt Try one or more of the following Remove the specified tray Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing without using the specified tray 61 Remove defective disk Try one or more of the following Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing Install a different printer hard disk before performing any operations that require a printer hard disk 62 Disk full Try one or more of the following Touch Continue to clear the message and continue processing Delete fonts macros and other data stored on the printer hard disk nstall a larger printer hard disk 63 Unformatted disk Try one or more of the following Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing Formatthe printer hard disk If the error message remains the hard disk may be defective and require replacing 80 Fuser life warning 1 Ordera replacement fuser immediately When print quality is reduced install the new fuser using the instruction sheet that came with the replacement part 2 Touch Continue to
73. pO DII MENGE RUE 311 Contacting Customer SUPPO eenen E 311 Product informatiOTiss o oe oet nete eee E A A O K A AA t 312 Edition OTIC Emossa T 312 Contents 5 Contents 6 Safety information Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet that is near the product and easily accessible Do not place or use this product near water or wet locations A CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY This product uses a laser Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure This product uses a printing process that heats the print media and the heat may cause the media to release emissions You must understand the section in your operating instructions that discusses the guidelines for selecting print media to avoid the possibility of harmful emissions A CAUTION HOT SURFACE The inside of the printer might be hot To reduce the risk of injury from a hot component allow the surface to cool before touching Use care when you replace a lithium battery A CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY There is a danger of explosion if a lithium battery is incorrectly replaced Replace it only with the same or an equivalent type of lithium battery Do not recharge disassemble or incinerate a lithium battery Discard used batteries according to the manufacturer s instructions and local regulations A CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY The printer weight is greater than 18
74. paper onto which you are copying To reduce or enlarge a copy 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 On the home screen touch Copy Copying 96 4 From the Scale area touch the arrows to enlarge or reduce your copies Touching Copy to or Copy from after setting Scale manually changes the scale value back to Auto 5 Touch Copy It Adjusting copy quality 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 Ifyou are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 On the home screen touch Copy 4 Touch Options 5 Touch Content 6 Touch the button that best represents what you are copying Text Used for original documents that are mostly text or line art Text Photo Used when the original documents are a mixture of text and graphics or pictures Photograph Used when the original document is a high quality photograph or inkjet print Printed Image Used when
75. photoconductor TONER IS LOW Replace the toner cartridge Troubleshooting 298 Gray background These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following CHECK THE TONER DARKNESS SETTING Select a different toner darkness setting in the printer software before sending the job to print A TONER CARTRIDGE MAY BE WORN OR DEFECTIVE Replace the worn or defective toner cartridge Incorrect margins EN ABC DEF These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following CHECK THE PAPER GUIDES Move the guides in the tray to the correct positions for the paper size loaded CHECK THE PAPER SIZE SETTING Make sure the paper size setting matches the paper loaded in the tray 1 From the printer control panel check the Paper Size setting from the Paper menu 2 Before sending the job to print specify the correct size setting For Windows users specify the size from Print Properties For Macintosh users specify the size from the Page Setup dialog Troubleshooting 299 Light colored line white line or incorrectly colored line These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following A TONER CARTRIDGE IS DEFECTIVE Replace the defective toner cartridge A PHOTOCONDUCTOR IS DEFECTIVE Replace the defective photoconductor THE TRANSFER MODULE IS DEFECTIVE Replace the transfer module THE PRINTHEAD LENSES ARE DIRTY Clean the printhead lenses Paper curl These are possible solutio
76. power cord between objects such as furniture and walls If any of these things happen a risk of fire or electrical shock results Inspect the power cord regularly for signs of such problems Remove the power cord from the electrical outlet before inspecting it Refer service or repairs other than those described in the user documentation to a professional service person A CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD To avoid the risk of electric shock when cleaning the exterior of the printer unplug the power cord from the wall outlet and disconnect all cables from the printer before proceeding Safety information 7 A CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD Do not use the fax feature during a lightning storm Do not set up this product ormakeany electrical or cabling connections such as the fax feature power cord or telephone during a lightning storm A CAUTION TIPPING HAZARD Floor mounted configurations require additional furniture for stability You must use either a printer stand or printer base if you are using a high capacity input tray a duplex unit and an input option or more than one input option If you purchased a multifunction printer MFP that scans copies and faxes you may need additional furniture For more information see www lexmark com multifunctionprinters A CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD If you are installing an Internal Solutions Port ISP after setting up the printer then turn the printer off and unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before
77. setting Secure PDF TIFF tif JPEG jpg XPS xps PDF Version Sets the version level of the PDF file for FTP 1 2 1 6 Note 1 5 is the factory default setting Content Specifies the type of content that will be scanned to FTP Text Photo Notes Photograph Text Text Photo is the factory default setting Text Photo is used when the documents are mostly text or line art Photograph is used when the documentis a high quality photograph or inkjet print Text is used when the document is mostly text Color Specifies whether a job prints in grayscale or color Gray Note Gray is the factory default setting Color Understanding printer menus 208 Menu item Description Resolution Specifies how many dots per inch are scanned 75 Note 150 dpi is the factory default setting 150 200 300 400 600 Darkness Lightens or darkens the output 1 9 Note 5 is the factory default setting Orientation Specifies the orientation of the scanned image Portrait Note Portrait is the factory default setting Landscape Original Size Specifies the paper size of the document that is being scanned Letter Note Letter is the US factory default setting A4 is the international factory default Legal setting Executive Folio Statement Universal 4x6in 3x5 in Business Card Custom Scan Size lt x gt A4 A5 Oficio Mexico JIS B5 Book Original Auto Size Sense Mixed Letter Legal Sides Duplex Specifies how the text and g
78. settings Delayed Send Lets you send a fax at a later time or date After setting up your fax touch Delayed Send enter the time and date you would like to send your fax and then touch Done This setting can be especially useful in sending information to fax lines that are not readily available during certain hours or when transmission times are cheaper Note If the printer is turned off when the delayed fax is scheduled to be sent the fax is sent the next time the printer is turned on Advanced Imaging Adjusts Background Removal Contrast Scan Edge to Edge Shadow Detail and Mirror Image before you fax the document Custom Job Job Build Combines multiple scanning jobs into a single job Transmission Log Prints the transmission log or transmission error log Scan Preview Displays the image before it is included in the fax When the first page is scanned the scanning is paused and a preview image appears Edge Erase Eliminates smudges or information around the edges of a document You can choose to eliminate an equal area around all four sides of the paper or pick a particular edge Edge Erase will erase whatever is within the area selected leaving nothing on that portion of the scan Advanced Duplex Controls how many sides and what orientation an original document has and whether original documents are bound along the long edge or the short edge Note Some Advanced Duplex options may not be available on all printer m
79. setup page 44 Networking Guide 254 noise reducing 60 noise emission levels 314 notices 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 322 0 options 2 000 sheet tray 40 550 sheet specialty media drawer 40 550 sheet tray 40 fax card 23 firmware card 28 firmware cards 23 flash memory card 28 internal 23 Internal Solutions Port 29 Index 334 memory card 26 memory cards 23 networking 23 ports 23 printer hard disk 35 options touch screen copy 101 102 103 e mail 109 110 fax 132 133 FTP 138 139 scan to computer 142 143 144 ordering fuser or transfer module 238 photoconductors 237 toner cartridges 237 waste toner box 238 output file type changing 108 P paper characteristics 76 letterhead 77 preprinted forms 77 recycled 58 77 selecting 77 setting size 65 setting type 65 storing 79 unacceptable 77 Universal Paper Size 157 Universal size setting 65 paper feed troubleshooting message remains after jam is cleared 294 paper jams avoiding 266 paper jams clearing 200 268 200 201 269 201 270 202 272 203 274 230 275 24x 276 250 278 290 294 230 279 Paper Loading menu 154 Paper Size Type menu 147 paper sizes supported 79 Paper Texture menu 151 paper type custom 74 paper types supported by printer 81 where to load 81 Paper Weight menu 152 paper weights supported by printer 81 Parallel lt x gt menu 169 PCL Emul menu 222 PDF menu 221 photoconductor maintenance counter resetting 241 photoc
80. that You have completed the initial setup of the printer The printer is connected to your network with the appropriate type of cable Additional printer setup 51 For Windows users 1 Insert the Software and Documentation CD Wait for the Welcome screen to appear If the CD does not launch after a minute then do the following a Click or click Start and then click Run b In the Start Search or Run box type D setup exe where Dis the letter of your CD or DVD drive Click Install Printer and Software 3 Click Agree to agree to the License Agreement 4 Select Suggested and then click Next O N O U 9 Note To configure the printer using a static IP address using IPv6 or to configure printers using scripts select Custom and follow the on screen instructions Select Wired Network Attach and then click Next Select the printer manufacturer from the list Select the printer model from the list and then click Next Select the printer from the list of printers discovered on the network and then click Finish Note If your configured printer does not appear in the list of discovered printers click Add Port and follow the on screen instructions Follow the on screen instructions to complete the installation For Macintosh users 1 2 Allow the network DHCP server to assign an IP address to the printer Print the network setup page from the printer For information on printing a network setup pa
81. that contains mixed paper sizes On Notes Off e Off is the factory default setting This menu item appears only if a valid printer hard drive is installed Allow Save as Shortcut On Off Lets you save custom copy settings as shortcuts Note On is the factory default setting Background Removal 4to 4 Adjusts the amount of background visible on a copy Note 0 is the factory default setting Auto Center On Off Lets you automatically center the copy on the page Note Off is the factory default setting Color Dropout Color Dropout None Red Green Blue Default Red Threshold 0 255 Default Green Threshold 0 255 Default Blue Threshold 0 255 Specifies which color to drop during copies and how much to increase or decrease the dropout Notes None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout 128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold Contrast 0 5 Best for content Specifies the contrast used for the copy job Note Best for content is the factory default setting Understanding printer menus 190 Mirror Image On Off Menu item Description Creates a mirror image of the original document Note Off is the factory default setting Negative Image On Off Creates a negative image of the original document Note Off is the factory default setting Shadow Detail 4to 4 Adjusts the amount of shadow detail visible on a copy Note
82. the Copy to and Copy from settings each copy is either printed on mixed paper sizes Example 1 or scaled to fit a single paper size Example 2 Example 1 Copying to mixed paper sizes Theprinterhastwo papertrays onetray loaded with letter size paper and the other with legal size paper A document that contains letter and legal size pages needs to be copied 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides On the home screen touch Copy Touch Copy from and then touch Auto Size Sense Touch Copy to and then touch Auto Size Match a Un A WUN Touch Copy It The scanner identifies the mixed paper sizes as they scan Copies are printed on mixed paper sizes corresponding to the paper sizes of the original document Copying 95 Example 2 Copying to a single paper size The printer has one paper tray loaded with letter size paper A document that contains letter and legal size pages needs to be copied 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass a wu AB UN Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clip
83. the e mail subject on O Uu A WN Touch Done o Touch Message 10 Type an e mail message 11 Touch Done 12 Touch E mail It Changing the output file type 1 Loadan original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 On the home screen touch E mail 4 Type an e mail address 5 Touch Options 6 Touch the button that represents the file type you want to send PDF Creates a single file with multiple pages viewable with Adobe Reader Adobe Reader is provided free by Adobe at www adobe com Secure PDF Creates an encrypted PDF file that protects the file contents from unauthorized access TIFF Creates multiple files or a single file If Multi page TIFF is turned off in the Settings menu of the Embedded Web Server then TIFF saves one page in each file The file size is usually larger than an equivalent JPEG E mailing 708 JPEG Creates and attaches a separate file for each page of your original document viewable by most Web browsers and graphics programs e XPS Creates a single XML Paper Specification XPS file with multiple pages viewable using an Internet Explorer hosted viewer and the NET Framework or by download
84. the paper type you loaded differs from the type that was previously loaded in the tray then change the Paper Type setting for the tray Loading the multipurpose feeder The multipurpose feeder accommodates a variety of media types including envelopes Stack height limiter Tray release latch Paper release lever Size indicators Width guide Ou 5 WIN Width guide release tab Loading paper and specialty media 68 1 Press the tray release latch to the left and then pull the multipurpose tray down 3 Flex sheets of paper or specialty media back and forth to loosen them and then fan them Do not fold or crease the paper Straighten the edges on a level surface Paper Envelopes Avoid touching the print side of transparencies Be careful not to scratch them Loading paper and specialty media 69 Transparencies Avoid touching the print side of transparencies Be careful not to scratch them 4 Load the paper or specialty media Slide the stack into the multipurpose feeder until it comes to a stop Notes Do not exceed the maximum stack height by forcing paper under the stack height limiter Load only one size and type of media at a time Media should lie flat and fit loosely in the multipurpose tray If the media is pushed too far into the multipurpose feeder then press the paper release lever to remove it Load e
85. the printer examines data determines the format and then processes it appropriately Changingthis setting from the control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart The menu selection is updated Serial Buffer Sets the size of the serial input buffer Disabled Notes Auto ata anim size allowed Auto is the factory default setting The Disabled setting turns off job buffering Any jobs already buffered on the disk are printed before normal processing is resumed The serial buffer size setting can be changed in 1k increments The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the printer the size of the other link buffers and whether Resource Save is set to On or Off To increase the maximum size range for the Serial Buffer disable or reduce the size of the parallel serial and network buffers Changing this setting from the control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart The menu selection is updated Job Buffering Temporarily stores jobs on the printer hard disk before printing off Notes On NEG e Off is the factory default setting The Off setting does not buffer print jobs to the hard disk The On setting buffers jobs on the printer hard disk The Auto setting buffers print jobs only if the printer is busy processing data from another input port e Changing this setting from the control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart
86. time in seconds the printer waits for additional data before canceling a print job Notes 40 seconds is the factory default setting Wait Timeout is available only when the printer is using PostScript emulation This setting has no effect on PCL emulation print jobs Sets the amount of time the printer waits for user intervention before it holds jobs that require unavailable resources and continues to print other jobs in the print queue Notes 30 seconds is the factory default setting This menu item appears only when a hard disk is installed Lets the printer automatically continue printing from certain offline situations when not resolved within the specified time period Note Disabled is the factory default setting Print Recovery Jam Recovery Auto Specifies whether the printer reprints jammed pages Notes Auto is the factory default setting The printer reprints jammed pages unless the memory required to hold the pages is needed for other printer tasks On sets the printer to always reprint jammed pages Off sets the printer to never reprint jammed pages Print Recovery Page Protect Off On Lets the printer successfully printa page that may not have printed otherwise Notes e Offisthe factory default setting Off prints a partial page when there is not enough memory to print the whole page On sets the printer to process the whole page so that the entire page prints Facto
87. tray Light Note Normal is the factory default setting Normal Heavy Colored Weight Specifies the relative weight of the paper loaded in a specific tray Light Note Normal is the factory default setting Normal Heavy Light Weight Specifies the relative weight of the paper loaded in a specific tray Light Note Light is the factory default setting Heavy Weight Specifies the relative weight of the paper loaded in a specific tray Heavy Note Heavy is the factory default setting Rough Cotton Weight Specifies the relative weight of the paper loaded in a specific tray Light Note Normal is the factory default setting Normal Heavy Custom lt x gt Weight Specifies the relative weight of the custom paper loaded in a specific tray Light Notes Normal Heavy Normal is the factory default setting Settings appear only if the custom type is supported Paper Loading menu Menu item Recycled Loading Description Duplex Recycled as the paper type Off Note Off is the factory default setting Glossy Loading Determines whether 2 sided printing occurs for all jobs that specify Duplex Glossy as the paper type Off Note Off is the factory default setting Notes Duplex sets the printer default to 2 sided printing for every print job unless 1 sided printing is selected from Print Properties Mt If Duplex is selected then all print jobs are sent through the duplex unit including 1 sided jobs Understanding prin
88. users 1 Click or click Start and then click Run 2 Inthe Start Search or Run box type control printers 3 Press Enter or click OK The printer folder opens 4 Select the printer 5 Right click the printer and then select Properties Additional printer setup 45 6 Click the Install Options tab 7 Under Available Options add any installed hardware options 8 Click Apply For Macintosh users In Mac OS X version 10 5 or later 1 From the Apple menu choose System Preferences Click Print amp Fax Select the printer and then click Options amp Supplies Click Driver and then add any installed hardware options Uu A WU N Click OK In Mac OS X version 10 4 and earlier From the Finder desktop choose Go Applications Double click Utilities and then double click Print Center or Printer Setup Utility Select the printer and then from the Printers menu choose Show Info From the pop up menu choose Installable Options uU A WN Add any installed hardware options and then click Apply Changes Setting up wireless printing Follow these instructions if your printer model is wireless Note A Service Set Identifier SSID is a name assigned to a wireless network Wireless Encryption Protocol WEP and Wi Fi Protected Access WPA are types of security used on a network Information you will need to set up the printer on a wireless network Note Do not connect the installation or network cables un
89. while Scan the Next Page Finish the Job appears Canceling a fax after the original documents have been scanned to memory 1 Onthe home screen touch Cancel Jobs The Cancel Jobs screen appears 2 Touch the job or jobs you want to cancel Only three jobs appear on the screen touch the down arrow until the job you want appears and then touch the job you want to cancel 3 Touch Delete Selected Jobs The Deleting Selected Jobs screen appears the selected jobs are deleted and then the home screen appears Faxing 131 Understanding fax options Original Size This option opens a screen where you can choose the size of the documents you are going to fax Touch a paper size button to select that size as the Original Size setting The fax screen appears with your new setting displayed When Original Size is set to Mixed Letter Legal you can scan an original document that contains mixed paper sizes When Original Size is set to Auto Size Sense the scanner automatically determines the size of the original document Content This option tells the printer the original document type Choose from Text Text Photo or Photograph Color can be turned on or off with any of the Content choices Content affects the quality and size of your scan Text Emphasizes sharp black high resolution text against a clean white background Text Photo Used when the original documents are a mixture of text and graphics or pictures e Ph
90. 1999 5 EC on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of the Member States Notices 320 relating to electromagnetic compatibility safety of electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits and on radio equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment Compliance is indicated by the CE marking A declaration of conformity with the requirements of the directives is available from the Director of Manufacturing and Technical Support Lexmark International S A Boigny France Refer to the table at the end of the Notices section for further compliance information Radio interference notice Warning This is a product that complies with the emission requirements of EN55022 Class A limits and immunity requirements of EN55024 This product is not intended to be used in residential domestic environments This is a Class A product In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures Exposure to radio frequency radiation The radiated output power of this device is far below the radio frequency exposure limits of the FCC and other regulatory agencies A minimum separation of 20 cm 8 inches must be maintained between the antenna and any persons for this device to satisfy the RF exposure requirements of the FCC and other regulatory agencies Notice to users in Brazil Este equipamento opera em carater secundario isto e nao tem di
91. 37 4 Reattach the system board cover Additional printer setup 38 Reattaching the system board cover Warning Potential Damage System board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity Touch something metal on the printer before touching any system board electronic components or connectors Note This task requires a flathead screwdriver 1 Align the eight keyholes with the screws to replace the cover Additional printer setup 39 2 Slide the cover down and then turn each screw clockwise to tighten Installing optional trays The printer supports up to four optional input sources an optional 550 sheet tray an optional 2 000 sheet tray and an optional 550 sheet specialty media tray Follow these instructions to install any of the input sources Note The X734de X736de and X738de model printers will support a total of four optional input sources When using a 2000 sheet tray only one additional 550 sheet input option may be installed A CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY The printer weight is greater than 18 kg 40 Ib and requires two or more trained personnel to lift it safely A CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD If you are installing an optional tray after setting up the printer then turn the printer off and unplug the power cord the USB cable and the Ethernet cable before continuing A CAUTION TIPPING HAZARD Floor mounted configurations require additional furniture for stabil
92. 4 and earlier a JOA mon c From the Go menu choose Applications Double click Utilities Double click Print Center or Printer Setup Utility From the Printer List click Add Choose the Default Browser tab Click More Printers From the first pop up menu choose AppleTalk From the second pop up menu select Local AppleTalk zone Additional printer setup 99 i Select the printer from the list j Click Add Setting up serial printing In serial printing data is transferred one bit at a time Although serial printing is usually slower than parallel printing it is the preferred option when there is a great deal of distance between the printer and computer or when an interface with a better transfer rate is not available After installing the serial port you will need to configure the printer and the computer so they can communicate Make sure you have connected the serial cable to the serial port on your printer 1 Set the parameters in the printer a m OQ n c From the printer control panel navigate to the menu with port settings Locate the submenu with serial port settings Make any necessary changes to the serial settings Save the new settings Print a menu settings page 2 Install the printer driver a se 07 0 n c l m n Insert the Software and Documentation CD It launches automatically If the CD does not launch automatically then do the following 1 Click 9 or click Start and then c
93. 5 Ib bond paper Curl Curl is the tendency for paper to curl at its edges Excessive curl can cause paper feeding problems Curl can occur after the paper passes through the printer where it is exposed to high temperatures Storing paper unwrapped in hot humid cold or dry conditions even in the trays can contribute to paper curling prior to printing and can cause feeding problems Smoothness Paper smoothness directly affects print quality If paper is too rough toner cannot fuse to it properly If paper is too smooth it can cause paper feeding or print quality issues Always use paper between 100 and 300 Sheffield points however smoothness between 150 and 200 Sheffield points produces the best print quality Moisture content The amount of moisture in paper affects both print quality and the ability of the printer to feed the paper correctly Leave paper in its original wrapper until it is time to use it This limits the exposure of paper to moisture changes that can degrade its performance Condition paper before printing by storing it in its original wrapper in the same environment as the printer for 24 to 48 hours before printing Extend the time several days if the storage or transportation environment is very different from the printer environment Thick paper may also require a longer conditioning period Grain direction Grain refers to the alignment of the paper fibers in a sheet of paper Grain is either grain long runnin
94. 69 200 Paper jam x pages jammed 201 Paper jam check area name 200 201 paper jams on page 269 201 Paper jam x pages jammed 201 paper jam on page 270 202 Paper jam check area name 202 paper jam on page 272 202 Paper jam x pages jammed 203 Paper jam check area name 203 paper jam on page 274 203 Paper jam x pages jammed 230 Paper jam area name 230 paper jam on page 275 230 Paper jam x pages jammed 241 Paper jam check area name 24x paper jam on page 276 241 Paper jam x pages jammed 24x Paper jam check area name 24x paper jam on page 276 24x Paper jam x pages jammed Troubleshooting 267 Message See 250 Paper jam check area name 250 paper jam on page 278 250 Paper jam x pages jammed 290 Scanner jam remove all originals from the scanner 290 294 paper jams on page 279 290 Scanner jam remove jammed originals from the scanner 291 Scanner jam remove all originals from the scanner 291 Scanner jam remove jammed originals from the scanner 292 Scanner jam remove all originals from the scanner 292 Scanner jam remove jammed originals from the scanner 293 Replace all originals if restarting job 293 Replace jammed originals if restarting job 293 02 Flatbed cover open 293 02 Replace jammed originals if restarting job 294 Scanner j
95. 8240 for letter size transparencies and Lexmark part number 1248241 for A4 size transparencies Tips on using envelopes Print samples on the envelopes being considered for use before buying large quantities When printing on envelopes Use envelopes designed specifically for laser printers Check with the manufacturer or vendor to ensure the envelopes can withstand temperatures up to 190 C 374 F without sealing wrinkling curling excessively or releasing hazardous emissions For the best performance use envelopes made from 90 g m 24 Ib bond paper Use up to 105 g m 28 Ib bond weight for envelopes as long as the cotton content is 2596 or less All cotton envelopes must not exceed 90 g m 24 Ib bond weight Use only new envelopes To optimize performance and minimize jams do not use envelopes that Have excessive curl or twist Are stuck together or damaged in any way Have windows holes perforations cutouts or embossing Have metal clasps string ties or folding bars Have an interlocking design Have postage stamps attached Have any exposed adhesive when the flap is in the sealed or closed position Have bent corners Have rough cockle or laid finishes Adjust the width guides to fit the width of the envelopes Note A combination of high humidity over 6096 and the high printing temperature may wrinkle or seal envelopes Printing 83 Tips on using labels Print samples on the labels being considered
96. 88 Cartridge lowappears when the toner is low Can receive but not send faxes These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following THE PRINTER IS NOT IN FAX MODE On the home screen touch Fax to put the printer in Fax mode THE DOCUMENT IS NOT LOADED PROPERLY Load the original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass MAKE SURE THE SHORTCUT NUMBER IS SET UP PROPERLY Check to make sure the shortcut number has been programmed for the number that you want to dial Asan alternative dial the telephone number manually Received fax has poor print quality These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following RE SEND THE DOCUMENT Ask the person who sent you the fax to e Check that the quality of the original document is satisfactory Resend the fax There may have been a problem with the quality of the telephone line connection ncrease the fax scan resolution if possible THE TONER MAY BE LOW When 88 Cartridge low appears or when you experience faded print replace the cartridge MAKE SURE THE FAX TRANSMISSION SPEED IS NOT SET TOO HIGH Decrease the incoming fax transmission speed 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser Note
97. ACTA A compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this product It is designed to be connected to a compatible modular jack that is also compliant See your setup documentation for more information The Ringer Equivalence Number REN is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to a telephone line Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call In most but not all areas the sum of RENs should not exceed five 5 0 To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to a line as determined by the total RENs contact your local telephone company For products approved after July 23 2001 the REN for this product is part of the product identifier that has the format US AAAEQHITXXXX The digits represented by are the REN without a decimal point for example 03 is a REN of 0 3 For earlier products the REN is shown separately on the label If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network the telephone company will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required If advance notice is not practical the telephone company will notify the customer as soon as possible You will also be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC The telephone company may make changes in its facilities equipment operations or procedures that could affect the operation of this equipment If this happens the telephone c
98. ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 On the home screen touch Copy 4 Touch Options 5 Touch Separator Sheets Note Collate must be On for the separator sheets to be placed between copies If Collate is Off the separator sheets are added to the end of the print job 6 Select one of the following Between Copies Between Jobs Between Pages 7 Touch Done 8 Touch Copy It Copying multiple pages onto a single sheet In order to save paper you can copy either two or four consecutive pages of a multiple page document onto a single sheet of paper Notes The Paper Size must be set to Letter Legal A4 or B5 JIS The Copy Size must be set to 100 1 Loadan original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides On the home screen touch Copy Select a duplex setting Touch Options Touch Paper Saver N Oo wu A W N Select the desired output Copying 98 8 Touch Print Page Borders if you want a box drawn around each page of the copies 9 Touch Done 10 Touch Copy It Creating a custom job job build The custom job or job build is used to c
99. ADF glass S B 3 Wipe the areas shown and let them dry 4 Close the scanner cover Cleaning the ADF parts Clean the ADF parts periodically to maintain optimal printing performance Residue on the ADF parts may cause print quality issues and false 290 294 paper jam messages 1 Turn the printer off 2 Slightly dampen a soft lint free cloth with water Maintaining the printer 230 3 Open the ADF cover 4 Remove the pick roller assembly 5 Wipe the surface of both pick rollers Maintaining the printer 231 6 Replace the pick roller assembly 7 Wipe the entire surface under the ADF cover including the two small white rollers 8 Wipe the separator pad and then wipe the pick pad Maintaining the printer 232 9 Pull the flap up as shown and then wipe the sensor behind it Maintaining the printer 233 Cleaning the printhead lenses Clean the printhead lenses when you encounter print quality problems 1 Open the upper front door and then open the lower front door Warning Potential Damage To avoid overexposing the photoconductors do not leave the front doors open for more than 10 minutes 2 Remove all four toner cartridges Do not remove the photoconductors for this procedure 3 Locate the four printhead lenses 4 Clean the lenses using a can of compressed air Warning Potential Damage Do not touch the printhead lenses 5 Reinstall the four toner cartridges Maintaining
100. Distinctive Ring service See Connecting to a distinctive ring service on page 116 Connect to a telephone line telephone and answering machine See Connecting the printer and a telephone or answering machine to the same telephone line on page 117 Connect through an adapter used in your area Connect to a computer with a modem See Connecting to an adapter for your country or region on page 119 See Connecting to a computer with a modem on page 124 Faxing 114 Connecting to an analog telephone line If your telecommunications equipment uses a US style RJ11 telephone line then follow these steps to connect the equipment 1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the printer LINE port L 2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to an active analog telephone wall jack Connecting to a DSL service If you subscribe to a DSL service then contact the DSL provider to obtain a DSL filter and telephone cord and then follow these steps to connect the equipment 1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the printer LINE port L 2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to the DSL filter Note Your DSL filter may look different than the one in the illustration 3 Connect the DSL filter cable to an active telephone wall jack Faxing 115 Connecting to a PBX or ISDN system If you use a PBX or ISDN conver
101. ECT TO THIS PRODUCT AND SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIM THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND SATISFACTORY QUALITY ANY WARRANTIES THAT MAY NOT BE DISCLAIMED UNDER APPLICABLE LAW ARE LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE WARRANTY PERIOD NO WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WILL APPLY AFTER THIS PERIOD ALL INFORMATION SPECIFICATIONS PRICES AND SERVICES ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE AT ANY TIME WITHOUT NOTICE Limitation of liability Your sole remedy under this limited warranty is set forth in this document For any claim concerning performance or nonperformance of Lexmark or a Remarketer for this product under this limited warranty you may recover actual damages up to the limit set forth in the following paragraph Lexmark s liability for actual damages from any cause whatsoever will be limited to the amount you paid for the product that caused the damages This limitation of liability will not apply to claims by you for bodily injury or damage to real property or tangible personal property for which Lexmark is legally liable IN NO EVENT WILL LEXMARK BE LIABLE FOR ANY LOST PROFITS LOST SAVINGS INCIDENTAL DAMAGE OR OTHER ECONOMIC OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES This is true even if you advise Lexmark or a Remarketer of the possibility of such damages Lexmark is not liable for any claim by you based on a third party claim This limitation of remedies also applies to claims against any Suppliers and Remarketers of Lexmark L
102. ECURELY CONNECTED Check the cable connections to the printer and print server to make sure they are secure For more information see the setup documentation that came with the printer Troubleshooting 281 Confidential and other held jobs do not print These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following PARTIAL JOB NO JOB OR BLANK PAGE PRINTS The print job may contain a formatting error or invalid data Delete the print job and then print it again For PDF documents recreate the PDF and then print it again If you are printing from the Internet then the printer may be reading multiple job titles as duplicates and deleting all jobs except the first one For Windows users open Print Properties From the Print and Hold dialog select the Keep duplicate documents check box under the User name text box before entering a PIN number For Macintosh users save each print job naming each job differently and then send the individual jobs to the printer MAKE SURE THE PRINTER HAS SUFFICIENT MEMORY Free up additional printer memory by scrolling through the list of held jobs and deleting some of them Job takes longer than expected to print These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following REDUCE THE COMPLEXITY OF THE PRINT JOB Reduce the number and size of fonts the number and complexity of images and the number of pages in the job CHANGE THE PAGE PROTECT SETTING TO OFF On the home scre
103. Facilities may not exist in your area When you return a cartridge to Lexmark you can reuse the box that the cartridge came in Lexmark will recycle the box Returning Lexmark cartridges for reuse or recycling The Lexmark Cartridge Collection Program diverts millions of Lexmark cartridges from landfills annually by making it both easy and free for Lexmark customers to return used cartridges to Lexmark for reuse or recycling One hundred percent of the empty cartridges returned to Lexmark are either reused or demanufactured for recycling Boxes used to return the cartridges are also recycled To return Lexmark cartridges for reuse or recycling follow the instructions that came with your printer or cartridge and use the pre paid shipping label You can also 1 Visit our Web site at www lexmark com recycle 2 From the Toner Cartridges section select your country from the list 3 Follow the instructions on the computer screen Minimizing your printer s environmental impact 64 Loading paper and specialty media This section explains how to load the 550 sheet trays the 2 000 sheet tray and the multipurpose feeder It also includes information about paper orientation setting the Paper Size and Paper Type and linking and unlinking trays Setting the Paper Size and Paper Type The Paper Size setting is automatically sensed according to the position of the paper guides in each tray except the standard 550 sheet tray and the multipurpose t
104. Fs do not print 280 paper curl 300 paper frequently jams 294 tray linking does not work 283 unexpected page breaks occur 284 printer configurations 12 minimum clearances 10 models 12 moving 253 selecting a location 10 shipping 253 printer control panel 16 factory defaults restoring 255 printer hard disk installing 35 printer messages 1565 Emulation error load emulation option 266 Index 335 31 Replace defective cartridge 259 32 Cartridge part number unsupported by device 260 34 Short paper 260 35 Insufficient memory to support Resource Save feature 260 37 Insufficient memory to collate job 260 37 Insufficient memory some Held Jobs were deleted 260 38 Memory full 260 39 Complex page some data may not have printed 261 50 PPDS font error 261 51 Defective flash detected 261 52 Not enough free space in flash memory for resources 261 54 Network lt x gt software error 261 54 Standard network software error 261 55 Unsupported option in slot 262 56 Parallel port lt x gt disabled 262 56 Serial port lt x gt disabled 262 56 Standard USB port disabled 262 58 Too many flash options installed 262 58 Too many trays attached 263 59 Incompatible tray lt x gt 263 61 Remove defective disk 263 62 Disk full 263 63 Unformatted disk 263 80 Fuser life warning 263 80 Replace fuser 264 82 Replace waste toner box 251 264 82 Waste toner box missing 264 82 Waste toner box nearly full 251 83 Replace
105. K b tiskaj m pras b m un citiem ar to saist tajiem noteikumiem Lietuvi iuo Lexmark International Inc deklaruoja kad is produktas atitinka esminius reikalavimus ir kitas 1999 5 EB direktyvos nuostatas Malti Bil pre enti Lexmark International Inc jiddikjara li dan il prodott huwa konformi mal ti ijiet essenzjali u ma dispo izzjonijiet o rajn relevanti li jinsabu fid Direttiva 1999 5 KE Nederlands Hierbij verklaart Lexmark International Inc dat het toestel dit product in overeenstemming is met de essenti le eisen en de andere relevante bepalingen van richtlijn 1999 5 EG Norsk Lexmark International Inc erkl rer herved at dette produktet er i samsvar med de grunnleggende krav og vrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999 5 EF Polski Niniejszym Lexmark International Inc o wiadcza e niniejszy produkt jest zgodny z zasadniczymi wymogami oraz pozosta ymi stosownymi postanowieniami Dyrektywy 1999 5 EC Portugu s A Lexmark International Inc declara que este este produto est conforme com os requisitos essenciais e outras disposi es da Diretiva 1999 5 CE Slovensky Lexmark International Inc t mto vyhlasuje Ze tento produkt sp a z kladn po iadavky a v etky pr slu n ustanovenia smernice 1999 5 ES Slovensko Lexmark International Inc izjavlja da je ta izdelek v skladu z bistvenimi zahtevami in ostalimi relevantnimi dolo ili direktive 1999 5 ES Svenska H rmed intygar Lexmark International Inc
106. LEXMARK X73x Series User s Guide May 2009 www lexmark com Machine type s 7526 Model s 235 275 295 436 476 496 636 676 Contents Safety informatioOn cece cccsssssssssssssssssssesssssssssssssssssseeees 7 Learning about the printer eeeeeeeeeeeeececsesee 9 Thank you for choosing this DEIFIEBEL esae ecu Pero Ou trn dits to nne nU Ton eoi e utens 9 Findinointormationabout the pEIEBE oos pd erede seirian i ERU ru an eub pt de 9 Selecting a location for the DEIDIEGE s eoe decur ier bru RES VR Sea enc ti tei rp SEE USER d IMS SH UM ERE 10 PRM Sh CONM GUNA e RENE 12 Basic functions of the SCHIBE ccscsvsscasesiccnnssevsrossdssevechontestasotvesbasaboxtansssoavenedssabendasbavouvebeutechornavkaceteasvoavesbavesbeatenssroavtccenes 13 Understanding the ADF and scanner oasis rh ttes ibi beer Hir eco Resin re assi persil ie cds 14 Using the security lock featured a e ROO FAN UN SNPRA REED PE UEM UD SORA US PAM M QNNM IUE 15 Understanding the printer control partel eeno ret ree rosse teo tese rape hunt bsetose d cesar pe l ein aes 16 Understanding the hore SCEeOh ssi isis hb pri rint kn Pnsk kt cian iiber QU rita Fes PEv CHE Ku Ert uto Eun FU ER MIR PcUK 17 Using thie touch screen DULIONS TE 19 Additional printer setup cec eere eene nenne 23 Installing Hater ial Roleiijoln Sem 23 installing optional trays sce bein EQUUM B d HQ EE E E FORM EE UU
107. Maintaining the printer 237 When 84 Replace lt color gt photoconductor appears you must replace the specified photoconductor Part number Photoconductor C734X20G Photoconductor Multi Pack C734X24G Ordering a fuser or a transfer module When 80 Fuser Life Warningor83 Transfer Module Life Warning appears order a replacement fuser or a transfer module When 80 Replace Fuseror83 Replace Transfer Module appears install the new fuser or the new transfer module For installation information see the documentation that came with the part Part name Part number Fuser 40X5095 100 volt 40X5093 115 volt 40X5094 230 volt Transfer Module 40X5096 Ordering a waste toner box When 82 Waste toner box nearly fullappears order areplacement waste toner box When 82 Replace waste toner box appears you must replace the waste toner box Note Waste toner box reuse is not recommended Part name Part number cage Ordering ADF replacement parts Order ADF replacement parts if you experience problems with paper double feeding or failing to feed through the ADF Part name Part number ADF pick assembly 40X5188 Separator pad 40X5187 ADF pick pad 40X5189 J Maintaining the printer 238 Replacing Supplies Replacing a photoconductor There are three different display messages that may appear when a photoconductor replacement is necessary 84 Replace color photoconductor
108. Notes Best Fit P A nehor Center BestFit is the factory default setting Fit Height Width When Auto Fit is set to On Scaling is automatically set to Best Fit Fit Height Fit Width Orientation Sets the image orientation Portrait Note Portrait is the factory default setting Landscape Rev Portrait Rev Landscape J Understanding printer menus 226 PictBridge menu Menu item Description Photo Size Selects the optimal photo size Auto Notes L 2L Auto is the factory default setting Hagaki Postcard e If both the printer and the PictBridge enabled camera have a value for this Card Size setting the camera value always supersedes the printer value 100x150 mm 4x6 inches 8x10 inches Letter A4 A5 JIS B5 Layout Selects the optimal photo layout Auto Notes Off 2 Up Auto is the factory default setting 3Up f both the printer and the PictBridge enabled camera have a value for this 4 Up setting the camera value always supersedes the printer value 6Up 9 Up 12Up 16Up Index Print Quality Selects the optimal quality Normal Notes Draft Fine Normal is the factory default setting f both the printer and the PictBridge enabled camera have a value for this setting the camera value always supersedes the printer value Paper Source Sets the tray the paper pulls from Multipurpose tray Notes Tray x Manual Paper Multipurpose tray is the factory default setting f both the printer and th
109. OR dE 40 Attaching cables eost temmobam eO Deed PED mM Ulm suministra RE 42 Disabling fax and e mail functions prior to SETUP eeseessseesescsecsseessecsseessecsssccsccssccssecsscsusecseccnesseceucssecsneesseesneeses 43 Verifying POPU eiim 44 Setting up the printer SOR AN a aesvvviorie rie eta essei ettesbeoci eet eee oti oeeer eec sv tel eite rei perpe kei Tope eed vek eed 45 Setting up wireless POTUIME IA RH 46 Installing the printer on a wired netWOFG cssicsscssasensssvnsesiscscbstsdesadstassuasbasvatvcstaspasieasieessaessdssoubissbalsbeeniaridbeptioseaaseen 51 Changing port settings after installing a new network Internal Solutions Port 54 Sgttirte up serial PINGING s veia trenta an POPE Ro PP edet n nd E RO Due OE 56 Minimizing your printer s environmental impact 58 Saving paper and Boon pM dpa etd poop IMs uU EEEE aa aE E SAE as DR UMEN 58 SHVIDO UN FON ssi Tedie bi olg En vend E CU Eoo REDDERE S NAT MIR APADU P MO DACH vn DDc etu dr M DN odaie IHE api 59 lise fe T 63 Loading paper and specialty media 65 Setting the Paper Size and Paper Typezssssseeetesecottnosparrindtak avi ba t Drop E a tota tton S ipiis 65 Configuring Universal paper SOttIPtGQ scope o Drei Rr Ep EP eo 65 Borro IRIS AN US EE T NN 66 Contents
110. PER WEIGHT AND PAPER TEXTURE SETTINGS Change the Paper Weight from Normal to Heavy If necessary change the Paper Texture from Normal to Rough in the printer control panel Paper menu THE FUSER IS WORN OR DEFECTIVE Replace the fuser Toner specks These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following THE TONER CARTRIDGES ARE WORN OR DEFECTIVE Replace the defective or worn cartridges THERE IS TONER IN THE PAPER PATH Contact Customer Support Troubleshooting 506 Transparency print quality is poor Try one or more of the following CHECK THE TRANSPARENCIES Use only transparencies recommended by the printer manufacturer CHECK THE PAPER TYPE SETTING Make sure the paper type setting matches the paper loaded in the tray 1 From the printer control panel check the Paper Type setting from the Paper menu 2 Before sending the job to print specify the correct type setting For Windows users specify the type from Print Properties For Macintosh users specify the type from the Print dialog Uneven print density BS ABCD ABCD ABCD These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following A TONER CARTRIDGE MAY BE WORN OR DEFECTIVE Replace the worn or defective toner cartridge A PHOTOCONDUCTOR MAY BE DEFECTIVE Replace the defective photoconductor Troubleshooting 307 Solving color quality problems This section helps answer some basic color related questions and describes how so
111. RO Courier shows the font name font ID and storage location in the printer The font source abbreviation is R for Resident F for Flash K for Disk and D for download Symbol Set Specifies the symbol set for each font name 10U PC 8 Notes 12U PC 850 10U PC 8 is the US factory default setting 12U PC 850 is the international factory default setting e A symbol set is a set of alphabetic and numeric characters punctuation and special symbols Symbol sets support the different languages or specific programs such as math symbols for scientific text Only the supported symbol sets are shown PCL Emulation Settings Point Size 1 00 1008 00 Changes the point size for scalable typographic fonts Notes 12isthe factory default setting Point Size refers to the height of the characters in the font One point equals approximately 1 72 of an inch Point sizes can be increased or decreased in 0 25 point increments Understanding printer menus 222 PCL Emulation Settings Pitch 0 08 100 Menu item Description Specifies the font pitch for scalable monospaced fonts Notes e 10 is the factory default setting Pitch refers to the number of fixed space characters per inch cpi Pitch can be increased or decreased in 0 01 cpi increments For nonscalable monospaced fonts the pitch appears on the display but cannot be changed PCL Emulation Settings Orientation Portrait Landscape Specifies the ori
112. RVICE CHECKLIST The fax modem is an analog device Certain devices can be connected to the printer so that digital telephone services can be used e Ifyou are using an ISDN telephone service then connect the printer to an analog telephone port an R interface port on an ISDN terminal adapter For more information and to request an R interface port contact your ISDN provider f youare using DSL then connect to a DSL filter or router that will support analog use For more information contact your DSL provider f you are using a PBX telephone service then make sure you are connecting to an analog connection on the PBX If none exists consider installing an analog telephone line for the fax machine CHECK FOR A DIAL TONE Place a test call to the telephone number to which you want to send a fax to make sure that it is working correctly e fthetelephoneline is being used by another device then wait until the other device is finished before sending a fax f you are using the On Hook Dial feature then turn up the volume to verify a dial tone Troubleshooting 289 TEMPORARILY DISCONNECT OTHER EQUIPMENT To ensure the printer is working correctly connect it directly to the telephone line Disconnect any answering machines computers with modems or telephone line splitters CHECK FOR JAMS Clear any jams and then make sure that Ready appears TEMPORARILY DISABLE CALL WAITING Call Waiting can disrupt fax transmiss
113. Search or Run box type devmgmt msc 3 Press Enter or click OK The Device Manager opens Click to expand the list of available ports Select the communications port where you attached the serial cable to your computer example COM1 Click Properties m OQ n go On the Port Settings tab set the serial parameters to the same serial parameters in the printer Look for the printer settings under the serial heading on the Menu Settings page you printed earlier f Click OK and then close all the windows Print a test page to verify printer installation When a test page prints successfully printer setup is complete Additional printer setup 97 Minimizing your printer s environmental impact Lexmark is committed to environmental sustainability and is continually improving its printers to reduce their impact on the environment We design with the environment in mind engineer our packaging to reduce materials and provide collection and recycling programs For more information see The Notices chapter The Environmental Sustainability section of the Lexmark Web site at www lexmark com environment The Lexmark recycling program at www lexmark com recycle By selecting certain printer settings or tasks you may be able to reduce your printer s impact even further This chapter outlines the settings and tasks that may yield a greater environmental benefit Saving paper and toner Studies show that as much as 80 of the car
114. TEMENT OF SOFTWARE LIMITED WARRANTY Lexmark warrants that the media e g diskette or compact disk on which the Software Program if any is furnished is free from defects in materials and workmanship under normal use during the warranty period The warranty period is ninety 90 days and commences on the date the Software Program is delivered to the original end user This limited warranty applies only to Software Program media purchased new from Lexmark or an Authorized Lexmark Reseller or Distributor Lexmark will replace the Software Program should it be determined that the media does not conform to this limited warranty 2 DISCLAIMER AND LIMITATION OF WARRANTIES EXCEPT AS PROVIDED IN THIS SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT AND TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW LEXMARK AND ITS SUPPLIERS PROVIDE THE SOFTWARE PROGRAM AS IS AND HEREBY DISCLAIM ALL OTHER WARRANTIES AND CONDITIONS EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO TITLE NON INFRINGEMENT MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND ABSENCE OF VIRUSES ALL WITH REGARD TO THE SOFTWARE PROGRAM TO THE EXTENT LEXMARK CANNOT BY LAW DISCLAIM ANY COMPONENT OF THE IMPLIED WARRATIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE LEXMARK LIMITS THE DURATION OF SUCH WARRANTIES TO THE 90 DAY TERM OF THE EXPRESS SOFTWARE LIMITED WARRANTY This Agreement is to be read in conjunction with certain statutory provisions as that may be in force from time to time
115. TION SHOCK HAZARD If you are installing memory or option cards sometime after setting up the printer thenturn the printer off and unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before continuing If you have any other devices attached to the printer then turn them off as well and unplug any cables going to the printer Warning Potential Damage System board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity Touch something metal on the printer before touching any system board electronic components or connectors An optional memory card can be purchased separately and attached to the system board To install the memory card 1 Access the system board Note This task requires a flathead screwdriver 2 Unpack the memory card Note Avoid touching the connection points along the edge of the card Additional printer setup 26 3 Open the memory card connector latches 4 Align the notch on the memory card with the ridge on the connector 5 Push the memory card straight into the connector until it clicks into place 6 Reattach the system board cover Additional printer setup 27 Installing a flash memory or firmware card The system board has two connections for an optional flash memory or firmware card Only one of each may be installed but the connectors are interchangeable A CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD If you are installing memory or option cards sometime after setting up the printer thenturn the printer off and u
116. TS OR REVENUES LOST SAVINGS INTERRUPTION OF USE OR ANY LOSS OF INACCURACY IN OR DAMAGETO DATA OR RECORDS FOR CLAIMS OF THIRD PARTIES OR DAMAGE TO REAL ORTANGIBLE PROPERTY FORLOSS OF PRIVACY ARISING OUT ORIN ANY WAY RELATED TO THEUSE OF ORINABILITY TO USETHE SOFTWARE PROGRAM OR OTHERWISE IN CONNECTION WITH ANY PROVISION OF THIS SOFTWARE LICENCE AGREEMENT REGARDLESS OF THE NATURE OF THE CLAIM INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO BREACH OF WARRANTY OR CONTRACT TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR STRICT LIABILITY AND EVEN IF LEXMARK OR ITS SUPPLIERS Notices 327 AFFILIATES OR REMARKETERS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES OR FOR ANY CLAIM BY YOU BASED ON A THIRD PARTY CLAIM EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT THIS EXCLUSION OF DAMAGES IS DETERMINED LEGALLY INVALID THE FOREGOING LIMITATIONS APPLY EVEN IF THE ABOVE STATED REMEDIES FAIL OF THEIR ESSENTIAL PURPOSE U S A STATE LAWS This Software Limited Warranty gives you specific legal rights You may also have other rights that vary from state to state Some states do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts or the exclusion of limitation of incidental or consequential damages so the above limitations may not apply to you LICENSE GRANT Lexmark grants you the following rights provided you comply with all terms and conditions of this Software License Agreement a Use You may Use one 1 copy of the Software Program The term Use means storing loading installing execu
117. Timeout Factory default Power Saver Timeout for this product in minutes 30 By using the configuration menus the Power Saver Timeout can be modified between 1 minute and 240 minutes Setting the Power Saver Timeout to a low value reduces energy consumption but may increase the response time of the product Setting the Power Saver Timeout to a high value maintains a fast response but uses more energy Off mode If this product has an off mode which still consumes a small amount of power then to completely stop product power consumption disconnect the power supply cord from the wall outlet Total energy usage It is sometimes helpful to calculate the total product energy usage Since power consumption claims are provided in power units of Watts the power consumption should be multiplied by the time the product spends in each mode in order to calculate energy usage The total product energy usage is the sum of each mode s energy usage European Community EC directives conformity This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council directives 2004 108 EC 2006 95 EC and 1999 5 EC on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility and safety of electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits and on radio equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment A declaration of conformity with the requirements of the directi
118. XPS Creates a single XPS file with multiple pages viewable using an Internet Explorer hosted viewer and the NET Framework or by downloading a third party standalone viewer Content This option tells the printer the original document type Choose from Text Text Photo or Photo Color can be turned on or off with any of the Content choices Content affects the quality and size of your FTP file Text Emphasize sharp black high resolution text against a clean white background Text Photo Used when the original documents are a mixture of text and graphics or pictures e Photograph Tells the scanner to pay extra attention to graphics and pictures This setting increases the time it takes to scan but emphasizes a reproduction of the full dynamic range of tones in the original document This increases the amount of information saved Color Sets the scan type and output for the FTP file Color documents can be scanned and sent to an FTP site computer e mail address or the printer Advanced Options Touching this button opens a screen where you can change Advanced Imaging Custom Job Transmission Log Scan Preview Edge Erase and Darkness settings Advanced Imaging Adjusts image output settings before you scan the document Background Removal Adjusts the white portion of the output Click the arrow buttons to increase or decrease the white portion Color Dropout cColor dropout is used for form Optical Charac
119. a scan job Note On is the factory default setting Allow color copies On Off Specifies whether copies are printed in color Note On is the factory default setting Sides Duplex 1 sided to 1 sided 1 sided to 2 sided 2 sided to 1 sided 2 sided to 2 sided Specifies whether an original document is duplex two sided or simplex one sided and then specifies whether the copy should be duplex or simplex Notes 1sided to 1 sided The original page has printing on one side The copied page will have printing on one side 1 sided to 2 sided The original page has printing on one side The copied page will have printing on both sides For example if the original is six sheets the copy is three sheets with printing on both sides 2 sided to 1 sided The original page has printing on both sides The copied page will have printing on only one side For example if the original draft is three sheets of paper with an image on each side of each sheet then the copy is six sheets with only one image on one side of each sheet 2 sided to 2 sided The original page has printing on both sides The copy mimics the original exactly Paper Saver Off 20n 1 Portrait 20n 1 Landscape 4 on 1 Portrait 4 on 1 Landscape Sets two or four sheets of an original document together on the same page Note Off is the factory default setting Understanding printer menus 186 Menu item Description Print Page Borders
120. aceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass and then touch Scan the Automatic Document Feeder or Scan the flatbed Otherwise touch Finish the job Copying 99 Using job interrupt Job interrupt pauses the current print job and lets you print copies Note The Job Interrupt setting must be On for this feature to function 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 Ifyou are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 From the printer control panel press amp 4 If you placed the document on the scanner glass then touch Finish the Job to return to the home screen Placing information on copies Placing the date and time at the top of each page 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides On the home screen touch Copy Touch Options Touch Header Footer Pick an area of the page to place the date and time Touch Date Time and then touch Continue
121. ake sure the network or USB cable is securely connected to the computer and the printer Solving fax problems Caller ID is not shown Contact your telecommunications company to verify that your telephone line is subscribed to the caller ID service If your region supports multiple caller ID patterns you may have to change the default setting There are two settings available FSK pattern 1 and DTMF pattern 2 The availability of these settings by way of the Fax menu depends on whether your country or region supports multiple caller ID patterns Contact your telecommunications company to determine which pattern or switch setting to use Troubleshooting 288 Cannot send or receive a fax These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following CHECK THE DISPLAY FOR ERROR MESSAGES Clear any error messages CHECK THE POWER Make sure the printer is plugged in the power is on and Ready appears CHECK THE PRINTER CONNECTIONS Make sure the cable connections for the following hardware are secure if applicable Telephone Handset Answering machine CHECK THE TELEPHONE WALL JACK 1 Plug a telephone into the wall jack 2 Listen for a dial tone 3 If you do not hear a dial tone then plug a different telephone into the wall jack 4 If you still do not hear a dial tone then plug a telephone into a different wall jack 5 f you hear a dial tone then connect the printer to that wall jack REVIEW THIS DIGITAL PHONE SE
122. am remove all originals from the scanner 294 Scanner jam remove jammed originals from the scanner 294 01 Scannerjam removeall originals from thescanner 294 01 Scanner jam remove jammed originals from the scanner P 200 paper jam 1 Open the upper front door A CAUTION HOT SURFACE The inside of the printer might be hot To reduce the risk of injury from a hot component allow the surface to cool before touching 2 Open the lower front door Note To avoid overexposing the photoconductor units do not leave the lower front door open longer than 10 minutes Troubleshooting 268 3 Pull the jammed paper up and out to remove it from behind the toner cartridge area Note Make sure all paper fragments are removed 4 Close the lower front door 5 Closethe upper front door 6 Touch Continue 200 201 paper jams 1 Open the upper front door A CAUTION HOT SURFACE The inside of the printer might be hot To reduce the risk of injury from a hot component allow the surface to cool before touching 2 Open the lower front door Note To avoid overexposing the photoconductor units do not leave the front door open longerthan 10 minutes 3 Pull the paper forward if it is lodged under the photoconductor units Note You may need to remove the photoconductor units if the paper is lodged too tightly under them Troubleshooting 269 4 Remove each photoconductor unit and then place it on a fla
123. am shows the items available under each menu To access the menus touch on the home screen Supplies Replace Supply Cyan Cartridge Magenta Cartridge Yellow Cartridge Black Cartridge Cyan Photoconductor Magenta Photoconductor Yellow Photoconductor Black Photoconductor Separator pad Waste Toner Box Fuser Transfer Module Security Edit Security Setups Miscellaneous Security Setting Confidential Print Disk Wiping Security Audit Log Set Date Time Option Card Menu Paper Menu Default Source Paper Size Type Configure MP Substitute Size Paper Texture Paper Weight Paper Loading Custom Types Custom Names Custom Scan Sizes Universal Setup Network Ports Active NIC Network Standard USB Parallel lt x gt Serial lt x gt SMTP Setup A list of installed DLEs Download Emulators appears Reports Menu Settings Page Device Statistics Network Setup Page Network lt x gt Setup Page Shortcut List Fax Job Log Fax Call Log Copy Shortcuts E mail Shortcuts Fax Shortcuts FTP Shortcuts Profiles List Netware Setup Page Print Fonts Print Directory Asset Report Help Print All Guides Copy Guide E mail Guide Fax Guide FTP Guide Color Quality Print Defects Guide Information Guide Supplies Guide Settings General Settings Copy Settings Fax Settings E mail Settings FTP Settings Flash Drive Menu Print Settings Manage Shortcuts Fax Shortcuts E mail Shortcuts FTP Shortcuts
124. aragraph does not apply to any country where such provisions are inconsistent with local law LEXMARK INTERNATIONAL INC PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE Some states do not allow disclaimer of express or implied warranties in certain transactions therefore this statement may not apply to you This publication could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors Changes are periodically made to the information herein these changes will be incorporated in later editions Improvements or changes in the products or the programs described may be made at any time References in this publication to products programs or services do not imply that the manufacturer intends to make these available in all countries in which it operates Any reference to a product program or service is not intended to state or imply that only that product program or service may be used Any functionally equivalent product program or service that does not infringe any existing intellectual property right may be used instead Evaluation and verification of operation in conjunction with other products programs or services except those expressly designated by the manufacturer are the user s responsibility For Lexmark technical support visit support lexmark com For information on supplies and d
125. atic paper source When Manual is selected the multipurpose feeder can be used only for manual feed print jobs Menu item Description Substitutes a specified paper size if the requested paper size is not available Notes All Listed is the factory default setting All available substitutions are allowed The Off setting indicates no size substitutions are allowed Setting a substitution lets the job print without a Change Paper message appearing Understanding printer menus 150 Paper Texture menu Menu item Description Plain Texture Specifies the relative texture of the paper loaded in a specific tray Smooth Note Normal is the factory default setting Normal Rough Card Stock Texture Specifies the relative texture of the card stock loaded in a specific tray Smooth Notes Normal Rough Normal is the factory default setting Settings appear only if card stock is supported Transparency Texture Specifies the relative texture of the transparencies loaded in a specific tray Smooth Note Normal is the factory default setting Normal Rough Recycled Texture Specifies the relative texture of the recycled paper loaded in a specific tray Smooth Note Normal is the factory default setting Normal Rough Glossy Texture Specifies the relative texture of the glossy paper loaded in a specific tray Smooth Note Normal is the factory default setting Normal Rough Heavy Glo
126. ation for an external print server that is attached to the printer using a USB cable Note This menu item is available only if the printer is attached to an external print server through the USB port ENA Netmask Sets the netmask information for an external print server that is attached to the printer using a USB cable Note This menu item is available only if the printer is attached to an external print server through the USB port Understanding printer menus 168 Menu item ENA Gateway Parallel lt x gt menu Description Sets the gateway information for an external print server that is attached to the printer using a USB cable Note This menu item is available only if the printer is attached to an external print server through the USB port Menu item Description PCL SmartSwitch Sets the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job received On through a serial port requires it regardless of the default printer language Off Notes On is the factory default setting When the Off setting is used the printer does not examine incoming data When the Off setting is used the printer uses PostScript emulation if PS SmartSwitch is set to On It uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu if PS SmartSwitch is set to Off PS SmartSwitch Sets the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job received On through a serial port requires it re
127. axing 128 Using the address book Note If the address book feature is not enabled then contact your system support person 1 wu 5B W N O 0 M A Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides On the home screen touch Fax Touch Search Address Book Using the virtual keyboard type the name or part of the name of the person whose fax number you want to find Do not attempt to search for multiple names at the same time Touch Search Touch the name to add it to the Fax to list Repeat steps 4 through 7 to enter additional addresses Touch Fax It Customizing fax settings Changing the fax resolution Adjusting the resolution setting changes the quality of the fax Settings range from Standard fastest speed to Ultra Fine slowest speed best quality 1 N GFF Uu A UUN Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides
128. be a short delay before the first page is printed Fans run at reduced speed or are turned off f your printer has faxing capability fax sounds are reduced or disabled including those made by the fax speaker and ringer The fax is placed in standby mode Thealarm control and cartridge alarm sounds are turned off The printer will ignore the Advance Start command Off Image Photo Use factory default settings This setting supports the Note Selecting Photo from the driver may disable Quiet performance specifications for your printer Mode and provide better print quality and full speed printing To select a Quiet Mode setting 1 On the home screen touch 2 Touch Settings 3 Touch General Settings 4 Touch Quiet Mode Minimizing your printer s environmental impact 60 5 Touch the arrows to select a setting 6 Touch Submit Submitting changes appears Adjusting Power Saver To save energy you can decrease the number of minutes before the printer enters Power Saver mode Available settings range from 1 240 minutes The factory default setting is 30 minutes Using the Embedded Web Server 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser Note If you do not know the IP address of the printer then print a network setup page and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Click Settings and then click General Settings 3 Click Timeouts 4 In the Power Save
129. bles that translate the color into the appropriate amounts of cyan magenta yellow and black toner needed to produce the desired color The object information determines the application of color conversion tables For example it is possible to apply one type of color conversion table to text while applying a different color conversion table to photographic images Should I use PostScript or PCL emulation printer software What settings should I use for the best color The PostScript driver is strongly recommended for best color quality The default settings in the PostScript driver provide the preferred color quality for the majority of printouts Why doesn t the printed color match the color I see on the computer screen The color conversion tables used in Auto Color Correction mode generally approximate the colors of a standard computer monitor However because of technology differences that exist between printers and monitors there are many colors that can also be affected by monitor variations and lighting conditions For recommendations on how the printer color sample pages may be useful in solving certain color matching problems see the question How can I match a particular color such as a corporate logo The printed page appears tinted Can I adjust the color Sometimes a printed page may appear tinted for example everything printed seems to be too red This can be caused by environmental conditions paper type lighting condit
130. bon footprint of a printer is related to paper usage You can significantly reduce your carbon footprint by using recycled paper and the following printing suggestions such as printing on both sides of the paper and printing multiple pages on one side of a single sheet of paper For information on how you can quickly save paper and energy using one printer setting see Using Eco Mode Using recycled paper As an environmentally conscious company Lexmark supports the use of recycled office paper produced specifically for use in laser printers For more information on recycled papers that work well with your printer see Using recycled paper and other office papers on page 77 Conserving supplies There are a number of ways you can reduce the amount of paper and toner you use when printing copying or receiving faxes You can Use both sides of the paper If your printer model supports duplex printing you can control whether print appears on one or two sides of the paper for a printed document by selecting 2 sided printing from the Print dialog or the Lexmark Toolbar Place multiple pages on one sheet of paper You can print up to 16 consecutive pages of a multiple page document onto one side of a single sheet of paper by selecting a setting from the Multipage printing N Up section of the Print dialog screen Minimizing your printer s environmental impact 58 Choose scanning You can avoid making a paper output of a document o
131. can Sizes menu Menu item Description Custom Scan Size lt x gt Specifies a custom scan size name and options This name replaces aCustom Scan Size Name Scan Size lt x gt namein the printer menus Width Notes 3 14 17 inches 76 360 mm 8 5 Inches is the US factory default setting for Width 216 millimeters is Height s f the international factory default setting for Width 3 14 17 inches 76 360 mm f i f m Orientation 14 Inches is the US factory default setting for Height 356 millimeters is bane the international factory default setting for Height andscape Barat Landscape is the factory default setting for Orientation Offis the factory default setting for 2 scans per side 2 scans per side Off User Default is the factory default setting for ADF Pick Roller Force On ADF Pick Roller Force User Default 3096 4096 5096 6096 7096 8096 Universal Setup menu These menu items are used to specify the height and width of the Universal Paper Size The Universal Paper Size is a user defined paper size setting It is listed with the other paper size settings and includes similar options such as support for duplex printing and printing multiple pages on one sheet Menu item Description Units of Measure Identifies the units of measure Inches Notes Millimeters Inches is the US factory default setting Millimeters is the international factory default setting Portrait Width Sets the portra
132. cense Agreement or your Use of the Software Program LIMITATION ON ACTIONS No action regardless of form arising out of this Software License Agreement may be brought by either party more than two years after the cause of action has arisen except as provided under applicable law APPLICABLE LAW This Software License Agreement is governed by the laws of the Commonwealth of Kentucky United States of America No choice of law rules in any jurisdiction shall apply The UN Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods shall not apply UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT RESTRICTED RIGHTS The Software Program has been developed entirely at private expense Rights of the United States Government to use the Software Program are as set forth in this Software License Agreement and as restricted in DFARS 252 227 7014 and in similar FAR provisions or any equivalent agency regulation or contract clause CONSENT TO USE OF DATA You agree that Lexmark its affiliates and agents may collect and use information you provide in relation to support services performed with respect to the Software Program and requested by you Lexmark agrees not to use this information in a form that personally identifies you except to the extent necessary to provide such services EXPORT RESTRICTIONS You may not a acquire ship transfer or reexport directly or indirectly the Software Program or any direct product therefrom in violation of any applicable export laws o
133. clear the message and continue printing Troubleshooting 263 80 Replace fuser 1 Replace the fuser using the instruction sheet that came with the replacement part 2 Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing 82 Replace waste toner box The waste toner box is full 1 Replace the waste toner box using the instruction sheet that came with the replacement part 2 Clearthe paper path 82 Waste toner box missing Reinsert the waste toner box into the printer and then touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing 83 Replace transfer module 1 Replace the transfer module using the instruction sheet that came with the replacement part 2 Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing 83 Transfer module life warning 1 Orderareplacement transfer module immediately When print quality is reduced install the new transfer module using the instruction sheet that came with the replacement part 2 Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing 83 Transfer module missing Insert the transfer module into the printer 84 Replace color photoconductor Replace the specified color photoconductor using the instruction sheet that came with the replacement part 84 color photoconductor low 1 Order a replacement photoconductor immediately 2 When print quality is reduced install the new photoconductor using the instruction sheet that came with the replacement part 3 Touch
134. column under it which can show only three jobs per screen Each job appears as a button which you can touch to access information about the job If more than three jobs exist in a column then an arrow appears enabling you to scroll through the jobs Using the touch screen buttons Note Depending on your options and administrative setup your screens and buttons may vary from those shown Sample touch screen Copy from Letter 8 5x11 in v Copy to Letter 8 5x1 1 in Plain Paper V Scale IC ran SX 100 id gt Collate Sides Duplex Staple Darkness 25 TER mm ede D Button Function Home Returns to the home screen Scroll down Opens a drop down list Learning about the printer 19 Button Left scroll decrease E Function Scrolls to another value in decreasing order Right scroll increase 2 Scrolls to another value in increasing order Left arrow Scrolls left Right arrow Scrolls right v Submit Saves a value as the new user default setting Back Navigates back to the previous screen Other touch screen buttons Button Function Down arrow Moves down to the next screen Up arrow Moves up to the next screen Unselected radio button This is an unselected radio button The radio button is gray to show itis unselected Learning about
135. continuing A CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD If you are installing memory or option cards sometime after setting up the printer then turn the printer off and unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before continuing If you have any other devices attached to the printer then turn them off as well and unplug any cables going to the printer CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD If you are installing an optional tray after setting up the printer then turn the printer off and unplug the power cord the USB cable and the Ethernet cable before continuing SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS Safety information 8 Learning about the printer Thank you for choosing this printer We ve worked hard to make sure it will meet your needs To start using your new printer right away use the setup materials that came with the printer and then skim the User s Guide to learn how to perform basic tasks To get the most out of your printer read the User s Guide carefully and make sure you check the latest updates on our Web site We re committed to delivering performance and value with our printers and we want to make sure you re satisfied If you do encounter any problems along the way one of our knowledgeable support representatives will be delighted to help you get back on track fast And if you find something we could do better please let us know After all you are the reason we do what we do and your suggestions help us do it better Finding information about the p
136. copying halftone photographs graphics such as documents printed on a laser printer or pages from a magazine or newspaper that are composed primarily of images 7 Touch Done 8 Touch Copy It Collating copies If you print multiple copies of a document then you can choose to print each copy as a set collated or to print the copies as groups of pages not collated Collated Not collated 125 33 By default Collate is set to On If you do not want to collate your copies then change the setting to Off To turn collation off 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 On the home screen touch Copy 4 Usethe keypad to enter the number of copies Copying 97 5 Touch Off if you do not want your copies collated 6 Touch Copy It Placing separator sheets between copies 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the
137. cs Prints a report containing printer statistics such as supply information and details about printed pages Network Setup Page Prints a report containing information about the network printer settings such as the TCP IP address information Note This menu item appears only for network printers or printers connected to print servers Network lt x gt Setup Page Prints a report containing information about the network printer settings such as the TCP IP address information Notes e This menu item is available when more than one network option is installed This menu item appears only for network printers or printers connected to print servers Understanding printer menus 158 Menu item Wireless Setup Page Description Prints a report containing information about the wireless network printer settings such as the TCP IP address information Notes This menu item is available when a wireless card is installed and Lexmark Document Solutions Suite is enabled This menu item appears only for network printers or printers connected to print servers Shortcut List Prints a report containing information about configured shortcuts Fax Job Log Prints a report containing information about the last 200 completed faxes Fax Call Log Prints a report containing information about the last 100 attempted received and blocked calls Copy Shortcuts Prints a report containing informa
138. cs programs TIFF Creates multiple files ora single file If Multi page TIFF is turned off in the Settings menu of the Embedded Web Server then TIFF saves one page in each file The file size is usually larger than an equivalent JPEG Secure PDF Creates an encrypted PDF file that protects the file contents from unauthorized access e XPS Creates a single XPS file with multiple pages viewable using an Internet Explorer hosted viewer and the NET Framework or by downloading a third party standalone viewer Compression This option sets the format used to compress the scanned output file Default Content This option tells the printer the original document type Choose from Text Text Photo or Photo Content affects the quality and size of your scanned file Text Emphasizes sharp black high resolution text against a clean white background Text Photo Used when the original documents are a mixture of text and graphics or pictures Photo Tells the scanner to pay extra attention to graphics and pictures This setting increases the time it takes to scan but emphasizes a reproduction ofthe full dynamic range oftones in the original document This increases the amount of information saved Color This option tells the printer the color of the original documents You can select Gray BW Black and White or Color Original Size This option sets the size of the documents you are going to scan When Original Size is set to Mix
139. d pdf file then enter the file password from the printer control panel Before printing an encrypted pdf file enter the file password from the printer control panel e You cannot print files for which you do not have printing permissions To print from a flash drive 1 Make sure the printer is on and Ready appears 2 Insert a flash drive into the USB port Notes f you insert the flash drive when the printer requires attention such as when a jam has occurred then the printer ignores the flash drive f you insert the flash drive while the printer is printing other jobs then Printer Busy appears After the other jobs are processed you may need to view the held jobs list to print documents from the flash drive 3 Touch the document you want to print Note Folders found on the flash drive appear as folders File names are appended by the extension type for example jpg Printing 87 4 Touch the arrows if you want to increase the number of printed copies 5 Touch Print Note Do not remove the flash drive from the USB port until the document has finished printing If you leave the flash drive in the printer after leaving the initial USB menu screen then you can still print pdf files from the flash drive as held jobs Printing photos from a PictBridge enabled digital camera You can connect a PictBridge enabled digital camera to the printer and use the buttons on the camera to select and print photos 1 Inse
140. d as onethatis suitably rated and certified by UL Underwriter s Laboratories another NRTL Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory or a recognized safety certification body in the country region of use This is to avoid damage to the equipment caused by local lightning strikes and other electrical surges The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic device including fax machines to send any message unless said message clearly contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or on the first page of the transmission the date and time it is sent and an identification of the business or other entity or other individual sending the message and the telephone number Notices 518 of the sending machine or such business other entity or individual The telephone number provided may not be a 900 number or any other number for which charges exceed local or long distance transmission charges See your user documentation in order to program this information into your fax machine South Africa telecommunications notice This modem must be used in conjunction with an approved surge protection device when connected to the PSTN Notice to users of the Canadian telephone network This product meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications The Ringer Equivalence Number REN isan indication of the maximum number of terminals allowed to be connec
141. d the types of paper they support Note To use a paper size that is unlisted configure a Universal Paper Size Supported paper sizes Measurements apply to simplex one sided printing only For duplex two sided printing the minimum size is 139 7 x 210 mm 5 50 x 8 27 in Paper size Dimensions Standard Optional Optional Multipurpose Optional 550 sheet 550 sheet 2 000 sheet tray 550 sheet tray Tray 1 tray tray specialty media drawer 210 x 297 mm 8 27 x 11 7 in A5 148 x 210 mm vV X vV 5 83 x 8 27 in A6 105 x 148 mm 4 13 X X X vV x 5 83 in JIS B5 182x257 mm V vV X vV 7 17 x 10 1 in Letter 215 9 x 279 4 mm V V 8 5 x 11 in Legal 215 9 x 355 6 mm V 8 5 x 14 in Executive 184 2 x 266 7 mm V v X vV 7 25 x 10 5 in Oficio M xico 215 9 x 340 4 mm V v X 8 5 x 13 4 in This size setting formats the envelope for 215 9 x 355 6 mm 8 5 x 14 in unless the size is specified by the software program Paper and specialty media guidelines 79 Paper size Dimensions Standard Optional Optional Multipurpose Optional 550 sheet 550 sheet 2 000 sheet tray 550 sheet tray Tray 1 tray tray specialty media drawer Folio 215 9 x 330 2 mm V V X V V 8 5 x 13 in Statement 1397x2159mm X X X V V 5 5 x 8 5 in Universal 148 x 210 mm to vV V X vV 215 9x 355 6 mm Sensing off to 5 83 x 8 27 in to support universal BOX HI s
142. d to repeat steps 1 through 3 When Ready appears the counter is reset If a replace or low message does not appear Use these steps when a photoconductor is replaced and a replace or Iow message does not appear 1 On the home screen touch 2 Touch Menus 3 Touch Supplies Menu 4 Touch Replace Supplies 5 Touch the button that indicates the supply item you replaced All Cyan Photoconductor Magenta Photoconductor Maintaining the printer 241 Yellow Photoconductor Black Photoconductor 6 When color photoconductor replaced appears touch Yes 7 Touch l to return to the home screen Replacing a toner cartridge When 88 Replace color cartridge 88 color cartridge nearly low or88 color cartridge low appears on the display or when print becomes faded try to extend the life of the specified cartridge 1 Open the upper front door and then open the lower front door Warning Potential Damage To avoid overexposing the photoconductors do not leave the front doors open for more than 10 minutes Maintaining the printer 242 3 Shake the cartridge front to back and side to side to redistribute the toner 5 Repeat this process multiple times until printed text and graphics remain faded When printed text and graphics remain faded replace the specified cartridge Repeat steps 1 and 2 and then continue with the following steps 6 Unpack a new cartridge Maintaining the p
143. d transfer proof of original purchase and this statement to that user Limited warranty service The warranty period starts on the date of original purchase as shown on the purchase receipt and ends 12 months later provided that the warranty period for any supplies and for any maintenance items included with the printer shall end earlier if it or its original contents are substantially used up depleted or consumed To obtain warranty service you may be required to present proof of original purchase You may be required to deliver your product to the Remarketer or Lexmark or ship it prepaid and suitably packaged to a Lexmark designated location You are responsible for loss of or damage to a product in transit to the Remarketer or the Lexmark designated location When warranty service involves the exchange of a product or part the item replaced becomes the property of the Remarketer or Lexmark The replacement may be a new or repaired item The replacement item assumes the remaining warranty period of the original product Replacement is not available to you if the product you present for exchange is defaced altered in need of a repair not included in warranty service damaged beyond repair or if the product is not free of all legal obligations restrictions liens and encumbrances Before you present this product for warranty service remove all print cartridges programs data and removable storage media unless directed otherwise b
144. dapters 119 telephone 117 Fax memory full 258 Fax Mode Analog Fax Setup menu 191 Fax Mode Fax Server Setup menu 199 Fax partition inoperative Contact system administrator 258 fax quality improving 133 fax screen advanced options 133 options 132 Fax server To Format not set up Contact system administrator 258 Fax Station Name not set up 258 Fax Station Number not set up 258 fax troubleshooting blocking junk faxes 131 caller ID is not shown 288 can receive but not send faxes 291 can send but not receive faxes 290 cannot send or receive a fax 289 received fax has poor print quality 291 faxing canceling a faxjob 131 changing resolution 129 choosing a fax connection 114 creating shortcuts using the Embedded Web Server 127 creating shortcuts using the touch screen 128 faxsetup 113 forwarding faxes 134 holding faxes 134 improving fax quality 133 making a fax lighter or darker 129 sending a fax at a scheduled time 130 sending using the computer 127 sending using the printer control panel 126 setting the date and time 126 setting the outgoing fax name and number 125 turning daylight saving time on or off 126 using shortcuts 128 using the address book 129 viewing a faxlog 130 FCC notices 314 318 321 fiber optic network setup 51 finding information 9 publications 9 Web site 9 Finishing menu 215 firmware card installing 28 flash drive 87 Flash Drive menu 208 flash memory card installing 28 troubleshoot
145. ded Web Server ste a an bee PUER HERR RR MAR MER E 254 Checkingt he device status ade uc ean opo em EOD RR MIN O NR NR qup E 254 Setting up ssmall ales oae ttbdtedkolto Neb tie oot E Do ibl t eddie ek ee 254 MIGWING B Toro M n i ada asean a Raden adie asana ia sta aiene 255 Restoring the factory default SettIngs u se eme pes ve ete n be RI HORRORE ARE MUR ERREUR ERN 255 TFOUDICSIIOOUING x ooo batir Ee EO RERO demas etedsikei a d his OD ThiindicatorlIight is blinking s ee esiti d e dba Pea ER E EERE RR 256 Solving basic printer problemn oes eo aei poe taie tu ban e eode tti ietco ds 256 Understanding printer MESSAGES usse avere Ua tte o t ERE e Wc din Uu pad ab n d Ar ted cfe res 257 Clearing ja MSk aeria S ERR Bt ma neta Mot dl os n arn VA des a ee UO RR RTT 266 solvirig printing DEODIeImssasssadesitebdtei Ropa RURSUM bd RO IQ 280 Solving copy PhO DIGIMS pee meet ete reete ode e Roten vnd ccs eee tere d RR e eei 284 Solving scanner proble Saiti UD OY ean tua dai Det don P Dd Npdun dandi 286 SOIVING Tax pEODISPIS sei RUE NUN i ER Redi p od Od pte npe Md et bb d 288 Soling ODOM Problems casero d ati DR lad e Re SUED UPDATE oO dnd 292 Solving Papel feed DFODIGHIS sided ed Mibi E EM Ip id e AER He t pbi ptite 294 Solving print quality PEOPLES coerente Rt pre cem a eaten means va Ea Elo Repo Ren E 295 Solving color quality probleris z ue ebrei i a M RR ER e REOR e Dk ere DRE SERE R 308 Embedded Web Server does not operose nO Ie EORR ERENH Nd EROR IQ
146. default becomes No Understanding printer menus 179 Menu item Keyboard Keyboard Type English Francais Francais Canadien Deutsch Italiano Espanol Dansk Norsk Nederlands Svenska Suomi Portuguese Russian Polski Swiss German Swiss French Turkce Korean Custom Key lt x gt Accents Symbols Tab On Off Russian Polish Tab On Off Korean Tab On Off Description Specifies a language and custom key information for the printer control panel keyboard The additional tabs enable access to accent marks and symbols from the printer control panel keyboard Paper Sizes US Metric Notes Initial setting is determined by your Country selection in the initial setup wizard Changingthis setting also changesthe Units of Measurement setting in the Universal Setup menu and the default for each input source in the Paper Size Paper Type menu Scan to PC Port Range port range Specifies a valid port range for printers behind a port blocking firewall The valid ports are specified by two sets of numbers separated by a semicolon Note 9751 12000 is the factory default setting Understanding printer menus 180 Menu item Displayed Information Left side Right side Custom Text lt x gt lt text entry gt lt color gt Cartridge Display When Supply Registers Off Early Warning Low Nearly Low Replace Type of Message to Display Default Alternate Default Message lt text entry gt
147. e ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 On the home screen touch Copy 4 Touch Copy from and then identify the size of the original document 5 Touch Copy to and then select the size you want the copy to be Note If you select a paper size that is different from the Copy from size then the printer will scale the size automatically 6 Touch Copy It Copying 94 Making copies using paper from a selected tray During the copy process you can select the tray that contains the paper type of choice For example if specialty media is located in the multipurpose feeder and you want to make copies on that media 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 On the home screen touch Copy 4 Touch Copy from and then identify the size of the original document 5 Touch Copy to and then touch Manual Feeder or the tray that contains the paper type you want Note If you choose Manual Feeder then you will need to also select the paper size and type 6 Touch Copy It Copying a document that contains mixed paper sizes Use the ADF to copy an original document that contains mixed paper sizes Depending on the paper sizes loaded and
148. e PictBridge enabled camera have a value for this setting the camera value always supersedes the printer value Understanding printer menus 227 XPS menu Description Print Error Pages Prints a page containing information on errors including XML markup errors Note Off is the factory default setting On Help menu The Help menu consists of a series of Help pages that are stored in the multifunction printer MFP as PDFs They contain information about using the printer and performing various tasks including copying scanning and faxing English French German and Spanish translations are stored in the printer Other translations are available on the Lexmark Web site at www lexmark com Menu item Description Print all guides Prints all the guides Copy guide Provides information about making copies and changing settings E mail guide Provides information about sending e mails using addresses shortcut numbers or the address book and about changing settings Fax guide Provides information about sending faxes using fax numbers shortcut numbers or the address book and about changing settings FTP guide Provides information about scanning documents directly to an FTP server using an FTP address shortcut numbers or the address book and about changing settings Information guide this page Provides help in locating additional information Print defects guide Provides help in resolving repeatin
149. e Type menu Tray x Size A4 A5 A6 JIS B5 Legal Letter Executive Oficio M xico Folio Statement Universal Menu item Description Sets a default paper source for all print jobs Notes From the Paper menu Configure MP feeder must be set to Cassette for MP feeder to appear as a menu setting Tray 1 standard tray is the factory default setting f the same size and type of paper are in two trays and the Paper Size and Paper Type settings match then the trays are automatically linked When one tray is empty the job prints using the linked tray Menu item Description Specifies the paper size loaded in each tray Notes Letter is the US factory default setting A4 is the international factory default setting Fortrays with automatic size sensing only the size detected by the hardware appears fthesame size and type of paper arein two trays and the Paper Size and PaperTypesettings match then the trays are automatically linked When one tray is empty the job prints using the linked tray Note Only installed trays are listed in this menu Understanding printer menus 147 Menu item Description Tray lt x gt Type Specifies the type of paper loaded in each tray Plain Paper Card Stock Transparency Recycled Glossy Heavy Glossy Labels Vinyl Labels Bond Letterhead Preprinted Colored Paper Light Paper Heavy Paper Rough Cotton Paper Custom Type lt x gt Notes P
150. e des REN de ces appareils ne doit pas d passer cinq Le num ro REN du modem est indiqu sur l tiquette produit situ e l arri re de l quipement Les compagnies de t l phone constatent que les surtensions lectriques en particulier celles dues la foudre entra nent d importants d g ts sur les terminaux priv s connect s des sources d alimentation CA Il s agit l d un probl me majeur d chelle nationale En cons quence il vous est recommand de brancher un parasurtenseur dans la prise de courant laquelle l quipement est connect Utilisez un parasurtenseur r pondant des caract ristiques nominales satisfaisantes et certifi parle laboratoire d assureurs UL Underwriter s Laboratories un autre laboratoire agr de type NRTL Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory ou un organisme de certification agr dans votre r gion ou pays Ceci pr vient tout endommagement de l quipement caus par les orages et autres surtensions lectriques Cet quipement utilise des prises de t l phone CA11A Notice to users of the New Zealand telephone network The following are special conditions for the Facsimile User Instructions The grant of a telepermit for any item of terminal equipment indicates only that Telecom has accepted that the item complies with minimum conditions for connection to its network It indicates no endorsement of the product by Telecom nor does it provide any sort of warranty Above all it pr
151. e document Custom Job This option combines multiple scanning jobs into a single job Separator Sheets This option places a blank piece of paper between copies pages and print jobs The separator sheets can be drawn from a tray that contains a type or color of paper that is different from the paper your copies are printed on Margin Shift This option increases the size of the margin a specified distance This can be useful in providing space to bind or hole punch copies Use the increase or decrease arrows to set how much of a margin you want If the additional margin is too large then the copy will be cropped Edge Erase This option eliminates smudges or information around the edges of your document You can choose to eliminate an equal area around all four sides of the paper or pick a particular edge Edge Erase erases whatever is within the selected area leaving nothing printed on that portion of the paper Header Footer This option turns on the Date Time Page number Bates number or Custom text and prints them in the specified header or footer location Copying 103 Overlay This option creates a watermark or message that overlays the content of your copy You can choose between Urgent Confidential Copy and Draft or you can enter a custom message in the Enter custom text field The word you pick will appear faintly in large print across each page Note A custom overlay can also be created by your system
152. e following Touch Continue to continue printing Turn the printer off and then back on to reset the printer Upgrade flash the network firmware in the printer or print server Troubleshooting 261 55 Unsupported option in slot lt x gt lt x gt is a slot on the printer system board Try one or more of the following 1 Turn the printer power off 2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet 3 Remove the unsupported option card from the printer system board 4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded outlet 5 Turn the printer power back on 56 Parallel port x disabled x is the number of the parallel port Try one or more of the following Touch Continue to clear the message The printer discards any data received through the parallel port Make sure the Parallel Buffer menu item is not set to Disabled 56 Serial port x disabled x is the number of the serial port Try one or more of the following Touch Continue to clear the message The printer discards any data received through the serial port Make sure the Serial Buffer menu item is not set to Disabled 56 Standard USB port disabled Try one or more of the following Touch Continue to clear the message The printer discards any data received through the USB port Make sure the USB Buffer menu item is not set to Disabled 58 Too many flash options installed 1 Turn the printer off 2 Unplug the power cord from the wall
153. e left or right arrow next to Print Timeout until the desired value appears Touch Submit O On A Ui FP WN Touch Al Solving copy problems Copier does not respond These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following CHECK THE DISPLAY FOR ERROR MESSAGES Clear any error messages CHECK THE POWER Make sure the printer is plugged in the power is on and Ready appears Scanner unit does not close Make sure there are no obstructions 1 Lift the scanner unit 2 Remove any obstruction keeping the scanner unit open 3 Lower the scanner unit Troubleshooting 284 Poor copy quality These are some examples of poor copy quality Blank pages Checkerboard pattern Distorted graphics or pictures Missing characters Faded print Dark print Skewed lines Smudges Streaks Unexpected characters White lines in print These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following CHECK THE DISPLAY FOR ERROR MESSAGES Clear any error messages THE TONER MAY BE LOW When 88 Cartridge low appears or when the print becomes faded replace the print cartridge THE SCANNER GLASS MAY BE DIRTY Clean the scanner glass with a clean lint free cloth dampened with water For more information see Cleaning the scanner glass on page 230 THE COPY IS TOO LIGHT OR TOO DARK Adjust the density of the copy CHECK THE QUALITY OF THE ORIGINAL DOCUMENT Make sure the quality of the original docume
154. e the toner cartridge THE FUSER IS DEFECTIVE OR WORN Replace the fuser A PHOTOCONDUCTOR MAY BE DEFECTIVE Replace the defective photoconductor Troubleshooting 304 Streaked vertical lines These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following THE TONER IS SMEARED Select another tray or feeder to feed paper for the job From the printer control panel select the Default Source from the Paper Menu For Windows users select the paper source from Print Properties For Macintosh users select the paper source from the Print dialog and pop up menus A TONER CARTRIDGE IS DEFECTIVE Replace the defective toner cartridge THE TRANSFER MODULE IS WORN OR DEFECTIVE Replace the transfer module Toner fog or background shading appears on the page These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following A TONER CARTRIDGE IS DEFECTIVE OR INSTALLED INCORRECTLY Reinstall or replace the defective toner cartridge THE TRANSFER MODULE IS WORN OR DEFECTIVE Replace the transfer module A PHOTOCONDUCTOR IS WORN OR DEFECTIVE Replace the worn or defective photoconductor THE FUSER IS WORN OR DEFECTIVE Replace the fuser TONER IS IN THE PAPER PATH Contact Customer Support Troubleshooting 305 Toner rubs off These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following CHECK THE PAPER TYPE SETTING Make sure the paper type setting matches the paper loaded in the tray CHECK THE PA
155. e these items on the scanner glass 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 Press and then enter the FTP shortcut number 4 Touch Send It Scanning to an FTP address using the address book 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF adjust the paper guides 3 On the home screen touch FTP 4 Touch Search Address Book 5 Type the name or part of the name you are searching for and then touch Search 6 Touch the name that you want to add to the To field 7 Touch Send It Creating shortcuts Instead of entering the entire FTP site address on the printer control panel each time you want to send a document to an FTP server you can create a permanent FTP destination and assign a shortcut number There are two methods for creating shortcut numbers using a computer or using the printer touch screen Creating an FTP shortcut using the Embedded Web Server 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser Note If you do not know the IP address of the printer then print a network setup page and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Click Settings 3 Under Other Settings click Manage Sho
156. e tray such as Custom Type x or define your own custom name Paper Size for example letter A4 statement Load a different paper size to change the Paper Size setting for a tray automatically Paper Size settings for the Standard 550 sheet tray and the multipurpose tray are not automatic they must be set manually from the Paper Size menu Notes Do not assign a Paper Type name that does not accurately describe the type of paper loaded in the tray The temperature of the fuser varies according to the specified Paper Type Paper may not be properly processed if an inaccurate Paper Type is selected fthe media you have loaded is smaller than the Paper Size setting then your text or graphics may not fit on the media Assigning a custom paper type name Assign a custom paper type name to a tray when linking or unlinking the tray Make sure the printer is on and Ready appears From the home screen touch Touch Paper Menu Touch the paper type arrows for the desired tray until the correct custom type appears 1 2 3 4 Touch Paper Size Type 5 6 Touch the tray number or MP Feeder Type 7 Touch Submit Loading paper and specialty media 74 Changing a Custom Type lt x gt name You can use the Embedded Web Server or MarkVision to define aname other than Custom Type lt x gt for each of the custom paper types that are loaded When a Custom Type lt x gt name is changed the menus display the new name
157. ea around all four sides of the paper or pick a particular edge Edge Erase will erase whatever is within the area selected leaving nothing on that portion of the scan e Darkness Adjusts how light or dark your scanned e mails will turn out E mailing 111 Faxing Note Fax capabilities may not be available on all printer models ADF Scanner glass Use the ADF for multiple page documents Use the scanner glass for single pages small items such as postcards or photos transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings Getting the printer ready to fax The following connection methods may not be applicable in all countries or regions Note During the initial printer setup deselect Fax and any other function you plan to set up later and then touch Continue The indicator light may blink red if the fax function is enabled and not fully set up A CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD Do not use the fax feature during a lightning storm Do not set up this product ormakeany electrical or cabling connections such as the fax feature power cord or telephone during alightning storm Warning Potential Damage Do not touch cables or the printer in the area shown while actively sending or receiving a fax Faxing 112 Initial fax setup Many countries and regions require outgoing faxes to contain the following information in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or on the fir
158. eate a group of fax numbers touch Next number and then enter the next fax number 5 Touch Save as Shortcut 6 Enter a name for the shortcut 7 Verify that the shortcut name and number are correct and then touch OK If the name or number is incorrect then touch Cancel and then reenter the information If you enter a number that is already in use then you are prompted to select another number 8 Touch Fax It to send the fax or touch A to return to the home screen Using shortcuts and the address book Using fax shortcuts Fax shortcuts are just like the speed dial numbers on a telephone or fax machine You can assign shortcut numbers when creating permanent fax destinations Permanent fax destinations or speed dial numbers are created in the Manage Shortcuts link located under Settings on the Embedded Web Server A shortcut number 1 99999 can contain a single recipient or multiple recipients By creating a group fax shortcut with a shortcut number you can quickly and easily fax broadcast information to an entire group 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not place postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 Ifyou are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 Press and then enter the shortcut number using the keypad F
159. eate a group of recipients touch Next address and then type the next recipient s e mail address 3 Touch Save as Shortcut 4 Typeaunique name for the shortcut and then touch Enter 5 Verify that the shortcut name and number are correct and then touch OK If the name or number is incorrect then touch Cancel and then reenter the information E mailing 706 E mailing a document Sending an e mail using the touch screen 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 Onthe home screen touch E mail 4 Enter the e mail address or shortcut number To enter additional recipients touch Next Address and then enter the address or shortcut number you want to add Touch E mail It Sending an e mail using a shortcut number 1 2 3 4 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides Press and then enter the shortcut numbe
160. ed Sizes you can scan an original document that contains mixed paper sizes letter and legal size pages Orientation This option tells the printer whether the original document is in portrait or landscape orientation and then changes the Sides and Binding settings to match the original document orientation Sides Duplex This option informs the printer if your original document is simplex printed on one side or duplex printed on both sides This lets the scanner know what needs to be scanned for inclusion in the document Scanning to a computer or flash drive 143 Darkness This option adjusts how light or dark your scanned documents will turn out in relation to the original document Resolution This option adjusts the output quality of your file Increasing the image resolution increases the file size and the time needed to scan your original document Image resolution can be decreased to reduce the file size Advanced Imaging This option lets you adjust Background Removal Contrast Shadow Detail Sharpness and Color Dropout before you scan the document It also lets you Scan edge to edge as a Mirror Image or as a Negative Image Background Removal Agjusts the white portion of the output Click the arrow buttons to increase or decrease the white portion Contrast Click the arrow buttons to increase or decrease the contrast e Shadow Detail Click the arrow buttons to increase or decrease the visible detail in
161. ede ae 92 COPYING PHOTOS EE ER 93 Copylindgon specialty Wie Cases ated Unc e db d o dpa M LA EI ane cet 93 Custornizitig copy Seti dodo e ati e ad fadt co onda at Rectore ei denter eei aratni 94 sint Jobhiterrilbs s a dei rata HORAE looses EARN ho paa etna ien Dun oa Maa RARE IROE 100 Placing mntormaton n coples aao dnd d d FORE d RED detebi idola Md t dade REDE 100 Canceling dob JOD 2x ene ree dee dete Re ema Bret ut mb D e 101 Understanding the copy screens and Options sesssssccsscssessecseessecsseeseecssecseecssecseecssecueecssceuseessceuscssecnecsecenses 101 improving copy qualiby s sosta op Mut po M itu Neon Ian ed 104 I Lrii alo ERE 105 Getting ready to eal cech oe betae dub ond M TS Sce tiec Us 105 Creating abcstialbshortelit esee teet eio Pier ere urere c e Re eee Reb nte Petit 106 E mailing adocumieri enean tra ROO Onde a TU D eode iet OR daa uda 107 C stomizing e mail settle cene ioo ata aab d n ba og d d d ONS 108 Canceling al ial ao n COO UN een UD ad a I d RESUME Un EIN ERN 109 Understanding e mail optlorts ee odo p Re eni ae D RR nia n ADAE Ree 109 Contents 3 Getting the printer heady to TAX used t a De Ut are er ter nat A 112 Sendinga 1996 d det b T Rita dera Rete cu dt dU RR a Meetic bled STARS 126 Creating sho CUL S eon M EROR CRDI ead ad tmm due ansa RUN DONORS En EStG 127 Using shortcuts and the address HOOK ohh ERROR A Hester eee ar tet tee e 128 Customizilid Tax SEIN CLS caso RUNI GRO IRA TEC a a Fada eae ena
162. eement signed by you and Lexmark relating to your Use of the Software Program To the extent any Lexmark policies or programs for support services conflict with the terms of this Software License Agreement the terms of this Software License Agreement shall control MICROSOFT CORPORATION NOTICES 1 This product may incorporate intellectual property owned by Microsoft Corporation The terms and conditions upon which Microsoft is licensing such intellectual property may be found at http go microsoft om fwlink LinkId 52369 Notices 329 2 This product is based on Microsoft Print Schema technology You may find the terms and conditions upon which Microsoft is licensing such intellectual property at http go microsoft com fwlink Linkld 83288 ADOBE SYSTEMS INCORPORATED NOTICE Contains Flash Flash Lite and or Reader technology by Adobe Systems Incorporated This Product contains Adobe Flash player software under license from Adobe Systems Incorporated Copyright 1995 2007 Adobe Macromedia Software LLC All rights reserved Adobe Reader and Flash are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated Notices 530 Index Numerics 1565 Emulation error load emulation option 266 2 000 sheet tray installing 40 2000 sheet tray loading 71 31 Replace defective cartridge 259 32 Cartridge part number unsupported by device 260 34 Short paper 260 35 Insufficient memory to support Resource Save feature 260 37 Insufficient memory to c
163. elGaramond Taffy Times TimesNewRoman Univers Zapf Chancery Menu item Description J Menu item Description Font Size Sets the default font size for HTML documents 1 255 pt Notes 12 ptis the factory default setting Font size can be increased in 1 point increments Scale Scales the default font for HTML documents 1 400 Notes 100 is the factory default setting Scaling can be increased in 1 increments Orientation Sets the page orientation for HTML documents Portrait Note Portrait is the factory default setting Landscape Margin Size Sets the page margin for HTML documents 8 255 mm Notes e 19 mmis the factory default setting Margin size can be increased in 1 mm increments Understanding printer menus 225 Menu item Description Backgrounds Specifies whether to print backgrounds on HTML documents Do Not Print Note Print is the factory default setting Print Image menu Menu item Description Auto Fit Selects the optimal paper size scaling and orientation On Notes Off On is the factory default setting The On setting overrides scaling and orientation settings for some images Invert Inverts bi tonal monochrome images On Notes Off Offis the factory default setting The font size can be increased in 1 point increments This setting does not apply to GIF or JPEG images Scaling Scales the image to fit the selected paper size Anchor Top Left
164. emoved Available selections for each button are Display Do Not Display Date Format MM DD YYYY DD MM YYYY YYYY MM DD Formats the printer date Time Format 12 hour A M P M 24 hour clock Formats the printer time Screen Brightness Specifies the brightness of the printer control panel screen 20 100 One Page Copy Sets the copies from the scanner glass to only one page at a time On Note Off is the factory default setting Off Understanding printer menus 182 Menu item Description Output Lighting Sets the amount of light from the standard bin or an optional Standard Bin LED output bin Normal Standby Mode Notes Bright ee Dim InNormal Standby Mode the factory default setting is Bright Off n Power Saver Mode the factory default is Dim Power Saver Bright Dim Off Output Option Bin LEDs Normal Standby Mode Bright Dim Off Power Saver Bright Dim Off Show Bookmarks Specifies whether bookmarks are displayed from the Held Jobs On area Off Note On is the factory default setting When On is selected bookmarks appear in the Held Jobs area Allow Background Removal On Off Specifies whether image background removal is allowed during copy fax e mail FTP or scan to USB Note On is the factory default setting The background of the image will be removed Allow Custom Job Scans On Off Lets you scan multiple jobs to one file Note On is the factory default setting
165. en touch ES Touch Settings Touch General Settings Touch the down arrow until Print Recovery appears Touch Print Recovery Touch the arrows next to Page Protect until of f appears Touch Submit on A Ui A W N Touch Al to return to the home screen CHANGE ENVIRONMENTAL SETTINGS When using Eco Mode or Quiet Mode settings you may notice a reduction in performance If you want to change the settings and need more information then see Using Eco Mode on page 59 or Reducing printer noise on page 60 Troubleshooting 282 Job prints from the wrong tray or on the wrong paper CHECK THE PAPER TYPE SETTING Make sure the paper type setting matches the paper loaded in the tray 1 From the printer control panel check the Paper Type setting from the Paper menu 2 Before sending the job to print specify the correct type setting For Windows users specify the type from Print Properties For Macintosh users specify the type from the Print dialog Incorrect characters print Make sure the printer is not in Hex Trace mode If Ready Hex appears on the display you must exit Hex Trace mode before you can print your job Turn the printer off and back on to exit Hex Trace mode Tray linking does not work These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following LOAD THE SAME SIZE AND TYPE OF PAPER Load the same size and type of paper in each tray to be linked Move the paper guides to the correct positions for
166. entation of text and graphics on the page Notes Portrait is the factory default setting Portrait prints text and graphics parallel to the short edge of the page Landscape prints text and graphics parallel to the long edge of the page PCL Emulation Settings Lines per Page 1 255 60 64 Specifies the number of lines that print on each page Notes e 60 is the US factory default setting 64 is the international default setting Theprintersets the amount of space between each line based on the Lines per Page Paper Size and Orientation settings Select the desired Paper Size and Orientation before setting Lines per Page PCL Emulation Settings A4 Width 198 mm 203 mm Sets the printer to print on A4 size paper Notes e 198 mm is the factory default setting The 203 mm setting sets the width of the page to allow the printing of eighty 10 pitch characters PCL Emulation Settings Auto CR after LF On Off Specifies whether the printer automatically performs a carriage return CR after a line feed LF control command Notes e Off is the factory default setting Setting alterations are duplicated in the PPDS menu PCL Emulation Settings Auto LF after CR On Off Specifies whether the printer automatically performs a line feed LF after a carriage return CR control command Notes e Offis the factory default setting Setting alterations are duplicated in the PPDS menu Unde
167. ential job stays in the printer before it is deleted Notes e Off is the default setting e If the Job Expiration setting is changed while confidential jobs reside on the printer RAM or printer hard disk the expiration time for those print jobs does not change to the new default value fthe printer is turned off all confidential jobs held in printer RAM are deleted Disk Wiping menu Menu item Automatic Wiping Off On Description Disk Wiping erases only print job data that is not currently in use by the file system from the printer hard disk All permanent data on the printer hard disk is preserved such as downloaded fonts macros and held jobs Automatic Wiping marks all disk space used by a previous job and does not permit the file system to reuse this space until it has been sanitized Only Automatic Wiping enables users to activate disk wiping without having to take the printer offline for an extended amount of time Notes This menu item appears only if a formatted non defective printer hard disk is installed e Off is the default setting e Duetothe large amount of resources required for Automatic Wiping activating this option may decrease printer performance especially if the printer requires hard disk space faster than it can be wiped and returned to service Manual Wiping Start now Do not start now Disk Wiping erases only print job data that is not currently in use by the file system fro
168. eouts Sets the amount of time the printer waits after a job is printed Power Saver before it goes into a reduced power state 1 240 Notes 30 minutes is the factory default setting e Lower settings conserve more energy but may require longer warm up times Select the lowest setting if the printer shares an electrical circuit with room lighting or you notice lights flickering in the room Select a high setting if the printer is in constant use Under most circumstances this keeps the printer ready to print with minimum warm up time Timeouts Sets the amount of time in seconds the printer waits before Screen Timeout returning the printer display to a Ready state 15 300 Note 30 seconds is the factory default setting Timeouts Sets the amount of time in seconds the printer waits to receive an Print Timeout end of job message before canceling the remainder of the print Disabled job 1 255 Notes 90 seconds is the factory default setting When the timer expires any partially printed page still in the printer is printed and then the printer checks to see if any new print jobs are waiting e Print Timeout is available only when using PCL emulation This setting has no effect on PostScript emulation print jobs Understanding printer menus 184 Menu item Timeouts Wait Timeout Disabled 15 6553515 Timeouts Job Hold Timeout 5 255 Print Recovery Auto Continue Disabled 5 255 Description Sets the amount of
169. er 16 copy quality adjusting 97 improving 104 copy screen options 101 102 103 Copy Settings menu 186 copy troubleshooting copier does not respond 284 partial document or photo copies 286 poor copy quality 285 poor scanned image quality 287 scanner unit does not close 284 copying adding a date and time stamp 100 adding an overlay message 100 adjusting quality 97 canceling a copy job 101 collating copies 97 custom job job build 99 document containing mixed paper sizes 95 enlarging 96 from one size to another 94 improving copy quality 104 making transparencies 93 multiple pages on one sheet 98 on both sides of the paper duplexing 96 photos 93 placing separator sheets between copies 98 quick copy 92 reducing 96 selecting a tray 95 to letterhead 94 using the ADF 92 using the scanner glass flatbed 93 Custom Names menu 156 custom paper type assigning 74 Custom Scan Sizes menu 157 Custom Type lt x gt changing name 75 Custom Types menu 156 D date and time setting 126 Default Source menu 147 directory list printing 89 Disk corrupted 257 Disk Wiping menu 175 display troubleshooting display is blank 280 display shows only diamonds 280 display printer control panel 16 adjusting brightness 62 distinctive ring service connecting to 116 documents printing from Macintosh 82 from Windows 82 duplexing 96 Eco Mode setting 59 Embedded Web Server 254 administrator settings 254 checki
170. er Legal Sides Duplex Description Specifies the paper size of the document that is being scanned Note Letter is the US factory default setting A4 is the international factory default setting Specifies how the text and graphics are oriented on the page Off Notes Long edge Short edge e Off is the factory default setting Long edge assumes binding along the long edge of the page left edge for portrait orientation and top edge for landscape orientation Short edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page top edge for portrait orientation and left edge for landscape orientation JPEG Quality Sets the quality of a JPEG photo image in relation to file size and the quality of the Best for content image 5 90 Notes Best for content is the factory default setting e 5 reduces the file size but the quality of the image is lessened 90 provides the best image quality but the file size is very large This menu item applies to all scan functions Text Default Sets the quality of the text in relation to file size and the quality of the image 5 90 Note 75 is the factory default setting Text Photo Default 5 90 Sets the quality of a text photo image in relation to file size and the quality of the image Note 75 is the factory default setting Photo Default 5 90 Sets the quality of a photo image in relation to file size and the quality of the image Note 50 is the factory default setting
171. er problems Checking an unresponsive scanner If your scanner is not responding then make sure The printer is turned on The printer cable is securely attached to the printer and the host computer print server option or other network device The power cord is plugged into the printer and a properly grounded electrical outlet The electrical outlet is not turned off by any switch or breaker Troubleshooting 286 The printer is not plugged into any surge protectors uninterrupted power supplies or extension cords Other electrical equipment plugged into the outlet is working Once you have checked each of these possibilities turn the printer off and then back on This often fixes the problem with the scanner Scan was not successful These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following CHECK THE CABLE CONNECTIONS Make sure the network or USB cable is securely connected to the computer and the printer AN ERROR MAY HAVE OCCURRED IN THE PROGRAM Turn off and then restart the computer Scanning takes too long or freezes the computer These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following OTHER SOFTWARE PROGRAMS MAY BE INTERFERING WITH SCANNING Close all programs not being used THE SCAN RESOLUTION MAY BE SET TOO HIGH Select a lower scan resolution Poor scanned image quality These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following CHECK THE DISPLAY FOR ERROR MESSAGES
172. erial is properly removed Reinstall the toner cartridge TONER IS LOW e Remove the toner cartridge from the printer Shake the cartridge back and forth several times and then reinstall it Install a new toner cartridge A TONER CARTRIDGE IS DEFECTIVE OR EMPTY Replace the defective or empty toner cartridge THE PRINTER REQUIRES SERVICING Call for service Characters have jagged or uneven edges N ABC DEF If you are using downloaded fonts verify that the fonts are supported by the printer the host computer and the software program Troubleshooting 296 Co lor misregistration Color has shifted outside of the appropriate area or has been superimposed over another color area These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following RECALIBRATE THE PRINTER Fr REI om the printer control panel Quality menu perform Color Adjust NSTALL THE PHOTOCONDUCTOR Remove and reinstall the photoconductor ADJUST THE COLOR ALIGNMENT 1 2 3 4 Uu Turn the printer off Load letter or A4 size paper in the tray Hold down 9 and S while turning the printer on Release the buttons when the screen with the progress bar appears The printer performs a power on sequence and then the Configuration menu appears Touch the down arrow until Color Alignment appears 6 Touch Color Alignment Touch Color Alignment again The color alignment pages print 8 Touch the down arrow until Color Alignment a
173. ersion 10 5 or later 1 From the Apple menu choose System Preferences 2 Click Print amp Fax Additional printer setup 50 Click Click IP Type in the IP address of your printer in the Address field Click Add n Mac OS X version 10 4 and earlier au PWN From the Finder desktop choose Go gt Applications Double click the Utilities folder Locate and double click Printer Setup Utility or Print Center From the Printer List choose Add Click IP Type in the IP address of your printer in the Address field Click Add For AppleTalk printing In Mac OS X version 10 5 au UN From the Apple menu choose System Preferences Click Print amp Fax Click Click AppleTalk Select the printer from the list Click Add n Mac OS X version 10 4 O OON AOU BWN A From the Finder desktop choose Go gt Applications Double click the Utilities folder Locate and double click Print Center or Printer Setup Utility From the Printer List choose Add Choose the Default Browser tab Click More Printers From the first pop up menu choose AppleTalk From the second pop up menu select Local AppleTalk zone Select the printer from the list Click Add Installing the printer on a wired network Use the following instructions to install the printer on a wired network These instructions apply to Ethernet and fiber optic network connections Before you install the printer on a wired network make sure
174. ething metal on the printer before touching any system board electronic components or connectors 1 Accessthe system board 2 Unpack the ISP and plastic tee Note Avoid touching the components on the card 3 Locate the appropriate connector on the system board iC A Note If an optional printer hard disk is currently installed then it must first be removed To remove the printer hard disk Additional printer setup 29 a Unplug the printer hard disk interface cable from the system board leaving the cable attached to the printer hard disk To unplug the cable squeeze the paddle at the plug of the interface cable to disengage the latch before pulling the cable out a b Remove the screws holding the printer hard disk in place Additional printer setup 30 c Remove the printer hard disk by pulling it upward to unseat the standoffs ue S d Remove the thumbscrews that attach the printer hard disk mounting bracket to the printer hard disk and then remove the bracket Set the printer hard disk aside 4 Remove the metal cover from the ISP opening Additional printer setup 31 5 Align the posts of the plastic tee to the holes in the system board and press downward until the tee snaps into place Be sure each post of the tee has latched completely and the tee is seated firmly on the system board d g Q 6 Install the ISP o
175. ets you scan documents directly to a File Transfer Protocol FTP server Only one FTP address may be sent to the server at a time Once an FTP destination has been configured by your system support person the name of the destination becomes available as a shortcut number or it is listed as a profile under the Held Jobs icon An FTP destination could also be another PostScript printer for example a color document can be scanned and then sent to a color printer Sending a document to an FTP server is similar to sending a fax The difference is that you are sending the information over your network instead of over the phone line Scanning to an FTP address Scanning to an FTP address using the keypad 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 On the home screen touch FTP 4 Type the FTP address 5 Touch Send It Scanning to an FTP address 136 Scanning to an FTP address using a shortcut number 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Plac
176. exmark s and its Suppliers and Remarketers limitations of remedies are not cumulative Such Suppliers and Remarketers are intended beneficiaries of this limitation Additional rights Some states do notallow limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts or do not allowthe exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages so the limitations or exclusions contained above may not apply to you This limited warranty gives you specific legal rights You may also have other rights that vary from state to state LEXMARK SOFTWARE LIMITED WARRANTY AND LICENSE AGREEMENTS PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE USING THIS PRODUCT BY USING THIS PRODUCT YOU AGREE TO BE BOUND BY ALL THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS SOFTWARE LIMITED WARRANTY AND LICENSE AGREEMENTS IF YOU DO NOT AGREE WITH THE TERMS OF THIS SOFTWARE LIMITED WARRANTY AND LICENSE AGREEMENTS PROMPTLY RETURN THE PRODUCT UNUSED AND REQUEST A REFUND OF THE AMOUNT YOU PAID IF YOU ARE INSTALLING THIS PRODUCT FOR USE BY OTHER PARTIES YOU AGREE TO INFORM THE USERS THAT USE OF THE PRODUCT INDICATES ACCEPTANCE OF THESE TERMS DEVICE LICENSE AGREEMENT The patented printer is licensed for and designed to work with only genuine Lexmark toner cartridges and developer components for the life of the patented printer Under this patent license you agree to 1 use only genuine Lexmark toner cartridges and developer components with this printer except as otherwise provided below and 2 pass th
177. f Copies Specifies the number of copies for the copy job 1 999 Note 1 is the factory default setting Header Footer Specifies header footer information for the top left of the page Top left Notes Top left Off e Off is the factory default setting for Top left Date Time All pages is the factory default setting for Print on Page number Bates number Custom text Print on All pages First page only All but first page Enter custom text Header Footer Top middle Top middle Off Date Time Page number Bates number Custom text Print on All pages First page only All but first page Enter custom text Specifies header footer information for the middle of the page Notes Offisthe factory default setting for Top middle All pages is the factory default setting for Print on Header Footer Top right Top right Off Date Time Page number Bates number Custom text Print on All pages First page only All but first page Enter custom text Specifies header footer information for the top right of the page Notes e Off is the factory default setting for Top right All pages is the factory default setting for Print on Understanding printer menus 188 Menu item Header Footer Bottom left Bottom left Off Date Time Page number Bates number Custom text Print on All pages First page only All but first page Enter custom text Description Specifies header footer information
178. f is the factory default setting O Understanding printer menus 204 FTP Settings menu Menu item Description Format Specifies the format of the FTP file PDF pdf Note PDF pdf is the factory default setting Secure PDF TIFF tif JPEG jpg XPS xps PDF Version Sets the version level of the PDF file for FTP 1 2 1 6 Note 1 5 is the factory default setting Content Specifies the type of content that will be scanned to FTP Text Photo Notes Photograph Tes Text Photo is the factory default setting Text Photo is used when the documents are mostly text or line art Photograph is used when the document is a high quality photograph or inkjet print Text is used when the document is mostly text Color Specifies whether a job prints in grayscale or color Gray Note Color is the factory default setting Color Resolution Specifies how many dots per inch are scanned 75 Note 150 dpi is the factory default setting 150 200 300 400 600 Darkness Lightens or darkens the output 1 9 Note 5 is the factory default setting Orientation Specifies the orientation of the scanned image Portrait Note Portrait is the factory default setting Landscape Understanding printer menus 205 Menu item Original Size Letter Legal Executive Folio Statement Universal 4x6in 3x5 in Business Card Custom Scan Size lt x gt A4 A5 Oficio Mexico JIS B5 Book Original Auto Size Sense Mixed Lett
179. f the computers are configured to print to the printer by a network name that will stay the same instead of by IP address then you do not need to make any changes to the computer configurations If you are adding a wireless ISP to a printer previously configured for a wired connection then make sure the wired network is disconnected when you configure the printer to operate wirelessly If the wired connection remains connected then the wireless configuration will complete but the wireless ISP will not be active In the event that the printer was configured for a wireless ISP while still attached to a wired connection disconnect the wired connection turn the printer off and then turn the printer back on again This will enable the wireless ISP Only one network connection at a time is active If you want to switch the connection type between wired and wireless you must first turn the printer off connect the cable to switch to a wired connection or disconnect the cable to switch to a wireless connection and then turn the printer back on again For Windows users bh W N O O ON Q mt 12 Print a network setup page and make a note of the new IP address Click or click Start and then click Run In the Start Search or Run box type control printers Press Enter or click OK The printer folder opens Locate the printer that has changed Note If there is more than one copy of the printer then update all of them with t
180. fault setting Off Font Priority Establishes the font search order Resident Notes Flash Disk Resident is the factory default setting e A formatted flash memory option card or printer hard disk must be available or password protected Job Buffer Size must not be set to 10096 Understanding printer menus 221 installed in the printer and operating properly for this menu item to be Theflash memory option or printer hard disk cannot be Read Write Write Image Smoothing On Off Menu item Description Enhances the contrast and sharpness of low resolution images and smooths their color transitions Notes e Off is the factory default setting Image Smoothing has no effect on images that are 300 dpi or higher in resolution M PCL Emul menu Menu item Description Font Source Specifies the set of fonts used by the Font Name menu item Resident Notes Disk Flash Resident is the factory default setting It shows the factory default set of fonts downloaded into RAM Download All Flash and Disk settings show all fonts resident in that option Flash option must be properly formatted and cannot be Read Write Write or password protected Download shows all the fonts downloaded into RAM All shows all fonts available to any option Font Name Identifies a specific font and the option where it is stored RO Courier Notes RO Courieris the factory default setting
181. for use before buying large quantities Note Use only paper label sheets Vinyl pharmacy and dual sided labels are not supported For detailed information on label printing characteristics and design see the Card Stock amp Label Guide available on the Lexmark Web site at www lexmark com publications When printing on labels Use labels designed specifically for laser printers Check with the manufacturer or vendor to verify that The labels can withstand temperatures up to 190 C 374 F without sealing excessive curling wrinkling or releasing hazardous emissions Label adhesives face sheet printable stock and topcoats can withstand up to 25 psi 172 kPa pressure without delaminating oozing around the edges or releasing hazardous fumes Do not use labels with slick backing material Use full label sheets Partial sheets may cause labels to peel off during printing resulting in a jam Partial sheets also contaminate the printer and the cartridge with adhesive and could void the printer and cartridge warranties Do not use labels with exposed adhesive Do not print within 1 mm 0 04 in of the edge of the label of the perforations or between die cuts of the label Be sure adhesive backing does not reach to the sheet edge Zone coating of the adhesive at least 1 mm 0 04 in away from edges is recommended Adhesive material contaminates the printer and could void the warranty If zone coating of the adhesive
182. forms the printer if the original document is simplex printed on one side or duplex printed on both sides This lets the scanner know what needs to be scanned for inclusion in the document Orientation This option tells the printer whether the original document is in portrait or landscape orientation and then changes the Sides and Binding settings to match the original document orientation Binding Tells the printer whether the original document is bound on the long edge or short edge side Scanning to an FTP address 138 Resolution This option adjusts the output quality of your file Increasing the image resolution increases the file size and the time needed to scan your original document Image resolution can be decreased to reduce the file size Send As This option sets the output PDF TIFF JPEG or XPS for the scanned image PDF Creates a single file with multiple pages viewable with Adobe Reader Adobe Reader is provided free by Adobe at www adobe com Secure PDF Creates an encrypted PDF file that protects the file contents from unauthorized access e TIFF Creates multiple files or a single file If Multi page TIFF is turned off in the Settings menu of the Embedded Web Server then TIFF saves one page in each file The file size is usually larger than an equivalent JPEG JPEG Creates and attaches a separate file for each page of your original document viewable by most Web browsers and graphics programs e
183. fy Reserve and Repeat print jobs may be deleted if the printer requires extra memory to process additional held jobs Job type Description Confidential When you send a Confidential print job to the printer you must create a PIN from the computer The PIN must be four digits using the numbers 0 9 The job is held in printer memory until you enter the PIN from the printer control panel and choose to print or delete the job Verify When you send a Verify print job the printer prints one copy and holds the remaining copies in printer memory Verify lets you examine the first copy to see if it is satisfactory before printing the remaining copies Once all copies are printed the job is automatically deleted from printer memory Reserve When you senda Reserve print job the printer does not print the job immediately It stores the job in memory so you can print the job later The job is held in memory until you delete it from the Held Jobs menu Repeat When you send a Repeat print job the printer prints all requested copies of the job and stores the job in memory so you can print additional copies later You can print additional copies as long as the job remains stored in memory M Other types of held jobs include Profiles from various sources including Lexmark Document Solutions Suite LDSS Forms from a kiosk Bookmarks Jobs not printed which are called parked jobs Printing confidential and other held jobs fro
184. g Normal Rough Light Texture Specifies the relative texture of the paper loaded in a specific tray Smooth Note Normal is the factory default setting Normal Rough Heavy Texture Specifies the relative texture of the paper loaded in a specific tray Smooth Note Normal is the factory default setting Normal Rough Rough Cotton Texture Specifies the relative texture of the paper loaded in a specific tray Rough Note Rough is the factory default setting Custom lt x gt Texture Specifies the relative texture of the custom paper loaded in a specific tray Smooth Notes Normal Rough Normal is the factory default setting L Settings appear only if the custom type is supported J Paper Weight menu Menu item Description Plain Weight Specifies the relative weight of the paper loaded in a specific tray Light Note Normal is the factory default setting Normal Heavy Understanding printer menus 152 Menu item Description Card Stock Weight Specifies the relative weight of the card stock loaded in a specific tray Light Notes Normal Heavy Normal is the factory default setting Settings appear only if card stock is supported Transparency Weight Specifies the relative weight of the transparencies loaded in a specific tray Light Note Normal is the factory default setting Normal Heavy Recycled Weight Light Normal Heavy Specifies the relative weight of the recycled paper loaded in a specific tray Note No
185. g defects in copies or prints Supplies guide Provides part numbers for ordering supplies Understanding printer menus 228 Maintaining the printer Periodically certain tasks are required to maintain optimum print quality Cleaning the exterior of the printer 1 Make sure that the printer is turned off and unplugged from the wall outlet CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD To avoid the risk of electric shock when cleaning the exterior of the printer unplug the power cord from the wall outlet and disconnect all cables to the printer before proceeding 2 Remove paper from the standard exit bin 3 Dampen a clean lint free cloth with water Warning Potential Damage Do not use household cleaners or detergents as they may damage the finish of the printer 4 Wipe only the outside of the printer making sure to include the standard exit bin Warning Potential Damage Using a damp cloth to clean the interior may cause damage to your printer 5 Make sure the paper support and standard exit bin are dry before beginning a new print job Maintaining the printer 229 Cleaning the scanner glass Clean the scanner glass if you encounter print quality problems such as streaks on copied or scanned images 1 Slightly dampen a soft lint free cloth or paper towel with water 2 Open the scanner cover White underside of the ADF cover amb White underside of the scanner cover Scanner glass A JW IN
186. g the computer 137 creating shortcuts using the touch screen 138 improving FTP quality 140 using shortcut numbers 137 using the address book 137 using the keypad 136 Security Audit Log menu 176 security lock 15 separator pad ordering 238 replacing 245 Serial x menu 171 serial port 56 serial printing setting up 56 Set Date Time menu 177 setting paper size 65 paper type 65 TCP IP address 163 Universal Paper Size 65 setting up serial printing 56 setting up the printer on a wired network Macintosh 51 on a wired network Windows 51 Settings menu 213 shipping the printer 253 shortcuts creating e mail 106 fax destination 127 128 FTP destination 137 138 SMTP server not set up Contact system administrator 259 SMTP Setup menu 162 standard exit bin light 62 Standard Network menu 160 Standard USB x menu 167 Standard USB menu 167 status of supplies checking 237 storing paper 79 supplies 236 subject and message information adding to e mail 108 Substitute Size menu 150 supplies conserving 58 status of 237 storing 236 using recycled paper 58 Supplies menu 146 supplies ordering ADF pick assembly 238 ADF pick pad 238 fuser or transfer module 238 photoconductors 237 separator pad 238 toner cartridges 237 waste toner box 238 system board accessing 24 system board cover reinstalling 39 T TCP IP menu 163 telecommunication notices 318 319 320 tips card stock 84 envelopes 83 labels
187. g the length of the paper or grain short running the width of the paper For 60 to 135 g m 16 to 36 Ib bond paper grain long paper is recommended For papers heavier than 135 g m grain short is recommended Paper and specialty media guidelines 76 Fiber content Most high quality xerographic paper is made from 100 chemically treated pulped wood This content provides the paper with a high degree of stability resulting in fewer paper feeding problems and better print quality Paper containing fibers such as cotton can negatively affect paper handling Selecting paper Using appropriate paper prevents jams and helps ensure trouble free printing To help avoid jams and poor print quality Always use new undamaged paper Before loading paper know the recommended print side of the paper This information is usually indicated on the paper package Donot use paper that has been cut or trimmed by hand Donot mix paper sizes types or weights in the same source mixing results in jams Donot use coated papers unless they are specifically designed for electrophotographic printing Selecting preprinted forms and letterhead Use these guidelines when selecting preprinted forms and letterhead Use grain long for 60 to 90 g m 16 to 24 Ib weight paper Use only forms and letterhead printed using an offset lithographic or engraved printing process Avoid papers with rough or heavily textured surfaces Use papers printed wi
188. gardless of the default printer language Off Notes Onisthe factory default setting When the Off setting is used the printer does not examine incoming data Whenthe Off setting is used the printer uses PCL emulation if PCL SmartSwitch is set to On It uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu if PCL SmartSwitch is set to Off NPA Mode Sets the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional On communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol Off Notes Auto Auto is the factory default setting Changingthissettingfromthe printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart The menu selection is updated Understanding printer menus 169 Menu item Parallel Buffer Disabled Auto 3k to lt maximum size allowed gt Description Sets the size of the parallel input buffer Notes Auto is the factory default setting The Disabled setting turns off job buffering Any jobs already buffered on the disk are printed before normal processing is resumed The parallel buffer size setting can be changed in 1k increments The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the printer the size of the other link buffers and whether Resource Save is set to On or Off To increase the maximum size range for the Parallel Buffer disable or reduce the size of the USB serial and network buffers Changingthis setting from t
189. ge see Printing a network setup page on page 44 Locate the printer IP address in the TCP IP section of the network setup page You will need the IP address if you are configuring access for computers on a different subnet than the printer Install the drivers and add the printer a Install a PPD file on the computer 1 Insert the Software and Documentation CD in the CD or DVD drive Double click the installer package for the printer From the Welcome screen click Continue Click Continue again after viewing the Readme file Click Continue after viewing the license agreement and then click Agree to accept the terms of the agreement Select a Destination and then click Continue From the Easy Install screen click Install 8 Type the user password and then click OK All the necessary software is installed on the computer 9 Click Restart when installation is complete UAWN NO Additional printer setup 52 b Add the printer e For IP printing In Mac OS X version 10 5 or later 1 2 3 4 5 6 From the Apple menu choose System Preferences Click Print amp Fax Click Click IP Type in the IP address of your printer in the Address field Click Add In Mac OS X version 10 4 and earlier 1 au UN N From the Finder desktop choose Go gt Applications Double click Utilities Double click Printer Setup Utility or Print Center From the Printer List click Add Click IP Type in the IP addres
190. gs maps electrical circuit diagrams and flow charts Notes To set Enhance Fine Lines from the software program with a document open dick File Print and then click Properties Preferences Options or Setup To set Enhance Fine Lines using the Embedded Web Server type the network printer IP address in a browser window Understanding printer menus 217 Menu item Color Saver On Off Description Reduces the amount of toner used for graphics and images The amount of toner used for text is not reduced Notes e Off is the factory default setting On overrides Toner Darkness settings RGB Brightness Adjusts brightness in color outputs 6 6 Notes Ois the factory default setting e 6 is the maximum decrease 6 is the maximum increase This does not affect files where CMYK color specifications are being used RGB Contrast Adjusts contrast in color outputs 0 5 Notes Ois the factory default setting This does not affect files where CMYK color specifications are being used RGB Saturation Adjusts saturation in color outputs 0 5 Notes Ois the factory default setting This does not affect files where CMYK color specifications are being used Color Balance Cyan 5 5 Magenta 5 5 Yellow Reset Defaults 0 Adjusts color in printed output by increasing or decreasing the amount of toner being used for each color Note 0 is the factory default setting Color Sa
191. h 82 from Windows 82 installing printer software 45 max speed and max yield 90 menu settings page 44 network setup page 44 photos 88 print quality test pages 89 transparencies 83 printing confidential and other held jobs from Macintosh computer 86 from Windows 85 publications finding 9 Q Quality menu 217 Quiet Mode 60 print quality troubleshooting 298 R recycled paper using 58 77 recycling Lexmark packaging 63 Lexmark products 63 toner cartridges 64 WEEE statement 315 reducing a copy 96 Remove paper from standard output bin 259 Repeat print jobs 85 printing from Macintosh computer 86 printing from Windows 85 reports viewing 255 Reports menu 158 Reserve print jobs 85 printing from Macintosh computer 86 printing from Windows 85 resetting the maintenance counter 241 resolution fax changing 129 Restore Held Jobs 259 S safety information 7 8 Scan Document Too Long 259 Index 336 scan quality improving 144 scan troubleshooting cannot scan froma computer 288 partial document or photo scans 288 scan was not successful 287 scanner unit does not close 284 scanning takes too long or freezes the computer 287 scanner Automatic Document Feeder ADF 14 functions 13 registration 235 scanner glass 14 scanner glass cleaning 230 scanner glass flatbed copying using 93 scanning to a computer 141 improving scan quality 144 scanning to a flash drive 142 scanning to an FTP address creating shortcuts usin
192. he built in web server Embedded Web Server When enabled the printer Yes can be monitored and managed remotely using a web browser No Note Yes is the factory default setting WINS Server Address Lets you view or change the current WINS Server Address DNS Server Address Lets you view or change the current DNS Server Address J Network Card menu This menu is available from the Network Ports menu Network Ports gt Standard Network or Network x Std Network Setup or Net x Setup gt Network Card View Card Status Connected Disconnected Menu item Description Lets you view the connection status of the Network Card View Card Speed Lets you view the speed of a currently active network card 0 225 seconds Network Address Lets you view the network addresses UAA LAA Job Timeout Sets the amount of time in seconds that a network print job can take before it is canceled Notes 90 seconds is the factory default setting Asetting value of 0 disables the timeout e fa value of 1 9 is selected then the setting is saved as 10 Banner Page Allows the printer to print a banner page Off Note Off is the factory default setting On IPv6 menu Use the following menu items to view or set the Internet Protocol version 6 IPv6 information Note This menu is available only for network models or printers attached to print servers This menu is available from the Network Ports menu Under
193. he new IP address Right click the printer Click Properties Click the Ports tab Locate the port in the list and then select it Click Configure Port Type the new IP address in the Printer Name or IP Address field You can find the new IP address on the network setup page you printed in step 1 Click OK and then click Close Additional printer setup 54 For Macintosh users 1 Print a network setup page and make a note of the new IP address 2 Locate the printer IP address in the TCP IP section of the network setup page You will need the IP address if you are configuring access for computers on a different subnet than the printer 3 Add the printer For IP printing In Mac OS X version 10 5 or later a D On co From the Apple menu choose System Preferences Click Print amp Fax Click Click IP Type in the IP address of your printer in the Address field Click Add In Mac OS X version 10 4 and earlier a e 0O n oO From the Go menu choose Applications Double click Utilities Double click Printer Setup Utility or Print Center From the Printer List click Add Click IP Type in the IP address of your printer in the Address field Click Add For AppleTalk printing In Mac OS X version 10 5 a D Ong From the Apple menu choose System Preferences Click Print amp Fax Click Click AppleTalk Select the printer from the list Click Add In Mac OS X version 10
194. he printer handles temporary downloads such as fonts and macros stored in RAM when the printer receives a job that requires more memory than is available Notes e Off is the factory default setting Off sets the printer to retain the downloads only until memory is needed Downloads are deleted in order to process print jobs The On setting retains the downloads during language changes and printer resets If the printer runs out of memory 38 Memory Fullappears anddownloadsare not deleted Print All Order Alphabetically Newest First Oldest First Specifies the order in which held and confidential jobs are printed when Print All is selected Notes Alphabetically is the factory default setting Print jobs always appear in alphabetical order on the printer control panel A Finishing menu Menu item Description Sides Duplex 2 sided 1 sided Specifies whether duplex 2 sided printing is set as the default for all print jobs Notes 1 sided is the factory default setting To set 2 sided printing from the software program for Windows users click File gt Print and then click Properties Preferences Options or Setup for Macintosh users choose File gt Print and then adjust the settings from the print dialog and pop up menus Duplex Binding Defines the way duplexed pages are bound and how the printing on the back of Long Edge the page is oriented in relation to the pr
195. he printercontrol panel and then exiting themenus causes the printer to restart The menu selection is updated Job Buffering Off On Auto Temporarily stores jobs on the printer hard disk before printing Notes e Off is the factory default setting The Off setting does not buffer print jobs to the printer hard disk The On setting buffers jobs on the printer hard disk The Auto setting buffers print jobs only if the printer is busy processing data from another input port Changingthis setting from the printercontrol panel and then exiting themenus causes the printer to restart The menu selection is updated Advanced Status On Off Enables bidirectional communication through the parallel port Notes Onisthe factory default setting The Off setting disables parallel port negotiation Parallel Protocol Specifies the parallel port protocol Standard Notes Fastbytes e Fastbytes is the factory default setting It provides compatibility with most existing parallel ports and is the recommended setting The Standard setting tries to resolve parallel port communication problems Honor Init Determines whether or not the printer honors printer hardware initialization On requests from the computer Off Notes e Offis the factory default setting The computer requests initialization by activating the Init signal from the parallel port Many personal computers activate the Init signal each time the computer
196. here between 25 and 400 Scale can also be set for you automatically When you want to copy from one size of paper to another suchas from legal size to letter size paper setting the Copy from and Copy to paper sizes automatically changes the scale to keep all the original document information on your copy Touch the left arrow to decrease the value by 1 touch the right arrow to increase the value by 1 Hold your finger on an arrow to make a continuous increment change Hold your finger on an arrow for two seconds to cause the pace of the change to accelerate Darkness This option adjusts how light or dark your copies will turn out in relation to the original document Content This option tells the printer the original document type Choose from Text Text Photo Photograph or Printed Image Text Emphasize sharp black high resolution text against a clean white background Text Photo Used when the original documents are a mixture of text and graphics or pictures Photograph Tells the scanner to pay extra attention to graphics and pictures This setting increases the time it takes to scan but emphasizes a reproduction of the full dynamic range of tones in the original document Printed Image Used when copying halftone photographs graphics such as documents printed on a laser printer or pages from a magazine or newspaper that are composed primarily of images Sides Duplex Use this option to select duplex set
197. his button is shown then there are held faxes with a scheduled hold time previously set To access the list of held faxes touch this button Search Held Jobs Searches on any of the following items and returns search results e User names for held or confidential print jobs Job names for held jobs excluding confidential print jobs Profile names Bookmark container or job names USB container or job names for supported extensions only Held Jobs Opens a screen containing all the held jobs Lock Device This button appears on the screen when the printer is unlocked and Device Lockout Personal Identification Number PIN has been set Touching this button opens a PIN entry screen Entering the correct PIN locks the printer control panel touch screen and hard buttons Unlock Device This button appears on the screen when the printer is locked The printer control panel buttons and shortcuts cannot be used while it appears Touching this button opens a PIN entry screen Entering the correct PIN unlocks the printer control panel touch screen and hard buttons Learning about the printer 18 Display item Function Cancel Jobs Opens the Cancel Jobs screen The Cancel Jobs screen shows three headings Print Fax and Network The following items are available under the Print Fax and Network headings e Print job Copy job Fax profile e FTP E mail send Each heading has a list of jobs shown in a
198. hooting 273 b Turn the screws to the right to fasten the fuser securely 5 Close the lower front door and then close the upper front door 6 Touch Continue 203 paper jam 1 Grasp paper that is visible in the standard exit bin and pull it away from the bin 2 Open the upper front door A CAUTION HOT SURFACE The inside of the printer might be hot To reduce the risk of injury from a hot component allow the surface to cool before touching 3 Open the lower front door 4 Grasp the paper on each side and pull it out gently 5 Close the lower front door Troubleshooting 274 6 Close the upper front door 7 Touch Continue 230 paper jam 1 Remove Tray 1 2 Open the upper front door and then open the lower front door CAUTION HOT SURFACE The inside of the printer might be hot To reduce the risk of injury from a hot component allow the surface to cool before touching 3 Pull the jam straight up to remove it 5 Pull straight out to remove any jammed paper 6 Close the lower front door and then close the upper front door 7 Reinsert Tray 1 8 Touch Continue Troubleshooting 275 24x paper jam Paper jammed in Tray 1 1 Open Tray 1 and then pull the jammed pages straight up and out 2 Close Tray 1 3 Touch Continue Troubleshooting 276 Paper jammed in front of Tray 1 1 Open Tray 1 and then pull the jammed pages up and out 2 Close Tray 1 3 Touch Continue Troubles
199. hooting 277 Paper jammed in one of the optional trays 1 Open the specified tray and then pull the jammed pages out 2 Close the tray 3 Touch Continue 250 paper jam 1 Press the paper release lever and then remove the jammed pages from the multipurpose feeder 2 Load new paper into the multipurpose feeder Troubleshooting 278 3 Touch Continue 290 294 paper jams 1 Remove all original documents from the ADF 2 Open the ADF cover and then remove any jammed paper 3 Close the ADF cover 4 Open the duplex cover and then remove any jammed paper Troubleshooting 279 5 Open the scanner cover and then remove any jammed pages 6 Close the scanner cover 7 Touch Restart Job Solving printing problems Multiple language PDFs do not print The documents contain unavailable fonts 1 Open the document you want to print in Adobe Acrobat 2 Click the printer icon The Print dialog appears 3 Select Print as image 4 Click OK Printer control panel display is blank or displays only diamonds The printer self test failed Turn the printer off wait about 10 seconds and then turn the printer on If Ready does not appear then turn the printer off and contact Customer Support Error message about reading USB drive appears Make sure the USB drive is supported For information regarding tested and approved USB flash memory devices visit the Lexmark Web site at www lexmark com Troubleshoot
200. hort edge first into the ADF b Touch Copy Quick Test The scanner prints a copy of the Quick Test page c Touch ADF Front or ADF Back d Usethe copy of the Quick Test page to adjust the Horizontal Adjust and Top Margin settings e Touch Submit f Touch Copy Quick Test and compare the new copy to the original Repeat the ADF alignment steps until the position on the page of the Quick Test copy closely matches the original Touch Back Touch Exit Configuration Storing supplies Choose a cool clean storage area for the printer supplies Store supplies right side up in their original packing until you are ready to use them Do not expose supplies to Direct sunlight Temperatures above 35 C 95 F High humidity above 80 Salty air Corrosive gases Heavy dust Maintaining the printer 236 Checking the status of supplies A message appears on the display when a replacement supply item is needed or when maintenance is required Checking the status of supplies from the printer control panel 1 Make sure the printer is on and Ready appears 2 On the home screen touch Status Supplies Note If Status Supplies is not on the home screen then print a menu settings page to review the status of the supplies Checking the status of supplies from a network computer Note The computer must be connected to the same network as the printer 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser Note If
201. ies or touch Manual Feeder and then place transparencies in the multipurpose feeder 6 Touch the desired size of the transparencies and then touch Continue 7 Touch the arrows until Transparency appears copying 93 8 Touch Transparency and then touch Continue 9 Touch Copy It Copying to letterhead 1 Loadan original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides On the home screen touch Copy Touch Copy from and then identify the size of the original document Uu B W N Touch Copy to and then touch Manual Feeder and place letterhead face up top edge first in the multipurpose feeder Touch the desired size of the letterhead and then touch Continue Touch the arrows until Let terhead appears Touch Letterhead and then touch Continue o0 0 M A Touch Copy It Customizing copy settings Copying from one size to another 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 If you are loading a document into th
202. ify the setting 1 Open a Web browser 2 In the address bar type the network printer or print server IP address and then press Enter 3 Click Configuration 4 Click Print Settings 5 Click Setup Menu 6 From the Printer Usage list select Max Speed or Max Yield 7 Click Submit Canceling a print job Canceling a print job from the printer control panel 1 Touch Cancel Jobs on the touch screen or press Q on the keypad 2 Touch the job you want to cancel Printing 90 3 Touch Delete Selected Jobs Canceling a print job from the computer To cancel a print job do one of the following For Windows users 1 Click or click Start and then click Run 2 Inthe Start Search or Run box type control printers 3 Press Enter or click OK The printer folder opens 4 Double click the printer icon 5 Select the job to cancel 6 From the keyboard press Delete From the Windows taskbar When you send a job to print a small printer icon appears in the right corner of the taskbar 1 Double click the printer icon A list of print jobs appears in the printer window 2 Select a job to cancel 3 From the keyboard press Delete For Macintosh users In Mac OS X version 10 5 or later 1 From the Apple menu choose System Preferences 2 Click Print amp Fax and then double click the printer icon 3 From the printer window select the job to cancel 4 From the icon bar at the top of the window click the Delete icon In Mac
203. ile is created containing all the pages or multiple TIFF files are created with one file for each page of the job Notes Onisthe factory default setting This menu item applies to all scan functions Scan Bit Depth 8 bit 1 bit Enables the Text Photo mode to have smaller file sizes by using 1 bit images when Color is set to Off Note 8 bit is the factory default setting Base File Name Lets you enter a base file name Note There is an image limitation of 53 characters Custom Job Scanning Lets you copy a document that contains mixed paper sizes into a single job On Note Off is the factory default setting Off Scan Preview Specifies whether a preview will appear on the display for scan jobs On Note Off is the factory default setting Off Background Removal Adjusts the amount of background visible on a copy 4to 4 Note 0 is the factory default setting Understanding printer menus 210 Menu item Color Dropout Color Dropout None Red Green Blue Default Red Threshold 0 255 Default Green Threshold 0 255 Default Blue Threshold 0 255 Description Specifies which color to drop during scanning and how much to increase or decrease the dropout Notes None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout 128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold Contrast 0 5 Best for content Specifies the contrast of the output Note Best for content
204. ing View Login Name Lets you view the assigned NetWare login name Note This can be changed only from the Embedded Web Server Print Mode Lets you view the assigned NetWare print mode Note This can be changed only from the Embedded Web Server Network Number Lets you view the assigned NetWare network number Note This can be changed only from the Embedded Web Server Select SAP Frames Enables the Ethernet frame type setting Ethernet 802 2 Note On is the factory default setting for all menu items Ethernet 802 3 Ethernet Type Il Ethernet SNAP Packet Burst Reduces network traffic by allowing the transfer and acknowledgement of Yes multiple data packets to and from the NetWare server No Note Yes is the factory default setting Understanding printer menus 166 Description NSQ GSQ Mode Specifies the NSQ GSQ Mode setting Yes Note Yes is the factory default setting No LexLink menu This menu is available from the Network Ports menu Network Ports gt Standard Network or Network x gt Std Network Setup or Net x Setup gt LexLink menu Activate Activates LexLink support On Note Off is the factory default setting Off View Nickname Lets you view the assigned LexLink nickname Note The LexLink nickname can be changed only from the Embedded Web Server Standard USB and USB x menus Menu item Description PCL SmartSwitch Sets the printer to automaticall
205. ing Load the appropriate paper or other specialty media in the proper tray Touch Continue to clear the message and print the job using a different paper tray Check tray length and width guides and make sure the paper is properly loaded in the tray Checkthe Print Properties or Print dialog settings to make sure the print job is requesting the correct paper size and type e Check that the paper size is correctly set For example if the MP Feeder Size is set to Universal make sure the paper is large enough for the data being printed Cancel the current print job 35 Insufficient memory to support Resource Save feature Try one or more of the following Touch Continue to disable Resource Save and continue printing Toenable Resource Save after receiving this message make sure the link buffers are set to Auto and then exit the menus to activate the link buffer changes When Ready appears enable Resource Save Install additional memory 37 Insufficient memory to collate job Try one or more of the following Touch Continue to print the portion of the job already stored and begin collating the rest of the print job Cancel the current print job 37 Insufficient memory some Held Jobs were deleted The printer deleted some held jobs in order to process current jobs Touch Continue to clear the message 38 Memory full Try one or more of the following Touch Continue to clear the message Cancelthe curre
206. ing 280 Jobs do not print These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following MAKE SURE THE PRINTER IS READY TO PRINT Make sure Ready or Power Saver appears on the display before sending a job to print CHECK TO SEE IF THE STANDARD EXIT BIN IS FULL Remove the stack of paper from the standard exit bin CHECK TO SEE IF THE PAPER TRAY IS EMPTY Load paper in the tray MAKE SURE THE CORRECT PRINTER SOFTWARE IS INSTALLED Verify that you are using the correct printer software f you are using a USB port make sure you are running a supported operating system and using compatible printer software MAKE SURE THE INTERNAL PRINT SERVER IS INSTALLED PROPERLY AND WORKING Make sure the internal print server is properly installed and that the printer is connected to the network For more information about installing a network printer click View User s Guide and Documentation on the Software and Documentation CD Printanetwork setup page and check that the status shows Connected If the status is Not Connected check the network cables and then try printing the network setup page again Contact your system support person to make sure the network is functioning correctly Copies of the printer software are also available on the Lexmark Web site at www lexmark com MAKE SURE YOU ARE USING A RECOMMENDED PRINTER CABLE For more information visit the Lexmark Web site at www lexmark com MAKE SURE PRINTER CABLES ARE S
207. ing 293 font sample list printing 89 forwarding faxes 134 FTP address book 137 FTP quality improving 140 FTP screen advanced options 139 options 138 139 FTP Settings menu 205 fuser or transfer module ordering 238 G General Settings menu 178 H hard disk with adapter troubleshooting 293 held jobs 85 printing from Macintosh computer 86 printing from Windows 85 Help menu 228 holding faxes 134 home screen buttons 17 HTML menu 225 Image menu 226 indicator light is blinking troubleshooting 256 indicator light blinking 43 information finding 9 installation wireless network 47 49 Index 333 installing options in driver 45 printer software 45 installing printer software adding options 45 internal print server troubleshooting 293 Internal Solutions Port installing 29 troubleshooting 293 Internal Solutions Port network changing port settings 54 IPv6 menu 164 J jam messages clearing instructions locating 267 jams avoiding 266 jams clearing 200 268 200 201 269 201 270 202 272 203 274 230 275 24x 276 250 278 290 294 230 279 job interrupt 100 L labels paper tips 84 letterhead copying to 94 loading 2000 sheet tray 71 tips on using 82 LexLink menu 167 light standard exit bin 62 light indicator 16 linking trays 74 Load lt src gt with lt x gt 258 Load manual feeder with lt x gt 259 loading 2000 sheet tray 71 envelopes 68 letterhead in 2000 sheet tray 71 multipur
208. ing a third party standalone viewer 7 Touch E mail It Note If you selected Encrypted PDF then enter your password twice Canceling an e mail When using the ADF touch Cancel Job while Scanning appears When using the scanner glass touch Cancel Job while Scanning appears or while Scan the Next Page Finish the Job appears Understanding e mail options Original Size This option opens a screen where you can choose the size of the documents you are going to e mail Touch a paper size button to select that size as the Original Size setting The e mail screen appears with your new setting displayed When Original Size is set to Mixed Letter Legal you can scan an original document that contains mixed paper sizes When Original Size is set to Auto Size Sense the scanner automatically determines the size of the original document Sides Duplex This option informs the printer if the original document is simplex printed on one side or duplex printed on both sides This lets the scanner know what needs to be scanned for inclusion in the e mail Orientation This option tells the printer whether the original document is in portrait or landscape orientation and then changes the Sides and Binding settings to match the original document orientation Binding Tells the printer whether the original document is bound on the long edge or short edge side E mail Subject This option lets you enter a subject line f
209. instead of Custom Type lt x gt To change a Custom Type lt x gt name from the Embedded Web Server 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser Note If you do not know the IP address of the printer then print a network setup page and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section Click Settings Under Default Settings click Paper Menu Click Custom Names Uu A A W N Type a name for the paper type in a Custom Name lt x gt box Note This custom name will replace a custom type lt x gt name under the Custom Types and Paper Size Type menus 6 Click Submit 7 Click Custom Types Custom Types appears followed by your custom name 8 Select a Paper Type setting from the list next to your custom name 9 Click Submit Loading paper and specialty media 75 Paper and specialty media guidelines Paper guidelines Paper characteristics The following paper characteristics affect print quality and reliability Consider these characteristics when evaluating new paper stock Weight The printer can automatically feed paper weights from 60 to 220 g m 16 to 58 Ib bond grain long Paper lighter than 60 g m 16 Ib might not be stiff enough to feed properly causing jams For best performance use 75 g m 20 Ib bond grain long paper For paper smaller than 182 x 257 mm 7 2 x 10 1 in we recommend 90 g m 24 Ib or heavier paper Note Duplex is supported only for 63 g m 170 g m 17 Ib 4
210. inter and the host computer print server option or other network device All options are properly installed The printer driver settings are correct Once you have checked each of these possibilities turn the printer off wait for about 10 seconds and then turn the printer back on This often fixes the problem Troubleshooting 256 Understanding printer messages Change src to x src is a tray or feeder and x is a paper size or type You can change the current paper source for the remainder of the print job The formatted page will print on the paper loaded in the selected tray This may cause clipping of text or images Try one or more of the following Select the paper tray with the correct paper size or type Touch Use current src to ignore the message and print from the tray selected for the print job Touch Continue to continue the job if the correct size and type are loaded in the tray and this size and type are specified in the printer control panel Paper menu Note If you touch Continue when there is no paper in the tray the job is not continued Touch Cancel job to cancel the current job Check tray x connection Try one or more of the following Turn the printer off and then back on If the error occurs a second time 1 Turn the printer off 2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet 3 Remove the tray 4 Reattach the tray 5 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded outlet
211. inter hard disk is preserved such as downloaded fonts macros and held jobs Both manual and scheduled wiping allow the file system to reuse marked disk space without first having to wipe it Notes This menu item appears only if a formatted non defective printer hard disk is installed Single pass is the default setting Highly confidential information should be wiped using the Multiple Pass method only Disk Wiping erases only print job data that is not currently in use by the file system from the printer hard disk All permanent data on the printer hard disk is preserved such as downloaded fonts macros and held jobs Both manual and scheduled wiping allow the file system to reuse marked disk space without first having to wipe it Notes This menu item appears only if a formatted non defective printer hard disk is installed Single pass is the default setting Highly confidential information should be wiped using the Multiple Pass method only Scheduled wipes are initiated without displaying a user warning or Security Audit Log m Export Log confirmation message enu Menu item Description Enables an authorized user to export the security log Notes To export the log from the printer control panel a flash drive must be attached to the printer From the Embedded Web Server the log can be downloaded to a computer Understanding printer menus 176 Menu item De
212. inting on the front of the page Short Edge Notes Long Edge is the factory default setting Long Edge specifies that binding be placed on the left edge of portrait pages and the top edge of landscape pages Short Edge specifies that binding be placed on the top edge of portrait pages and the left edge of landscape pages Copies Specifies a default number of copies for each print job 1 999 Note 1 is the factory default setting Blank Pages Specifies whether blank pages are inserted in a print job Do Not Print Note Do Not Print is the factory default setting Print Understanding printer menus 215 Menu item Collate Off 1 1 1 2 2 2 On 1 2 1 2 1 2 Description Stacks the pages of a print job in sequence when printing multiple copies Notes e Off is the factory default setting No pages will be collated The On setting stacks the print job sequentially Both settings print the entire job the number of times specified by the Copies menu setting Separator Sheets None Between Copies Between Jobs Between Pages Specifies whether blank separator sheets are inserted Notes None is the factory default setting Between Copies inserts a blank sheet between each copy of a print job if Collation is set to On If Collation is set to Off a blank page is inserted between each set of printed pages such as after all page 1 s and after all page 2 s Between Jobs inserts a blank sheet between print jobs
213. ions Disable this feature before sending or receiving a fax Call your telephone company to obtain the keypad sequence for temporarily disabling Call Waiting Voice MAIL SERVICE MAY BE INTERFERING WITH THE FAX TRANSMISSION Voice Mail offered through your local telephone company may disrupt fax transmissions To enable both Voice Mail and the printer to answer calls you may want to consider adding a second telephone line for the printer THE PRINTER MEMORY MAY BE FULL 1 Dial the fax number 2 Scanthe original document one page at a time Can send but not receive faxes These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following CHECK TO SEE IF THE PAPER TRAY IS EMPTY Load paper in the tray CHECK THE RING COUNT DELAY SETTINGS The ring count delay sets the number of times the phone line rings before the printer answers If you have extension phones on the same line as the printer or subscribe to the telephone company s Distinctive Ring service then keep the Ring Delay setting at 4 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser Note If you do not know the IP address of the printer then print a network setup page and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Click Settings 3 Click Fax Settings 4 Click Analog Fax Setup 5 Inthe Rings to Answer box enter the number of times you want the phone to ring before answering 6 Click Submit Troubleshooting 290 THE TONER MAY BE LOW
214. ions or user preference In these instances adjust the Color Balance setting to create a more preferable color Color Balance provides the user with the ability to make subtle adjustments to the amount of toner being used in each color plane Selecting positive or negative values for cyan magenta yellow and black from the Color Balance menu will slightly increase or decrease the amount of toner used for the chosen color For example if a printed page has a red tint then decreasing both magenta and yellow could potentially improve the color balance Troubleshooting 508 My color transparencies seem dark when they are projected Is there anything can do to improve the color This problem most commonly occurs when projecting transparencies with reflective overhead projectors To obtain the highest projected color quality transmissive overhead projectors are recommended If a reflective projector must be used then adjusting the Toner Darkness setting to 1 2 or 3 will lighten the transparency Make sure to print on the recommended type of color transparencies What is manual color correction When manual color correction is enabled the printer employs user selected color conversion tables to process objects However Color Correction must be set to Manual or no user defined color conversion will be implemented Manual color correction settings are specific to the type of object being printed text graphics or images and how the color
215. ipient on the printer control panel each time you want to send a fax you can create a permanent fax destination and assign a shortcut number A shortcut can be created to a single fax number or a group of fax numbers 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser Note If you do not know the IP address of the printer then print a network setup page and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Click Settings 3 Click Manage Shortcuts Note A password may be required If you do not have an ID and password get one from your system support person 4 Click Fax Shortcut Setup 5 Typeaunique name for the shortcut and then enter the fax number To create a multiple number shortcut enter the fax numbers for the group Note Separate each fax number in the group with a semicolon Faxing 127 6 Assign a shortcut number If you enter a number that is already in use then you are prompted to select another number 7 Click Add Creating a fax destination shortcut using the touch screen 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 On the home screen touch Fax 4 Enter the fax number To cr
216. irectly to the Manual Fax function Memory Use Defines the allocation of non volatile memory between sending and receiving fax All receive jobs Mostly receive Notes Equal T M Mostly sent All receive specifies that all the memory is set to receive fax jobs All send Mostly receive specifies that most of the memory is set to receive fax jobs Equalis the factory default setting Equal splits the memory for sending and receiving fax jobs into equal amounts Mostly sent specifies that most of the memory is set to send fax jobs All send specifies that all the memory is set to send fax jobs Understanding printer menus 192 Cancel Faxes Menu item Description Specifies whether the printer may cancel fax jobs Allow Note If Cancel Faxes is not enabled it will not appear as an option Don t Allow Caller ID Specifies type of caller ID being used FSK Note FSK is the factory default setting DTMF Fax number masking Off Specifies the direction from which digits are masked in an outgoing fax number Note The number of characters masked is determined by the Digits to mask From left setting From right Digits to mask Specifies the number of digits to mask in an outgoing fax number 0 58 V Fax Send Settings Resolution Standard Fine Super Fine Ultra Fine Menu item Description Specifies quality in dots per inch dpi A higher resolution gives greater prin
217. is license agreement to any subsequent user of this printer The patented Lexmark toner cartridges and developer components inside are licensed subject to a restriction that they may be used only once Following their initial use you agree to return them only to Lexmark for recycling Lexmark toner cartridges are designed to stop working after Notices 326 a delivering a fixed amount of toner A variable amount of toner may remain in them when replacement is required Replacement toner cartridge s sold without these terms are available through www lexmark com may be refilled by you or a third party as the only cartridge alternative to be used with the licensed printer LEXMARK SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT This Software License Agreement Software License Agreement is a legal agreement between you either an individual or a single entity and Lexmark International Inc Lexmark that to the extent your Lexmark product or Software Program is not otherwise subject to a written software license agreement between you and Lexmark or its suppliers governs your use of any Software Program installed on or provided by Lexmark for use in connection with your Lexmark product The term Software Program includes machine readable instructions audio visual content such as images and recordings and associated media printed materials and electronic documentation whether incorporated into distributed with or for use with your Lexmark product 1 STA
218. it width 3 8 5 inches Notes 76 216 mm fthe width exceeds the maximum then the printer uses the maximum width allowed 8 5 inches is the US factory default setting Inches can be increased in 0 01 inch increments 216 mmis the international factory default setting Millimeters can be increased in 1 mm increments Understanding printer menus 157 Menu item Portrait Height 3 14 17 inches 76 360 mm Description Sets the portrait height Notes Ifthe height exceeds the maximum then the printer uses the maximum height allowed 14inches is the US factory default setting Inches can be increased in 0 01 inch increments e 356 mmis the international factory default setting Millimeters can be increased in 1 mm increments Feed Direction Short Edge Long Edge Specifies the feed direction Notes Short Edge is the factory default setting Long Edge appears only if the longest edge is shorter than the maximum width supported in the tray Reports menu Reports menu Note When you select a menu item from the Reports menu the indicated report prints Menu item Menu Settings Page Description Prints a report containing information about paper loaded into trays installed memory the total page count alarms timeouts the printer control panel language the TCP IP address the status of supplies the status of the network connection and other information Device Statisti
219. ity You must use either a printer stand or printer base if you are using a high capacity input tray a duplex unit and an input option or more than one input option If you purchased a multifunction printer MFP that scans copies and faxes you may need additional furniture For more information see www lexmark com multifunctionprinters 1 Unpack the optional tray and then remove all packing material Additional printer setup 40 Notes e f you are installing more than one optional tray the 2 000 sheet tray must always be installed as the first optional tray configuring from the bottom up Optional trays lock together when stacked Remove stacked trays one at a time from the top down 2 Place the tray in the location chosen for the printer 1 Optional 550 sheet tray or optional 550 sheet specialty media drawer Optional 2 000 sheet tray 3 Align the printer with the tray and then lower the printer into place Additional printer setup a Attaching cables Connect the printer to the computer using a USB cable or Ethernet cable 1 Open the access door by pulling it out to the right 2 Match the appropriate cable to the corresponding port as shown 1 EN USB port 2 Ehemetpor Additional printer setup 42 3 Close the access door being careful to neatly align the cable to the left Note You may choose to completely remove the access door and store it Disabling fa
220. ixture of text and graphics Text Photo mode is recommended for magazine articles business graphics and brochures When should use Printed Image mode Use Printed Image mode when copying halftone photographs graphics such as documents printed on a laser printer or pages from a magazine or newspaper When should use Photograph mode Use Photograph mode when the original document is a high quality photograph or inkjet print V Copying 104 E mailing ADF Scanner glass Use the ADF for multiple page documents Use the scanner glass for single pages small items such as postcards or photos transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings M P i You can use the printer to e mail scanned documents to one or more recipients There are three ways to send an e mail from the printer You can type the e mail address use a shortcut number or use the address book Getting ready to e mail Setting up the e mail function Fore mail to operate it must be turned on in the printer configuration and have a valid IP address or gateway address To set up the e mail function 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser Note If you do not know the IP address of the printer then print a network setup page and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section Click Settings Under Default Settings click E mail FTP Settings Click E mail Settings
221. izes that are 76 2x 127 mm X X X vV v close to standard 3 x 5 in to media sizes 215 9 x 355 6 mm 8 5 x 14 in 76 2 x 127 mm X X X X 3x5 in to 215 9 x 914 4 mm 8 5 x 36 in 76 2 x 127 mm X X X X 3x 5 in to 215 9x 1219 2 mm 8 5 x 48 in Note Turn Size 73 4Envelope 984x 190 5 mm X X X vV Monarch 3 875 x 7 5 in 9 Envelope 98 4 x 226 1 mm X X X JV vV 3 875 x 8 9 in Com 10 104 8 x 241 3mm X X X vV vV Envelope 4 12 x 9 5 in DL Envelope 110 x 220 mm X X X V V 4 33 x 8 66 in C5 Envelope 162 x 229 mm X X X vV 6 38 x 9 01 in B5 Envelope 176 x 250 mm X X X vV vV 6 93 x 9 84 in Other Envelope 85 7x 165 mmto X X X vV vV 215 9 x 355 6 mm 3 375 x 6 50 in to 8 5 x 14 in This size setting formats the envelope for 215 9 x 355 6 mm 8 5 x 14 in unless the size is specified by the software program Paper and specialty media guidelines 80 Supported paper types and weights The printer engine supports 60 220 g m 16 58 Ib paper weights Note Labels transparencies envelopes and card stock always print at reduced speed Paper type Standard Optional Optional Multipurpose Optional 550 sheettray 550 sheettray 2 000 sheet tray tray 550 sheet Tray 1 specialty media drawer Paper v v v v v e Plain Bond Colored Custom Type x Letterhead Preprinted Light Glossy Heavy Heavy Glossy Rough
222. keypad to enter the number of copies The copy screen appears 4 Change the copy settings as needed 5 Touch Copy It Copying 92 Copying using the scanner glass 1 2 Place an original document facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner On the home screen touch Copy or use the keypad to enter the number of copies The copy screen appears 3 Change the copy settings as needed 4 Touch Copy It 5 f you have more pages to scan then place the next document on the scanner glass and then touch Scan the Next Page Touch Finish the Job to return to the home screen Copying photos on AO Ui A W N Place a photo facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner On the home screen touch Copy Touch Options Touch Content Touch Photograph Touch Done Touch Copy It Touch Scan the Next Page or Finish the Job Copying on specialty media Making transparencies 1 Uu A A W N Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides On the home screen touch Copy Touch Copy from and then identify the size of the original document Touch Copy to and then touch the tray that contains transparenc
223. lain Paper is the factory default setting for Tray 1 Custom Type x is the factory default setting for all other trays e favailable a user defined name will appear instead of Custom Type x Use this menu item to configure automatic tray linking MP Feeder Size Specifies the paper size loaded in the multipurpose tray A4 A5 A6 From the Paper menu Configure MP Feeder must be set to Cassette for JIS B5 MP Feeder to appear as a menu setting Letter Legal Executive Oficio M xico Folio Statement Universal 7 3 4 Envelope 9 Envelope 10 Envelope DL Envelope C5 Envelope B5 Envelope Other Envelope Notes Letter is the US factory default setting A4 is the international factory default setting Note Only installed trays are listed in this menu Understanding printer menus 148 Menu item MP Feeder Type Plain Paper Card Stock Transparency Recycled Labels Vinyl Labels Bond Envelope Rough Envelope Letterhead Preprinted Colored Paper Light Paper Heavy Paper Rough Cotton Paper Custom Type lt x gt Description Specifies the type of paper loaded in the multipurpose tray Notes From the Paper menu Configure MP Feeder must be set to Cassette for MP Feeder to appear as a menu setting Plain paper is the factory default setting Manual Paper Size A4 A5 JIS B5 Letter Legal Executive Oficio M xico Folio Statement Universal Specifies the size of the paper bei
224. lect a setting Touch Submit on O Ui A W N Touch A Setting the standard exit bin light To save energy you can dim or turn off the output lighting for the standard exit bin Available settings are Off Dim and Bright The factory default setting for Normal Standby Mode is Bright The factory default setting for Power Saver is Dim Using the Embedded Web Server 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser Note If you do not know the IP address of the printer then print a network setup page and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Click Settings and then click General Settings 3 Click Output Lighting 4 FromtheNormal Standby Mode list select the light setting the standard exit bin will use when in Ready or Standby mode Minimizing your printer s environmental impact 62 5 From the Power Saver list select the light setting the standard exit bin will use when in Power Saver mode Note For more information on Power Saver mode see Adjusting Power Saver on page 61 6 Click Submit Using the printer control panel Make sure the printer is on and Ready appears On the home screen touch Touch Settings and then touch General Settings 1 2 3 4 Touch the down arrow until Output Lighting appears 5 Touch Output Lighting 6 Touch the arrow button next to Normal Standby Mode to select the light settings the standard exit bin will use when in Ready or Standby mode
225. led on any line which receives metering pulses in Switzerland The Lexmark filter must be used as metering pulses are present on all analog telephone lines in Switzerland Utilisation de ce produit en Suisse Cet appareil n cessite l utilisation d un filtre de tonalit de facturation suisse n de r f rence Lexmark 14B5109 ou 80D1877 devant tre install surtoute ligne recevant des impulsions de comptage en Suisse Ce filtre doit tre utilis pour toute installation car ces impulsions existent sur toutes les lignes t l phoniques suisses Verwendung dieses Produkts in der Schweiz F r dieses Produkt muss ein schweizerischer Billing Tone Filter zur Z hlzeichen bertragung Lexmark Teilenummer 14B5109 oder 80D1877 f r jede Leitung installiert werden ber die in der Schweiz Zeitsteuertakte bertragen werden Die Verwendung des Lexmark Filters ist obligatorisch da in allen analogen Telefonleitungen in der Schweiz Zeitsteuertakte vorhanden sind Uso del prodotto in Svizzera Questo prodotto richiede un filtro toni Billing svizzero codice Lexmark 14B5109 o 80D1877 da installare su tutte le linee che ricevono impulsi remoti in Svizzera E necessario utilizzare il filtro Lexmark poich gli impulsi remoti sono presenti su tutte le linee analogiche in Svizzera Notice to Users in the European Union Products bearing the CE mark are in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council directives 2004 108 EC 2006 95 EC and
226. lete Log Delete now Do not delete Description Specifies whether audit logs are deleted Note Delete Now is the factory default setting Configure Log Enable Audit Enable Remote Syslog Remote Syslog Facility Severity of events to log Set Date Time menu Menu item View Date Time Specifies whether and how the audit logs are created Note Factory default settings enable the security audit log Description Lets you view the current date and time settings for the printer Set Date Time lt input date time gt Note Date Time is set in YYYY MM DD HH MM format Time Zone Note GMT is the factory default setting lt list of time zones gt Observe DST Note On is the factory default setting and uses the applicable Daylight Saving Time On associated with the Time Zone setting Off Enable NTP Enables Network Time Protocol which synchronizes the clocks of devices on a On network Off Note On is the factory default setting Understanding printer menus 177 Settings menu General Settings menu Menu item Description Display Language Sets the language of the text appearing on the display English Note All languages may not be available for all printers Francais Deutsch Italiano Espanol Dansk Norsk Nederlands Svenska Portuguese Suomi Russian Polski Magyar Turkce Cesky Simplified Chinese Traditional Chinese Korean Japanese Eco Mode Minimizes the use of energy pape
227. lick Run 2 Inthe Start Search or Run box type D setup exe where Dis the letter of your CD or DVD drive Click Install Printer and Software Click Agree to accept the Printer Software License Agreement Click Custom Make sure Select Components is selected and then click Next Make sure Local is selected and then click Next Select the manufacturer of the printer from the menu Select the printer model from the menu and then click Add Printer Click the beside the printer model under Select Components Make sure thecorrect port is available under Select Components Thisis the port where the serial cable attaches to the computer If the correct port is not available select the port under the Select Port menu and then click Add Port Make any configuration changes necessary in the Add a New Port window Click Add Port to finish adding the port Make sure the box next to the selected printer model is checked Select any other optional software you want to install and then click Next Click Finish to complete the printer software installation 3 Setthe COM port parameters After the printer driver is installed you must set the serial parameters in the communications COM port assigned to the printer driver Additional printer setup 56 The serial parameters in the COM port must match the serial parameters you set in the printer a Open the Device Manager 1 Click or click Start and then click Run 2 Inthe Start
228. ll outgoing faxes 6 Click inside the Station Number box and then enter the printer fax number 7 Click Submit Choosing a fax connection You can connect the printer with equipment such as a telephone an answering machine or a computer modem To determine the best way to set up the printer see the following table Notes The printer is an analog device that works best when directly connected to the wall outlet Other devices such as a telephone or answering machine can be successfully attached to pass through the printer as described in the setup steps e Ifyou want a digital connection such as ISDN DSL or ADSL a third party device such as a DSL filter is required Contact your DSL provider for a DSL filter The DSL filter removes the digital signal on the telephone line that can interfere with the ability of the printer to fax properly You do not need to attach the printer to a computer but you do need to connect it to an analog telephone line to send and receive faxes Equipment and service options Fax connection setup Connect directly to the telephone line See Connecting to an analog telephone line on page 115 Connect to a Digital Subscriber Line DSL or ADSL service See Connecting to a DSL service on page 115 Connect to a Private Branch eXchange PBX or Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN system See Connecting to a PBX or ISDN system on page 116 Use a
229. m Windows Note Confidential and Verify print jobs are automatically deleted from memory after they print Repeat and Reserve jobs continue to be held in the printer until you choose to delete them 1 With a document open click File Print 2 Click Properties Preferences Options or Setup 3 Click Other Options and then click Print and Hold 4 Select your job type Confidential Reserve Repeat or Verify and then assign a user name For a confidential job also enter a four digit PIN 5 Click OK or Print and then go to the printer to release the job 6 Onthe home screen touch Held jobs Printing 85 7 Touch your user name Note A maximum of 500 results can be displayed for held jobs If your name does not appear touch the down arrow until your name appears or touch Search Held Jobs if there are a large number of held jobs in the printer 8 Touch Confidential Jobs 9 Enter your PIN 10 Touch the job you want to print 11 Touch Print or touch the arrows to increase or decrease the number of copies and then touch Print Printing confidential and other held jobs from a Macintosh computer Note Confidential and Verify print jobs are automatically deleted from memory after they print Repeat and Reserve jobs continue to be held in the printer until you choose to delete them 1 With a document open choose File gt Print If necessary click the disclosure triangle to see more options 2 From the print options o
230. m the printer hard disk All permanent data on the printer hard disk is preserved such as downloaded fonts macros and held jobs Manual Wiping overwrites all disk space that has been used to hold data from a print job that has been processed i e printed This type of wipe does not erase any information related to an unprocessed print job Notes This menu item appears only if a formatted non defective printer hard disk is installed Do not start now is the default setting e f the Disk Wiping access control is activated then a user must successfully authenticate and have the required authorization in order to initiate the disk wipe Understanding printer menus 175 Menu item Automatic Method Single pass Multiple pass Description Disk Wiping erases only print job data that is not currently in use by the file system from the printer hard disk All permanent data on the printer hard disk is preserved such as downloaded fonts macros and held jobs Notes This menu item appears only if a formatted non defective printer hard disk is installed Single pass is the default setting Highly confidential information should be wiped using the Multiple pass method only Manual Method Single pass Multiple pass Scheduled Method Single pass Multiple pass Disk Wiping erases only print job data that is not currently in use by the file system from the printer hard disk All permanent data on the pr
231. me of the features provided in the Quality Menu can be used to solve typical color problems FAQ about color printing What is RGB color Red green and blue light can be added together in various amounts to produce a large range of colors observed in nature For example red and green can be combined to create yellow Televisions and computer monitors create colors in this manner RGB color is a method of describing colors by indicating the amount of red green or blue needed to produce a certain color What is CMYK color Cyan magenta yellow and black inks or toners can be printed in various amounts to produce a large range of colors observed in nature For example cyan and yellow can be combined to create green Printing presses inkjet printers and color laser printers create colors in this manner CMYK color is a method of describing colors by indicating the amount of cyan magenta yellow and black needed to reproduce a particular color How is color specified in a document to be printed Software programs typically specify document color using RGB or CMYK color combinations Additionally they allow users to modify the color of each object in a document For more information see the software program Help topics How does the printer know what color to print When a user prints a document information describing the type and color of each object is sent to the printer The color information is passed through color conversion ta
232. minimizing the impact of paper Using recycled paper is one way Eliminating excessive and unnecessary paper consumption is another Lexmark is well equipped to help customers minimize printing and copying waste In addition the company encourages purchasing paper from suppliers who demonstrate their commitment to sustainable forestry practices Lexmark does not endorse specific suppliers although a converter s productlistfor special applications is maintained However the following paper choice guidelines will help alleviate the environmental impact of printing 1 Minimize paper consumption 2 Be selective about the origin of wood fiber Buy from suppliers who carry certifications such as the Forestry Stewardship Council FSC or The Program for the Endorsement of Forest Certification PEFC These certifications guarantee that the paper manufacturer uses wood pulp from forestry operators that employ environmentally and socially responsible forest management and restoration practices 3 Choose the most appropriate paper for printing needs normal 75 or 80 g m certified paper lower weight paper or recycled paper Unacceptable paper examples Test results indicate that the following paper types are at risk for use with laser printers Chemically treated papers used to make copies without carbon paper also known as carbonless papers Preprinted papers with chemicals that may contaminate the paper Preprinted papers that can be affected by
233. most serial cables Off Notes e Off is the factory default setting The serial port uses DSR to distinguish data sent by the computer from data created by electrical noise in the serial cable The electrical noise can cause stray characters to print Select On to prevent stray characters from printing J Understanding printer menus 173 Security menu Miscellaneous menu Menu item Description Panel Logins Limits the number and time frames of failed login attempts from the printer control Login failures panel before all users are locked out Failure time frame Notes Lockout time D Login failures specifies the number of failed login attempts before users are Login timeout locked out Settings range from 1 50 3 attempts is the factory default setting Failuretimeframe specifiesthetime frame during which failed login attempts can be made before users are locked out Settings range from 1 60 minutes 5 minutes is the factory default setting Lockout time specifies how long users are locked out after exceeding the login failures limit Settings range from 0 60 minutes 5 minutes is the factory default setting 0 indicates the printer does not impose a lockout time Logintimeout specifieshow long the printerremains idle on the Home screen before automatically logging the user off Settings range from 1 900 seconds 300 seconds is the factory default setting Remote Logins Limits the number and time
234. mples sRGB Display sRGB Vivid Display True Black Vivid Off RGB US CMYK Euro CMYK Vivid CMYK Off CMYK Prints sample pages for each of the RGB and CMYK color conversion tables used in the printer Notes Selecting any setting prints the sample Color samples consist of a series of colored boxes along with the RGB or CMYK combination that creates the color observed These pages can be used to help decide which combinations to use to get the desired printed output From a browser window type the IP address of the printer to access a complete list of color sample pages from the Embedded Web Server Understanding printer menus 218 Menu item Description Manual Color Customizes the RGB color conversions RGB Image Notes Vivid sRGB Display sRGB Display is the factory default setting for RGB Image This applies a color i conversion table to an output that matches the colors displayed on a computer Display True Black Mm nitor RCR VINIA e sRGB Vivid is the factory default setting for RGB Text and RGB Graphics sRGB Vivid Off applies a color table that increases saturation This is preferred for business RGB Text graphics and text Vivid Vivid applies a color conversion table that produces brighter more saturated sRGB Display colors Display True Black Display True Black applies a color conversion table that uses only black toner for sRGB Vivid neutral gray colors Off Off turns off color conve
235. n is the factory default setting When set to Off the Save as Shortcut button does not appear on the e mail Destination screen Background Removal 4to 4 Adjusts the amount of background visible on a scanned image Note 0 is the factory default setting Color Dropout Color Dropout None Red Green Blue Default Red Threshold 0 255 Default Green Threshold 0 255 Default Blue Threshold 0 255 Specifies which color to drop during scanning and how much to increase or decrease the dropout Notes None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout 128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold Contrast 0 5 Best for content Specifies the contrast of the output Note Best for content is the factory default setting Mirror Image Creates a mirror image of the original document On Note Off is the factory default setting Off Negative Image Creates a negative image of the original document On Note Off is the factory default setting Off Shadow Detail Adjusts the amount of shadow detail visible on a scanned image 4to 4 Note 0 is the factory default setting Scan edge to edge On Specifies whether the original document is scanned edge to edge Note Off is the factory default setting Off Sharpness Adjusts the amount of sharpness on a scanned image 1 5 Note 3 is the factory default setting Use cc bcc Enables the use of the cc and bcc fields a Note Of
236. n the plastic tee Angle the ISP over the plastic tee and approach the plastic tee so that any overhanging connectors will pass through the ISP opening in the system board cage Additional printer setup 32 7 Lower the ISP toward the plastic tee until the ISP is seated between the guides of the plastic tee 8 Insert the long thumbscrew and turn it clockwise enough to hold the ISP in place but do not tighten the thumbscrew at this time Additional printer setup 33 9 Attach the two provided screws to secure the ISP mounting bracket to the system board cage 10 Tighten the long thumbscrew Warning Potential Damage Do not overtighten the thumbscrew 11 Insert the plug of the ISP interface cable into the receptacle of the system board Note The plugs and receptacles are color coded 12 Reattach the system board cover Additional printer setup 34 Installing a printer hard disk The optional printer hard disk can be installed with or without a Lexmark Internal Solutions Port ISP Note This task requires a flathead screwdriver CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD If you are installing an Internal Solutions Port ISP after setting up the printer then turn the printer off and unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before continuing Warning Potential Damage System board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity Touch something metal on the printer before
237. nd on radio equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment CEO Operation is allowed in all EU and EFTA countries but is restricted to indoor use only Compliance is indicated by the CE marking A declaration of conformity with the requirements of the directives is available from the Director of Manufacturing andTechnical Support Lexmark International S A Boigny France Refer to the table at the end of the Notices section for further compliance information Cesky Spole nost Lexmark International Inc t mto prohla uje Ze v robek tento v robek je ve shod se z kladn mi po adavky a dal mi p slu n mi ustanoven mi sm rnice 1999 5 ES Dansk Lexmark International Inc erkl rer herved at dette produkt overholder de v sentlige krav og vrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999 5 EF Deutsch Hiermit erkl rt Lexmark International Inc dass sich das Ger t dieses Ger t in bereinstimmung mit den grundlegenden Anforderungen und den brigen einschl gigen Bestimmungen der Richtlinie 1999 5 EG befindet EMAnvik ME THN MAPOYZA H LEXMARK INTERNATIONAL INC AHAONEI OTI AYTO TO MPO ON ZYMMOPOONETAI NPOZ TIZ OYZIOAEIZ ANAITHZEIZ KAI TIZ AOITIEX ZXETIKE2 AIATAZEI2 TH OAHTIAZ 1999 5 EK English Hereby Lexmark International Inc declares that this type of equipment is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999 5 EC Espanol Por medio de la prese
238. nd then open the lower front door Warning Potential Damage To avoid overexposing the photoconductors do not leave the front doors open for more than 10 minutes CAUTION HOT SURFACE The inside of the printer might be hot To reduce the risk of injury from a hot component allow the surface to cool before touching 2 Grasp the paper on each side and pull it forward 3 Closethe lower front door and then close the upper front door 4 Touch Continue Troubleshooting 272 Paper jam behind the fuser 1 Open the upper front door and then open the lower front door Warning Potential Damage To avoid overexposing the photoconductors do not leave the front doors open for more than 10 minutes CAUTION HOT SURFACE The inside of the printer might be hot To reduce the risk of injury from a hot component allow the surface to cool before touching 2 If the paper is jammed behind the fuser then remove the fuser Warning Potential Damage Do not touch the center of the fuser unit Doing so may cause your fingers to touch the roller underneath the fuser unit Touching the fuser roller will damage the fuser a Turn the screws on the fuser to the left to loosen them C Place the fuser on a flat surface 3 Pull the paper gently out of the printer or up toward the standard exit bin to remove it 4 Reinstall the fuser a Align the fuser unit using the handholds on each side and then place it back into the printer Troubles
239. nding print jobs that use another printer language Job Waiting Specifies that print jobs be removed from the print queue if they On require unavailable printer options or custom settings They are Off stored in a separate print queue so other jobs print normally When the missing information and or options are obtained the stored jobs print Notes Offis the factory default setting This menu appears only if a non Read Only printer hard disk is installed This requirement ensures that stored jobs are not deleted if the printer loses power Understanding printer menus 213 Menu item Description Print Area Sets the logical and physical printable area Normal Notes Whole Page e Normal is the factory default setting When attempting to print data in the non printable area defined by the Normal setting the printer clips the image at the boundary The Whole Page setting allows the image to be moved into the non printable area defined by the Normal setting but the printer will clip the image at the Normal setting boundary The Whole Page setting only affects pages printed using a PCL 5e interpreter This setting has no effect on pages printed using the PCL XL or PostScript interpreter Printer Usage Sets the printer for a faster print speed or a higher toner yield Max Yield Note Max Yield is the factory default Max Speed Black Only Mode Off On Sets the printer to print text and graphics using
240. ng device status 254 does not open 311 networking settings 254 setting up e mail alerts 254 Embedded Web Server Administrator s Guide 254 emission notices 314 317 321 322 enlarging a copy 96 envelopes loading 68 tips 83 environmental settings 58 brightness adjusting 62 Eco Mode 59 Power Saver 61 Quiet Mode 60 standard exit bin lighting 62 Ethernet networking Macintosh 51 Windows 51 Ethernet port 42 Index 532 exterior of the printer cleaning 229 e mail canceling 109 disabling 43 256 enabling 43 256 notice of low supply level 254 notice of paper jam 254 notice of paper needed 254 notice that different paper is needed 254 e mail function setting up 105 e mail screen advanced options 110 options 109 110 E mail Settings menu 200 e mailing adding message line 108 adding subject line 108 changing output file type 108 configuring the e mail settings 106 creating shortcuts using the Embedded Web Server 106 creating shortcuts using the touch screen 106 setting up e mail function 105 using shortcut numbers 107 using the address book 107 using the touch screen 107 F factory defaults restoring printer control panel menus 255 FAQ about color printing 308 fax disabling 43 256 enabling 43 256 fax connection connecting the printer to the wall jack 115 connecting to a DSL line 115 connecting to a PBX or ISDN 116 fax connections answering machine 117 computer modem 124 distinctive ring service 116 regional a
241. ng manually loaded Note Letter is the US factory default setting A4 is the international factory default setting Manual Paper Type Plain Paper Card Stock Transparency Recycled Labels Vinyl Labels Bond Letterhead Preprinted Colored Paper Light Paper Heavy Paper Rough Cotton Paper Custom Type x Specifies the type of paper being manually loaded Note Plain paper is the factory default setting Note Only installed trays are listed in this menu Understanding printer menus 149 Menu item Manual Envelope Size 7 3 4 Envelope 9 Envelope 10 Envelope DL Envelope C5 Envelope B5 Envelope Other Envelope Description Specifies the size of the envelope being manually loaded Note 10 Envelope is the US factory default setting DL Envelope is the international factory default setting Manual Envelope Type Envelope Rough Envelope Custom Type lt x gt Specifies the type of envelope being manually loaded Note Envelope is the factory default setting Note Only installed trays are listed in this menu Configure MP menu Menu item Configure MP Cassette Manual Substitute Size menu Substitute Size Off Statement A5 Letter A4 All Listed Ya Description Determines when the printer selects paper from the multipurpose feeder Notes Cassette is the factory default setting The Cassette setting configures the multipurpose feeder as an autom
242. nly from the printer Embedded Web Server Forward to Shortcut Lets you enter the shortcut number which matches the recipient type Fax E mail FPT LDSS or eSF Block No Name Fax On Off Enables blocking of incoming faxes sent from devices with no station ID specified Banned Fax List Holding Faxes Held Fax Mode Off Always On Manual Scheduled Fax Holding Schedule Fax Log Settings Transmission Log Print log Do not print log Print only for error Enables the list of banned fax numbers stored in the printer Enables fax holding all of the time or according to a set schedule Note Off is the factory default setting Menu item Description Enables printing of a transmission log after each fax job Receive Error Log Print Never Print on Error Enables printing of a receive error log following a receive error Auto Print Logs On Off Enables automatic printing of fax logs Note Logs print after every 200 jobs Understanding printer menus 197 Log Paper Source Tray lt x gt Manual Feeder Menu item Description Selects the source of the paper used for printing logs Logs Display Remote Station Name Dialed Number Specifies whether printed logs display the dialed number or the station name returned Enable Job Log On Off Enables access to the Fax Job log Enable Call Log On Off Enables access to the Fax Call log Log Output Bin Standard Bin
243. nnected the LAN drop may not be active or the network cable may be malfunctioning Consult a system support person for a solution and then print another network setup page Additional printer setup 44 Setting up the printer software Installing printer software A printer driver is software that lets the computer communicate with the printer The printer software is typically installed during the initial printer setup If you need to install the software after setup follow these instructions For Windows users 1 Close all open software programs 2 Insert the Software and Documentation CD 3 From the main installation dialog click Install 4 Follow the instructions on the screen For Macintosh users 1 Close all open software applications 2 Insert the Software and Documentation CD 3 From the Finder desktop double click the printer CD icon that automatically appears 4 Double click the Install icon 5 Follow the instructions on the screen Using the World Wide Web 1 Goto the Lexmark Web site at www lexmark com 2 From the Drivers amp Downloads menu click Driver Finder 3 Select your printer and then select your operating system 4 Download the driver and install the printer software Updating available options in the printer driver Once the printer software and any options are installed it may be necessary to manually add the options in the printer driver to make them available for print jobs For Windows
244. nplug the power cord from the wall outlet before continuing If you have any other devices attached to the printer then turn them off as well and unplug any cables going to the printer Warning Potential Damage System board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity Touch something metal on the printer before touching any system board electronic components or connectors 1 Accessthe system board Note This task requires a flathead screwdriver 2 Unpack the card Note Avoid touching the connection points along the edge of the card 3 Holding the card by its sides align the plastic pins on the card with the holes on the system board 1 1 Plastic pins Metal pins 4 Push the card firmly into place Additional printer setup 28 Notes The entire length of the connector on the card must touch and be flush against the system board Becareful not to damage the connectors 5 Reattach the system board cover Installing an Internal Solutions Port The system board supports one optional Lexmark Internal Solutions Port ISP Note This task requires a flathead screwdriver A CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD If you are installing an Internal Solutions Port ISP after setting up the printer then turn the printer off and unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before continuing Warning Potential Damage System board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity Touch som
245. ns Try one or more of the following CHECK THE PAPER TYPE SETTING Make sure the paper type setting matches the paper loaded in the tray 1 From the printer control panel check the Paper Type setting from the Paper menu 2 Before sending the job to print specify the correct type setting For Windows users specify the type from Print Properties For Macintosh users specify the type from the Print dialog THE PAPER HAS ABSORBED MOISTURE DUE TO HIGH HUMIDITY Load paper from a fresh package Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it Troubleshooting 500 Print irregularities These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following THE PAPER MAY HAVE ABSORBED MOISTURE DUE TO HIGH HUMIDITY Load paper from a fresh package CHECK THE PAPER TYPE SETTING Make sure the Paper Type and Paper Weight settings match the type of paper that you are using CHECK THE PAPER Avoid textured paper with rough finishes A TONER CARTRIDGE THE TRANSFER MODULE OR THE FUSER IS WORN OR DEFECTIVE Replace the toner cartridge the transfer module or the fuser Print is too dark N ABC DEF These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following CHECK THE DARKNESS BRIGHTNESS AND CONTRAST SETTINGS The Toner Darkness setting is too dark the RGB Brightness setting is too dark or the RGB Contrast setting is too high From the printer control panel change these settings from the Quality menu For Windo
246. nt is satisfactory CHECK THE DOCUMENT PLACEMENT Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner UNWANTED TONER IS IN THE BACKGROUND ncrease the background removal setting Adjustthe darkness to a lighter setting Troubleshooting 285 PATTERNS MOIRE APPEAR IN THE OUTPUT e On the Copy screen select the Text Photo or Printed Image icon Rotate the original document on the scanner glass On the Copy screen adjust the scale setting TEXT IS LIGHT OR DISAPPEARING On the Copy screen touch the Text icon Decrease the background removal setting Increase the contrast setting Decrease the shadow detail setting THE OUTPUT APPEARS WASHED OUT OR OVEREXPOSED On the Copy screen select the Printed Image icon Decrease the background removal setting Partial document or photo copies These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following CHECK THE DOCUMENT PLACEMENT Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner CHECK THE PAPER SIZE SETTING Make sure the paper size setting matches the paper loaded in the tray 1 From the printer control panel check the Paper Size setting from the Paper menu 2 Before sending the job to print specify the correct size setting For Windows users specify the size from Print Properties For Macintosh users specify the size from the Page Setup dialog Solving scann
247. nt print job Install additional printer memory Troubleshooting 260 39 Complex page some data may not have printed Try one or more of the following Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing Cancel the current print job Install additional printer memory 50 PPDS font error Try one or more of the following Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing The printer cannot find a requested font From the PPDS menu select Best Fit and then select On The printer will find a similar font and reformat the affected text Cancel the current print job 51 Defective flash detected Try one or more of the following Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing Cancelthe current print job 52 Not enough free space in flash memory for resources Try one or more of the following Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing Downloaded fonts and macros not previously stored in flash memory are deleted Delete fonts macros and other data stored in flash memory Upgrade to a larger capacity flash memory card 54 Network x software error x is the number of the network connection Try one or more of the following Touch Continue to continue printing Turn the printer off and then back on to reset the printer Upgrade flash the network firmware in the printer or print server 54 Standard network software error Try one or more of th
248. nte Lexmark International Inc declara que este producto cumple con los requisitos esenciales y cualesquiera otras disposiciones aplicables o exigibles de la Directiva 1999 5 CE Eesti K esolevaga kinnitab Lexmark International Inc et seade see toode vastab direktiivi 1999 5 EU p hin uetele ja nimetatud direktiivist tulenevatele muudele asjakohastele s tetele Suomi Lexmark International Inc vakuuttaa t ten ett t m tuote on direktiivin 1999 5 EY oleellisten vaatimusten ja muiden sit koskevien direktiivin ehtojen mukainen Fran ais Par la pr sente Lexmark International Inc d clare que l appareil ce produit est conforme aux exigences fondamentales et autres dispositions pertinentes de la directive 1999 5 CE Magyar Alul rott Lexmark International Inc nyilatkozom hogy a term k megfelel a vonatkoz alapvet k vetelm nyeknek s az 1999 5 EC ir nyelv egy b el r sainak Notices 323 slenska H r me l sir Lexmark International Inc yfir v a essi vara er samr mi vi grunnkr fur og a rar kr fur sem ger ar eru tilskipun 1999 5 EC Italiano Con la presente Lexmark International Inc dichiara che questo questo prodotto conforme ai requisiti essenziali ed alle altre disposizioni pertinenti stabilite dalla direttiva 1999 5 CE Latviski Ar o Lexmark International Inc deklar ka is izstr d jums atbilst Direkt vas 1999 5 E
249. nter prints a new copy of the page that jammed If Jam Recovery is set to Auto then the printer reprints the jammed page if enough printer memory is available Avoiding jams The following hints can help you avoid jams Paper tray recommendations Make sure the paper lies flat in the paper tray Do not remove the paper tray while the printer is printing e Donotload the paper tray while the printer is printing Load it prior to printing or wait for a prompt to load it Donotload too much paper Make sure the stack height does not exceed the indicated maximum height Troubleshooting 266 Make sure the guides in the paper tray or the manual feeder are properly positioned and are not pressing too tightly against the paper or envelopes Push the paper tray in firmly after loading paper Paper recommendations Use only recommended paper or specialty media Donotload wrinkled creased damp bent or curled paper Flex fan and straighten paper before loading it Do not use paper that has been cut or trimmed by hand Donot mix paper sizes weights or types in the same stack Make sure all sizes and types are set correctly in the printer control panel menus Store paper per the manufacturer s recommendations Understanding jam messages The following table lists the jam messages that can occur Message See 200 Paper jam check area name 200 paper jam on page 268 200 201 paper jams on page 2
250. ntered manually You can also press to delete an entire shortcut entry Once an entire line is deleted another press of causes the cursor to move up one line In the E mail Destination List press to delete the character to the left of the cursor If the character is in a shortcut then the shortcut is deleted 5 Home Press to return to the home screen a Learning about the printer 16 Item Description 6 Start Press K to initiate the current job indicated on the display From the home screen press QD to start a copy job with the default settings f pressed while a job is scanning the button has no effect 7 Indicator light Off The power is off Blinking green The printer is warming up processing data or printing Solid green The printer is on but idle Blinking red Operator intervention is needed 8 Stop Stops all printer activity x A list of options is offered once Stopped appears on the display 9 Front USB port nsert a USB flash drive to send data to the printer Insert a USB cable from a digital camera to print photos with a PictBridge enabled digital camera Understanding the home screen After the printer is turned on and a short warm up period occurs the display shows the following basic screen which is referred to as the home screen Use the home screen buttons to initiate an action such as copying faxing or scanning to open the menu screen or
251. nvelopes with the flap side up and the return address edge entering the printer first Warning Potential Damage Never use envelopes with stamps clasps snaps windows coated linings or self stick adhesives These envelopes may severely damage the printer 5 From the printer control panel set the Paper Size and Paper Type a eae 0 QA 9o Make sure the printer is on and Ready appears On the home screen touch ES Touch Paper Menu Touch Paper Size Type Touch the arrows for the desired tray until the correct size or type setting appears Touch Submit Touch A to return to the home screen Loading paper and specialty media 70 Loading the 2000 sheet tray 1 Pull the tray out 2 Pull up and slide the width guide to the correct position for the paper size being loaded 3 Unlock the length guide Loading paper and specialty media 71 4 Push the length guide release latch to raise the length guide slide the guide to the correct position for the paper size being loaded and then lock the guide 5 Flex the sheets back and forth to loosen them and then fan them Do not fold or crease the paper Straighten the edges on a level surface 6 Load the paper stack Print side faceup for single sided printing Print side facedown for duplex printing Loading paper and specialty media 72 Single sided printing Duplex two sided printing
252. obs that are resident in the printer Bookmarks jobs on flash drives and other types of held jobs are not affected Selecting Not Restored removes all Print and Hold jobs that were not restored from the disk Format Flash Yes No Formats the flash memory Flash memory refers to the memory added by installing a flash memory option card in the printer Warning Potential Damage Do not turn off the printer while the flash memory is formatting Notes Aflash memory option card must be installed in the printer and operating properly for this menu item to be available The flash memory option card must not be Read Write or Write protected Selecting Yes deletes all data stored in flash memory No cancels the format request Delete Downloads on Disk Removes downloads from the printer hard disk including all held Jobs buffered Delete Now jobs and parked jobs Job accounting information is not affected Do Not Delete Note Delete Now is the default setting Job Acct Stat Prints a list of all stored job statistics or deletes the information from the printer Print hard disk Clear Notes Aprinter hard disk must be installed in the printer and operating properly for this menu item to be available Selecting Print prints a list of statistics Clear deletes all job statistics stored on the printer hard disk TheClearselection will not appear if Job Accounting is set to MarkTrack using NPA Hex Trace Assists
253. odels Improving fax quality Question Tip When should use Text mode Use Text mode when text preservation is the main goal of the fax and preserving images copied from the original document is not a concern Text mode is recommended for faxing receipts carbon copy forms and documents that contain only text or fine line art When should I use Text Photo mode e Use Text Photo mode when faxing an original document that contains a mixture of text and graphics Text Photo mode is recommended for magazine articles business graphics and brochures M When should use Photo mode Use Photo mode when faxing photos printed on a laser printer or taken from a magazine or newspaper Faxing 133 Holding and forwarding faxes Holding faxes This option lets you hold received faxes from printing until they are released Held faxes can be released manually or at a scheduled day or time 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser Note If you do not know the IP address of the printer then print a network setup page and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section Click Settings Click Fax Settings Click Analog Fax Setup Click Holding Faxes Enter a password in the Print Faxes Password box Nn QO wu BF WN From the Held Fax Mode menu select one of the following Off AlwaysOn Manual Scheduled 8 If you selected Scheduled then continue with the
254. of the object is specified in the software program RGB or CMYK combinations Notes Manual color correction is not useful if the software program does not specify colors with RGB or CMYK combinations It is also not effective in situations in which the software program or the computer operating system controls the adjustment of colors e The color conversion tables applied to each object when Color Correction is set to Auto generate preferred colors for the majority of documents To manually apply a different color conversion table 1 From the Quality menu select Color Correction and then select Manual 2 From the Quality menu select Manual Color and then select the appropriate color conversion table for the affected object type Manual Color menu Object type Color conversion tables RGB Image Vivid Produces brighter more saturated colors and may be applied RGB Text to all incoming color formats RGB Graphics sRGB Display Produces an output that approximates the colors displayed on a computer monitor Black toner usage is optimized for printing photographs Display True Black Produces an output that approximates the colors displayed on a computer monitor Uses only black toner to create all levels of neutral gray sRGB Vivid Provides an increased color saturation for the sRGB Display color correction Black usage is optimized for printing business graphics Off No color correction is implemented
255. oftware and Documentation CD Installing the printer on a wireless network Windows Before you install the printer on a wireless network make sure that Your wireless network is set up and working properly The computer you are using is connected to the same wireless network where you want to set up the printer 1 Connect the power cable to the printer and then toa properly grounded electrical outlet and then turn the printer on Make sure the printer and computer are fully on and ready Additional printer setup 47 Nn OQ U A W Do not connect the USB cable until instructed to do so on the screen Insert the Software and Documentation CD Click Install Printer and Software Click Agree to agree to the License Agreement Click Suggested and then click Next Click Wireless Network Attach Temporarily connect a USB cable between the computer on the wireless network and the printer Note After the printer is configured the software will instruct you to disconnect the temporary USB cable so you can print wirelessly Follow the on screen instructions to complete the software installation Note Basic is the recommended path to choose Choose Advanced only if you want to customize your installation To allow other computers on the wireless network to use the wireless printer follow steps 2 through 6 and step 8 for each computer Additional printer setup 48 Installing the printer on a wireless netwo
256. ollate job 260 37 Insufficient memory some Held Jobs were deleted 260 38 Memory full 260 39 Complex page some data may not have printed 261 50 PPDS font error 261 51 Defective flash detected 261 52 Not enough free space in flash memory for resources 261 54 Network lt x gt software error 261 54 Standard network software error 261 55 Unsupported option in slot 262 550 sheet specialty media drawer installing 40 550 sheet tray installing 40 56 Parallel port lt x gt disabled 262 56 Serial port lt x gt disabled 262 56 Standard USB port disabled 262 58 Too many flash options installed 262 58 Too many trays attached 263 59 Incompatible tray lt x gt 263 61 Remove defective disk 263 62 Disk full 263 63 Unformatted disk 263 80 Fuser life warning 263 80 Replace fuser 264 82 Replace waste toner box 264 82 Waste toner box missing 264 83 Replace transfer module 264 83 transfer module life warning 264 83 Transfer module missing 264 84 lt color gt photoconductor low 264 84 lt color gt photoconductor nearly low 265 84 Replace lt color gt photoconductor 264 840 01 Scanner Disabled 265 840 02 Scanner Auto Disabled 265 88 lt color gt cartridge low 265 88 lt color gt cartridge nearly low 265 88 Replace lt color gt cartridge 265 900 999 Service lt message gt 266 Symbols scan to computer screen options 142 143 144 A Active NIC menu 160 address book fax using 129 ADF copying using 92 ADF parts
257. ombine one or more sets of original documents into a single copy job Each set may be scanned using different job parameters When a copy job is submitted and Custom Job is enabled the scanner scans the first set of original documents using the supplied parameters and then it scans the next set with the same or different parameters The definition of a set depends on the scan source e f you scan a document on the scanner glass a set consists of one page e f you scan multiple pages using the ADF a set consists of all scanned pages until the ADF becomes empty f you scan one page using the ADF a set consists of one page For example 1 Loadan original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides On the home screen touch Copy Touch Options Touch Custom Job Touch On Touch Done on AU AB WN Touch Copy It When the end of a set is reached the scan screen appears 9 Load the next document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass and then touch Scan the Automatic Document Feeder or Scan the flatbed Note If required change the job settings 10 If you have another document to scan load the next document f
258. ompany will provide advance notice in order for you to make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted service If you experience trouble with this equipment for repair or warranty information contact Lexmark International Inc at www lexmark com or your Lexmark representative If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone network the telephone company may request that you disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved This equipment contains no user serviceable parts For repair and warranty information contact Lexmark International Inc See the previous paragraph for contact information Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs Contact the state public utility commission public service commission or corporation commission for information If your home has specially wired alarm equipment connected to the telephone line ensure the installation of this equipment does not disable your alarm equipment If you have questions about what will disable alarm equipment consult your telephone company or a qualified installer Telephone companies report that electrical surges typically lightning transients are very destructive to customer terminal equipment connected to AC power sources This has been identified as a major nationwide problem It is recommended that the customer install an appropriate AC surge arrestor in the AC outlet to which this device is connected An appropriate AC surge arrestoris define
259. onductors ordering 237 photos copying 93 pick pad replacing 245 pick roller assembly replacing 245 PictBridge menu 227 PictBridge enabled printing photos 88 port settings configuring 54 PostScript menu 221 Power Saver adjusting 61 print job canceling from Macintosh 91 canceling from Windows 91 print quality cleaning the ADF parts 230 cleaning the printhead lenses 234 cleaning the scanner glass 230 replacing photoconductors 239 replacing the waste toner box 251 print quality test pages printing 89 print quality troubleshooting blank pages 296 characters have jagged edges 296 clipped images 298 color misregistration 297 fine horizontal lines 298 ghost images 298 gray background 299 light colored line white line or incorrectly colored line 300 poor transparency quality 307 print irregularities 301 print is too dark 301 print is too light 302 print quality test pages 295 repeating defects 303 skewed print 303 solid color pages 304 streaked horizontal lines 304 streaked vertical lines 305 toner fog or background shading 305 toner rubs off 306 toner specks 306 uneven print density 307 print troubleshooting error reading USB drive 280 held jobs do not print 282 incorrect characters print 283 incorrect margins 299 jammed page does not reprint 295 job prints from wrong tray 283 job prints on wrong paper 283 job takes longer than expected 282 jobs do not print 281 Large jobs do not collate 283 multiple language PD
260. onnect all cords and cables from the printer before moving it Use the handholds located on both sides and rear of the printer to lift it Make sure your fingers are not under the printer when you set it down Before setting up the printer make sure there is adequate clearance around it The printer and options can be safely moved to another location by following these precautions e Any cart used to move the printer must be able to support its weight and have a large enough surface to support the full footprint of the printer Keep the printer in an upright position Avoid severe jarring movements Shipping the printer When shipping the printer use the original packaging or call the place of purchase for a relocation kit Maintaining the printer 255 Administrative support Finding advanced networking and administrator information This chapter covers basic administrative support tasks For more advanced system support tasks see the Networking Guide on the Software and Documentation CD and the Embedded Web Server Administrator s Guide on the Lexmark Web site at www lexmark com Using the Embedded Web Server If the printer is installed on a network the Embedded Web Server is available for a range of functions including Viewing a virtual display of the printer control panel Checking the status of the printer supplies Configuring printer settings Configuring network settings Viewing reports To access the
261. or your e mail You can enter up to 255 characters E mailing 109 E mail File Name This option lets you customize the attachment file name E mail Message This option lets you enter a message that will be sent with your scanned attachment Resolution Adjusts the output quality of your e mail Increasing the image resolution increases the e mail file size and the time needed to scan your original document Image resolution can be decreased to reduce the e mail file size Send As This option sets the output PDF TIFF JPEG or XPS for the scanned image PDF Creates a single file with multiple pages viewable with Adobe Reader Adobe Reader is provided free by Adobe at www adobe com Secure PDF Creates an encrypted PDF file that protects the file contents from unauthorized access e TIFF Creates multiple files ora single file If Multi page TIFF is turned off in the Settings menu of the Embedded Web Server then TIFF saves one page in each file The file size is usually larger than an equivalent JPEG JPEG Creates and attaches a separate file for each page of your original document viewable by most Web browsers and graphics programs e XPS Creates a single XPS file with multiple pages viewable using an Internet Explorer hosted viewer and the NET Framework or by downloading a third party standalone viewer Content This option tells the printer the original document type Choose from Text Text Photo or Photo
262. oting hints and tips Frequently asked questions Documentation Driver downloads Live chat support E mail support Telephone support Find it here Lexmark Support Web site support lexmark com Note Select your region and then select your product to view the appropriate support site Support telephone numbers and hours of operation for yourregion or country can be found on the Support Web site or on the printed warranty that came with your printer Record the following information located on the store receipt and the back of the printer and have it ready when you contact support so that they may serve you faster Machine Type number Serial number Date purchased Store where purchased Warranty information Warranty information varies by country or region Inthe US See the Statement of Limited Warranty included with this printer or at support lexmark com Rest of the world See the printed warranty that came with your printer Selecting a location for the printer A trained personnel to lift it safely CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY The printer weight is greater than 18 kg 40 Ib and requires two or more When selecting a location for the printer leave enough room to open trays covers and doors If you plan to install any options leave enough room for them also It is important to Make sure airflow in the room meets the latest revision of the ASHRAE 62 standard Provide a fla
263. otograph Tells the scanner to pay extra attention to graphics and pictures This setting increases the time it takes to scan but emphasizes a reproduction of the full dynamic range of tones in the original document This increases the amount of information saved Color Sets the scan type and output for the fax Color documents can be scanned and sent to a fax destination Sides Duplex This option informs the printer if the original document is simplex printed on one side or duplex printed on both sides This lets the scanner know what needs to be scanned for inclusion in the fax Resolution This options increases how closely the scanner examines the document you want to fax If you are faxing a photo a drawing with fine lines or a document with very small text increase the Resolution setting This will increase the amount of time required for the scan and will increase the quality of the fax output e Standard Suitable for most documents Fine Recommended for documents with small print Super fine Recommended for original documents with fine detail Ultra fine Recommended for documents with pictures or photos Darkness This option adjusts how light or dark your faxes will turn out in relation to the original document Faxing 132 Advanced Options Touching this button opens a screen where you can change Delayed Send Advanced Imaging Custom Job Transmission Log Scan Preview Edge Erase and Advanced Duplex
264. ou specified or launched in the program you specified Scanning to a flash drive 1 Loadan original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 Insert the flash drive into the USB port on the front of the printer The Held Jobs screen appears 4 Touch Scan to USB drive 5 Select the scan settings 6 Touch Scan It Understanding scan profile options Quick Setup This option lets you select preset formats or customize the scan job settings You can select one of these settings Custom Photo Color JPEG Text BW PDF Photo Color TIFF Text BW TIFF Text Photo BW PDF Text Photo Color PDF M To customize the scan job settings from the Quick Setup menu select Custom Then change the scan settings as needed Scanning to a computer or flash drive 142 Format Type This option sets the output PDF JPEG TIFF SECURE PDF or XPS for the scanned image PDF Creates a single file with multiple pages viewable with Adobe Reader Adobe Reader is provided free by Adobe at www adobe com JPEG Creates and attaches a separate file for each page of your original document viewable by most Web browsers and graphi
265. ovides no assurance that any item will work correctly in all respects with another item of Notices 519 telepermitted equipment of a different make or model nor does it imply that any product is compatible with all of Telecom s network services This equipment shall not be set up to make automatic calls to the Telecom s 111 Emergency Service This equipment may not provide for the effective hand over of a call to another device connected to the same line This equipment should not be used under any circumstances that may constitute a nuisance to other Telecom customers Some parameters required for compliance with Telecom s telepermit requirements are dependent on the equipment associated with this device The associated equipment shall be set to operate within the following limits for compliance to Telecom s specifications There shall be no more than 10 call attempts to the same number within any 30 minute period for any single manual call initiation and e The equipment shall go on hook for a period of not less than 30 seconds between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the next call attempt The equipment shall be set to ensure that automatic calls to different numbers are spaced such that there is not less than 5 seconds between the end of one call attempt and the beginning of another Using this product in Switzerland This product requires a Swiss billing tone filter Lexmark part number 14B5109 or 80D1877 to be instal
266. ownloads visit www lexmark com If you don t have access to the Internet you can contact Lexmark by mail Lexmark International Inc Bldg 004 2 CSC 740 New Circle Road NW Lexington KY 40550 USA 2009 Lexmark International Inc All rights reserved Notices 312 UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT RIGHTS This software and any accompanying documentation provided under this agreement are commercial computer software and documentation developed exclusively at private expense Trademarks Lexmark Lexmark with diamond design MarkNet and MarkVision are trademarks of Lexmark International Inc registered in the United States and or other countries MarkTrack and PrintCryption are trademarks of Lexmark International Inc Mac and the Mac logo are trademarks of Apple Inc registered in the U S and other countries PCL is a registered trademark of the Hewlett Packard Company PCL is Hewlett Packard Company s designation of a set of printer commands language and functions included in its printer products This printer is intended to be compatible with the PCL language This means the printer recognizes PCL commands used in various application programs and that the printer emulates the functions corresponding to the commands The following terms are trademarks or registered trademarks of these companies Albertus The Monotype Corporation plc Antique Olive Monsieur Marcel OLIVE Apple Chancery Apple Computer Inc A
267. person 840 02 Scanner Auto Disabled The printer identified a problem with the scanner and automatically disabled it 1 Remove all pages from the ADF 2 Turn the printer off Troubleshooting 265 3 Wait 15 seconds and then turn the printer on Note If turning the printer off and then on again does not clear the message then contact your system support person 4 Place the document in the ADF and then adjust the paper guides 5 On the home screen touch Copy or use the keypad to enter the number of copies 6 Change the copy settings as needed 7 Touch Copy It 900 999 Service message 1 Turn the printer off 2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet 3 Checkall cable connections 4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded outlet 5 Turn the printer back on If the service message appears again contact Customer Support and report the message 1565 Emulation error load emulation option The printer automatically clears the message in 30 seconds and then disables the download emulator on the firmware card To fix this download the correct download emulator version from the Lexmark Web site at www lexmark com Clearing jams By carefully selecting paper and loading it properly you can avoid most jams If jams do occur follow the steps outlined in this section To clear a jam message and resume printing clear the entire paper path and then touch Continue If Jam Recovery is set to On then the pri
268. pings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides On the home screen touch Copy Touch Copy from and then touch Mixed Letter Legal Touch Copy to and then touch Letter Touch Copy It The scanner identifies the mixed paper sizes as they scan and then scales the legal size pages to print on letter size paper Copying on both sides of the paper duplexing 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 Ifyou are loading a document into the ADF adjust the paper guides 3 On the home screen touch Copy 4 From the Sides Duplex area touch the button that looks the way you want your copies duplexed The first number represents sides of the original documents the second number represents sides of the copy For example select 1 sided to 2 sided if you have 1 sided original documents and you want 2 sided copies Touch Copy It Reducing or enlarging copies Copies can be reduced to 25 of the original document size or enlarged to 400 of the original document size The factory default setting for Scale is Auto If you leave Scale set to Auto the content of your original document will be scaled to fit the size of the
269. pose feeder 68 transparencies 68 trays 66 lock security 15 Macintosh wireless network installation 49 maintenance counter resetting 241 max speed and max yield printing 90 memory card installing 26 troubleshooting 294 Memory full cannot print faxes 259 menu settings page printing 44 menus Active NIC 160 AppleTalk 166 Confidential Print 174 Configure MP 150 Copy Settings 186 Custom Names 156 Custom Scan Sizes 157 Custom Types 156 Default Source 147 Disk Wiping 175 E mail Settings 200 Fax Mode Analog Fax Setup 191 Fax Mode Fax Server Setup 199 Finishing 215 Flash Drive 208 FTP Settings 205 General Settings 178 Help 228 HTML 225 Image 226 IPv6 164 LexLink 167 Miscellaneous 174 NetWare 166 Network lt x gt 160 Network Card 164 Network Reports 163 Paper Loading 154 Paper Size Type 147 Paper Texture 151 Paper Weight 152 Parallel x menu 169 PCL Emul 222 PDF 221 PictBridge 227 PostScript 221 Quality 217 Reports 158 Security Audit Log 176 Serial x 171 Set Date Time 177 Settings 213 SMTP Setup menu 162 Standard Network 160 Standard USB 167 Standard USB x 167 Substitute Size 150 Supplies 146 TCP IP 163 Utilities 220 Wireless 165 XPS 228 menus diagram of 145 Miscellaneous menu 174 moving the printer 253 multiple pages on one sheet 98 multipurpose feeder loading 68 N NetWare menu 166 Network x menu 160 Network Card menu 164 Network Reports menu 163 network
270. ppears and then touch Color Alignment 10 11 12 13 From the printed sheet find the straightest of the 20 lines beside the letter A Touch the left or right arrow to select that number Repeat steps 9 and 10 to align sets B through L Touch Back Touch Exit Config Menu Note If the issue is not resolved then recalibrate again If necessary adjust the color alignment again Troubleshooting 297 Clipped images These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following CHECK THE GUIDES Move the width and length guides in the tray to the correct positions for the paper size loaded CHECK THE PAPER SIZE SETTING Make sure the paper size setting matches the paper loaded in the tray 1 From the printer control panel check the Paper Size setting from the Paper menu 2 Before sending the job to print specify the correct size setting For Windows users specify the size from Print Properties For Macintosh users specify the size from the Page Setup dialog Fine horizontal lines appear on color pages You may notice fine horizontal lines in photographs or pages with a high concentration of color This can occur when the printer is in Quiet Mode To fix this set Quiet Mode to Off Image Photo Ghost images These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following THE PHOTOCONDUCTOR IS NOT FUNCTIONING PROPERLY Make sure the Paper Type setting is correct for the media that you are using Replace the
271. pper left corner e Scan or copy documents up to 215 9 x 355 6 mm 8 5 x 14 in Copy books up to 25 4 mm 1 in thick Learning about the printer 14 Using the security lock feature The printer is equipped with a security lock feature When a lock compatible with most laptop computers is attached the printer is locked Once locked the metal plate and the system board cannot be removed Attach a security lock to the printer in the location shown M 2 SS Learning about the printer 15 Understanding the printer control panel 9 Item Description 1 Display View scanning copying faxing and printing options as well as status and error messages 2 Keypad Enter numbers letters or symbols on the display C 3 Dial Pause Press to cause a two or three second dial pause in a fax number In the Fax To field a Dial Pause is represented by a comma ou From the home screen press to redial a fax number The button functions only within the Fax menu or with fax functions When outside of the Fax menu fax function or home screen pressing C causes an error beep 4 Back In the Copy menu press to delete the right most digit of the value in the Copy Count The default value of 1 appears if the entire number is deleted by pressing numerous times In the Fax Destination List press to delete the right most digit of a number e
272. printer control panel e Send a fax to multiple fax destinations at the same time Scan documents and send them to your computer an e mail address a flash drive or an FTP destination Scan documents and send them to another printer PDF by way of FTP Learning about the printer 13 Understanding the ADF and scanner glass Automatic Document Feeder ADF Scanner glass Use the ADF for multiple page documents Use the scanner glass for single pages small items such as postcards or photos transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings You can use the ADF or the scanner glass to scan documents Using the ADF The Automatic Document Feeder ADF can scan multiple pages including duplex pages When using the ADF Load the document into the ADF faceup short edge first Load up to 50 sheets of plain paper in the ADF input tray e Scan sizes from 148 x 210 mm 5 8 x 8 3 in to 215 9 x 355 6 mm 8 5 x 14 in Scan documents with mixed page sizes letter and legal Scan media weights from 52 to 120 g m 14 to 32 Ib Donotload postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass Using the scanner glass The scanner glass can be used to scan or copy single pages or book pages When using the scanner glass Place a document facedown on the scanner glass in the u
273. problems 1 Turn the printer off 2 Hold down 2 and while turning the printer on 3 Release the buttons when the screen with the progress bar appears The printer performs a power on sequence and then the Configuration menu appears 4 Touch the down arrow until Print Quality Pages appears 5 Touch Print Quality Pages The print quality test pages print 6 Touch Back 7 Touch Exit Configuration Printing 89 Printing in black and white To print all text and graphics using only the black toner cartridge set the printer to Black Only Note You may override this setting using the printer driver 1 Make sure the printer is on and Ready appears On the home screen touch Touch Settings Touch the down arrow until Print Settings appears Touch Print Settings Touch Quality Menu Touch the right arrow to select Black Only Touch Submit o ON A u FW NM Touch Al to return to the home screen Using Max Speed and Max Yield The Max Speed and Max Yield settings let you choose between a faster print speed or a higher toner yield Max Yield is the factory default setting e Max Speed Prints in color mode unless black only is selected by the driver Prints in black only mode if the black only driver setting is selected e Max Yield Switches from black to color mode based on the color content found on each page Frequent color mode switching can result in slower printing if the content of pages is mixed To spec
274. r b permit the Software Program to be used for any purpose prohibited by such export laws including without limitation nuclear chemical or biological weapons proliferation AGREEMENT TO CONTRACT ELECTRONICALLY You and Lexmark agree to form this Software License Agreement electronically This means that when you click the Agree or I accept button on this page or use this product you acknowledge your agreement to these Software License Agreement terms and conditions and that you are doing so with the intent to sign a contract with Lexmark CAPACITY AND AUTHORITY TO CONTRACT You represent that you are of the legal age of majority in the place you sign this Software License Agreement and if applicable you are duly authorized by your employer or principal to enter into this contract ENTIRE AGREEMENT This Software License Agreement including any addendum or amendment to this Software License Agreement that is included with the Software Program is the entire agreement between you and Lexmark relating to the Software Program Except as otherwise provided for herein these terms and conditions supersede all prior or contemporaneous oral or written communications proposals and representations with respect to the Software Program or any other subject matter covered by this Software License Agreement except to the extent such extraneous terms do not conflict with the terms of this Software License Agreement any other written agr
275. r or specialty media Off Notes Energy s Energy Paper Offisthe factory default setting Off resets the printer to its paper factory default settings The Energy setting minimizes the power used by the printer Performance may be affected but print quality is not Paper minimizes the amount of paper and specialty media needed for a print job Performance may be affected but print quality is not Energy Paper minimizes the use of power and of paper and specialty media ADF Loaded Beep Specifies whether the ADF emits a beep when paper is loaded Enabled Note Disabled is the factory default setting Disabled Understanding printer menus 178 Menu item Quiet Mode Off Image Photo On Text Graphics Run Initial setup Yes No Description Reduces the amount of noise produced by the printer Notes Offis the factory default setting This setting supports the performance specifications for your printer Onconfiguresthe printerto produceas little noise as possible This setting is best suited for printing text and line graphics Foroptimal printing of color rich documents set Quiet Mode to Off Selecting Photo from the driver may disable Quiet Mode and provide better print quality and full speed printing Instructs the printer to run the setup wizard Notes Yesis the factory default setting After completing the setup wizard by selecting Done at the Country select screen the
276. r Copies amp Pages pop up menu choose Job Routing 3 Select your job type Confidential Reserve Repeat or Verify and then assign a user name For a confidential job also enter a four digit PIN 4 Click OK or Print and then go to the printer to release the job 5 Onthe home screen touch Held jobs 6 Touch your user name Note A maximum of 500 results can be displayed for held jobs If your name does not appear touch the down arrow until your name appears or touch Search Held Jobs if there are a large number of held jobs in the printer 7 Touch Confidential Jobs 8 Enter your PIN 9 Touch the job you want to print 10 Touch Print or touch the arrows to increase or decrease the number of copies and then touch Print Printing 86 Printing from a flash drive A USB port is located on the printer control panel Insert a flash drive to print supported file types Supported file types include pdf gif jpeg jpg bmp png tiff tif pcx and dcx Many flash drives are tested and approved for use with the printer For more information visit the Lexmark Web site at www lexmark com Notes Hi Speed flash drives must support the Full speed standard Flash drives supporting only USB Low speed capabilities are not supported e USB devices must support the FAT File Allocation Tables system Devices formatted with NTFS New Technology File System or any other file system are not supported e f selecting an encrypte
277. r blank separator sheets are inserted None Between Copies Between Jobs Between Pages Between Copies inserts a blank sheet between each copy of a print job if Collation is set to On If Collation is set to Off then a blank page is inserted between each set of printed pages such as after all page 1 s and after all page 2 s Notes Noneis the factory default setting Between Jobs inserts a blank sheet between print jobs Between Pages inserts a blank sheet between each page of the print job This setting is useful when printing transparencies or inserting blank pages in a document for notes Separator Sheet Source Specifies the paper source for separator sheets Tray x Multipurpose Feeder Notes Tray 1 is the factory default setting e FromthePaper menu Configure MP must be set to Cassette in order for Multipurpose Feeder to appear as a menu setting Blank Pages Specifies whether blank pages are inserted in a print job Do Not Print Note Do Not Print is the factory default setting Print J Print Settings Setup menu Menu item Description Printer Language Sets the default printer language PCL Emulation Notes PS Emulation PCL emulation uses a PCL interpreter for processing print jobs PostScript emulation uses aPS interpreterfor processing print jobs e PCL is the factory default printer language Setting a printer language as the default does not prevent a software program from se
278. r box type the number of minutes you want the printer to wait before it enters Power Saver mode 5 Click Submit Using the printer control panel Make sure the printer is on and Ready appears On the home screen touch Touch Settings Touch General Settings Touch the down arrow until Timeouts appears Touch Timeouts N QQ Ui A WN Touch the arrows next to Power Saver Mode to select the number of minutes you want the printer to wait before it enters Power Saver mode oo Touch Submit 9 Touch a Minimizing your printer s environmental impact 61 Adjusting the brightness of the display To save energy or if you are having trouble reading your display you can adjust the brightness of the display Available settings range from 20 100 The factory default setting is 100 Using the Embedded Web Server 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser Note If you do not know the IP address of the printer then print a network setup page and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Click Settings and then click General Settings 3 In the Screen Brightness box type in the brightness percentage you want for your home screen 4 Click Submit Using the printer control panel Make sure the printer is on and Ready appears On the home screen touch Touch Settings Touch General Settings Touch the down arrow until Screen Brightness appears Touch the arrows to se
279. r photograph by scanning it and then saving it to a computer program application or flash drive For more information see Sending an e mail using the touch screen on page 107 Scanning to a computer on page 141 Scanning to a flash drive on page 142 Check your first draft for accuracy Before printing or making multiple copies of a document Usethe Lexmark preview feature which you can select from the Print dialog the Lexmark Toolbar or the printer display to see what the document will look like before you print it Print one copy of the document to check its content and format for accuracy Avoid paper jams Carefully select and load paper to avoid paper jams For more information see Avoiding jams on page 266 Print in black and white To print all text and graphics using only the black toner cartridge set the printer to Black Only For more information see Printing in black and white on page 90 Use Max Speed or Max Yield settings The Max Speed and Max Yield settings let you choose between a faster print speed or a higher toner yield Max Yield is the factory default setting For more information see Using Max Speed and Max Yield on page 90 Saving energy Using Eco Mode Use Eco Mode to quickly select one or more ways to reduce your printer s environmental impact Note See the table for the multiple settings that change when you select an Eco Mode setting Choose To Energy Reduce energy u
280. r tray 2 Check for paper jams or misfeeds 3 Make sure the paper tray closes properly RESET THE PRINTER Turn the printer off Wait 10 seconds Turn the printer back on Flash memory card Make sure the flash memory card is securely connected to the printer system board Hard disk with adapter Make sure the hard disk is securely connected to the printer system board Internal Solutions Port If the Lexmark Internal Solutions Port ISP does not operate correctly then these are possible solutions Try one or more of the following CHECK THE ISP CONNECTIONS Make sure the ISP is securely attached to the printer system board Make sure the cable is securely connected to the correct connector CHECK THE CABLE Make sure you are using the correct cable and that it is securely connected MAKE SURE THE NETWORK SOFTWARE IS CONFIGURED CORRECTLY For information about installing software for network printing see the Networking Guide on the Software and Documentation CD Internal print server If the internal print server does not operate correctly these are possible solutions Try one or more of the following CHECK THE PRINT SERVER CONNECTIONS Make sure the internal print server is attached securely to the printer system board Make sure you are using the correct optional cable and that it is securely connected Troubleshooting 293 MAKE SURE THE NETWORK SOFTWARE IS CONFIGURED CORRECTLY For information about ins
281. r using the keypad To enter additional recipients press Next address and then enter the address or shortcut number you want to add Touch E mail It Sending an e mail using the address book 1 a Uu A UN Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides On the home screen touch E mail Touch Search Address Book Enter the name or part of the name you are searching for and then touch Search Touch the name that you want to add to the To box To enter additional recipients press Next address and then enter the address or shortcut number you want to add or search the address book Touch E mail It E mailing 107 Customizing e mail settings Adding e mail subject and message information 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass If you are loading a document into the ADF adjust the paper guides On the home screen touch E mail Type an e mail address Touch Options Touch Subject Type
282. raphics are oriented on the page Off Notes Long edge Short edge e Off is the factory default setting Long edge assumes binding along the long edge of the page left edge for portrait orientation and top edge for landscape orientation Short edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page top edge for portrait orientation and left edge for landscape orientation Understanding printer menus 209 Menu item Description JPEG Quality Sets the quality of a JPEG photo image in relation to file size and the quality of the Best for content image 5 90 Notes Best for content is the factory default setting 5 reduces the file size but the quality of the image is lessened 90 provides the best image quality but the file size is very large This menu item applies to all scan functions Text Default Sets the quality of the text in relation to file size and the quality of the image 5 90 Note 75 is the factory default setting Text Photo Default 5 90 Sets the quality of a text photo image in relation to file size and the quality of the image Note 75 is the factory default setting Photo Default 5 90 Sets the quality of a photo image in relation to file size and the quality of the image Note 50 is the factory default setting Use Multi Page TIFF On Off Provides a choice between single page TIFF files and multiple page TIFF files For a multiple page scan to FTP job either one TIFF f
283. ray The Paper Size setting for the standard 550 sheet tray and the multipurpose tray must be set manually from the Paper Size menu The factory default Paper Type setting is Plain Paper The Paper Type setting must be set manually for all trays that do not contain plain paper 1 Make sure the printer is on and Ready appears On the home screen touch Touch Paper Menu Touch Paper Size Type 2 3 4 5 Touch the arrows for the desired tray until the correct size or type setting appears 6 Touch Submit 7 Touch Al to return to the home screen Configuring Universal paper settings The Universal Paper Size is a user defined setting that lets you print on paper sizes that are not preset in the printer menus Set the Paper Size for the specified tray to Universal when the size you want is not available from the Paper Size menu Then specify all of the following Universal size settings for your paper Units of measure millimeters or inches Portrait Width Portrait Height Note The smallest supported Universal size is 76 x 127 mm 3 x 5 in the largest size is 216 x 356 mm 8 5 x 14 in Specify a unit of measurement 1 Make sure the printer is on and Ready appears On the home screen touch Touch Paper Menu Touch the down arrow until Universal Setup appears and then touch Universal Setup 2 3 4 5 Touch the left or right arrow to select the desired unit of measure 6 Touch Portrait Width or Portrait Height 7
284. reito a protecao contra interferencia prejudicial mesmo de estacoes do mesmo tipo e nao pode causar interferencia a sistemas operando em carater primario Res ANATEL 282 2001 Industry Canada Canada This device complies with Industry Canada specification RSS 210 Operation is subjecttothefollowing two conditions 1 this device may not cause interference and 2 this device must accept any interference including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device This device has been designed to operate only with the antenna provided Use of any other antenna is strictly prohibited per regulations of Industry Canada To prevent radio interference to the licensed service this device is intended to be operated indoors and away from windows to provide maximum shielding Equipment or its transmit antenna that is installed outdoors is subject to licensing Notices 321 The installer of this radio equipment must ensure that the antenna is located or pointed such that it does not emit RF fields in excess of Health Canada limits for the general population consult Safety Code 6 obtainable from Health Canada s Web site www hc sc gc ca rpb The term IC before the certification registration number only signifies that the Industry Canada technical specifications were met Industry Canada Canada Cet appareil est conforme la norme RSS 210 d Industry Canada Son fonctionnement est soumis aux deux conditions suivantes
285. rial The Monotype Corporation plc CG Times Based on Times New Roman under license from The Monotype Corporation plc is a product of Agfa Corporation Chicago Apple Computer Inc Clarendon Linotype Hell AG and or its subsidiaries Eurostile Nebiolo Geneva Apple Computer Inc GillSans The Monotype Corporation plc Helvetica Linotype Hell AG and or its subsidiaries Hoefler Jonathan Hoefler Type Foundry ITC Avant Garde Gothic International Typeface Corporation ITC Bookman International Typeface Corporation ITC Mona Lisa International Typeface Corporation ITC Zapf Chancery International Typeface Corporation Joanna The Monotype Corporation plc Marigold Arthur Baker Monaco Apple Computer Inc New York Apple Computer Inc Oxford Arthur Baker Notices 313 Palatino Linotype Hell AG and or its subsidiaries Stempel Garamond Linotype Hell AG and or its subsidiaries Taffy Agfa Corporation Times New Roman The Monotype Corporation plc Univers Linotype Hell AG and or its subsidiaries All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners Federal Communications Commission FCC compliance information statement This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause harmful interference
286. rinter What are you looking for Initial setup instructions Connecting the printer Installing the printer software Find it here Setup documentation The setup documentation came with the printer and is also available on the Lexmark Web site at www lexmark com publications Additional setup and instructions for using the printer Selecting and storing paper and specialty media Loading paper Performing printing copying scanning and faxing tasks depending on your printer model Configuring printer settings Viewing and printing documents and photos Setting up and using printer software Setting up and configuring the printer on a network depending on your printer model Caring for and maintaining the printer Troubleshooting and solving problems User s Guide The User s Guide is available on the Software and Documentation CD For updates check our Web site at www lexmark com publications Help using the printer software Windows or Mac Help Open a printer software program or application and then click Help Click to view context sensitive information Notes The Help installs automatically with the printer software The printer software is located in the printer Program folder or on the desktop depending on your operating system Learning about the printer 9 What are you looking for The latest supplemental information updates and technical support Troublesho
287. rinter 243 7 Place the old cartridge into the replacement cartridge box and then place the return label on the box and mail it to Lexmark for recycling 9 Remove the red packing strips from the new cartridge 10 Insert the new cartridge into the printer Push the toner cartridge in as far as it will go The cartridge clicks into place when correctly installed Maintaining the printer 244 11 Close the lower front door and then close the upper front door Replacing the ADF parts Note The printer comes with a spare separator pad and air filter located under the scanner To access the spare parts remove the slotted screw Note It is recommended that the ADF area and parts be cleaned periodically Maintaining the printer 245 Replacing the pick roller assembly 1 Turn the printer off and then open the ADF cover Maintaining the printer 246 Replacing the separator pad 1 With the ADF cover still open pull up on the separator pad to remove it 2 Replace the separator pad 3 Dispose of the old separator pad Maintaining the printer 247 Replacing the pick pad 1 With the ADF cover still open pull straight up on the pick pad to remove it Maintaining the printer 248 3 Open the flap to access the sensor lens underneath and then wipe the lens clean Maintaining the printer 249 Replacing the air filter 1 Locate the air filter on the back of
288. rk Macintosh Prepare to configure the printer 1 Locate the printer MAC address on the sheet that shipped with the printer Write the last six digits of the MAC address in the space provided below MAC address on Enter the printer information 1 Access the AirPort options In Mac OS X version 10 5 or later a From the Apple menu choose System Preferences b Click Network C Click AirPort In Mac OS X version 10 4 and earlier a From the Finder desktop choose Go gt Applications b From the Applications folder double click Internet Connect c From the toolbar click AirPort From the Network pop up menu select print server xxxxxx where the x s are the last six digits of the MAC address located on the MAC address sheet 3 Open the Safari browser From the Bookmarks drop down menu select Show 5 Under Collections select Bonjour or Rendezvous and then double click the printer name Note The application is referred to as Rendezvous in Mac OS X version 10 3 but is now called Bonjour by Apple Computer From the main page of the Embedded Web Server navigate to the page where the wireless settings information is stored Additional printer setup 49 Configure the printer for wireless access Type the name of your network SSID in the appropriate field Select Infrastructure as your Network Mode if you are using a wireless router Select the type of security you use to protect your wireless network
289. rmal is the factory default setting Glossy Weight Light Normal Heavy Specifies the relative weight of the glossy paper loaded in a specific tray Note Normal is the factory default setting Heavy Glossy Weight Heavy Specifies the relative weight of the glossy paper loaded in a specific tray Note Heavy is the factory default setting Labels Weight Specifies the relative weight of the labels loaded in a specific tray Light Note Normal is the factory default setting Normal Heavy Vinyl Labels Weight Specifies the relative weight of vinyl labels loaded in a specific tray Light Note Normal is the factory default setting Normal Heavy Bond Weight Specifies the relative weight of the paper loaded in a specific tray Light Note Normal is the factory default setting Normal Heavy Envelope Weight Specifies the relative weight of the envelopes loaded in a specific tray Light Note Normal is the factory default setting Normal Heavy Rough Envelope Weight Specifies the relative texture of the envelopes loaded in a specific tray Light Note Heavy is the factory default setting Normal Heavy Understanding printer menus 153 Menu item Description Letterhead Weight Specifies the relative weight of the paper loaded in a specific tray Light Note Normal is the factory default setting Normal Heavy Preprinted Weight Specifies the relative weight of the paper loaded in a specific
290. rms and conditions of the software license agreement accompanying such Freeware whether in the form of a discrete agreement shrink wrap license or electronic license terms at the time of download or installation Use of the Freeware by you shall be governed entirely by the terms and conditions of such license TRANSFER You may transfer the Software Program to another end user Any transfer must include all software components media printed materials and this Software License Agreement and you may not retain copies of the Software Program or components thereof The transfer may not be an indirect transfer such as a consignment Prior to the transfer the end user receiving the transferred Software Program must agree to all these Software License Agreement terms Upon transfer of the Software Program your license is automatically terminated You may not rent sublicense or assign the Software Program except to the extent provided in this Software License Agreement UPGRADES To Use a Software Program identified as an upgrade you must first be licensed to the original Software Program identified by Lexmark as eligible for the upgrade After upgrading you may no longer use the original Software Program that formed the basis for your upgrade eligibility LIMITATION ON REVERSE ENGINEERING You may not alter decrypt reverse engineer reverse assemble reverse compile or otherwise translate the Software Program or assist or otherwise facilitate othe
291. rottava kun v rikasetit on poistettu ja lukitus on auki V lt s teelle altistumista Gefahr Unsichtbare Laserstrahlung beim Herausnehmen von Druckkassetten und offener Sicherheitssperre Laserstrahl meiden Kivduvog A parn akrivofoA a A iep rav aqaipo vrai oi Kag te Kai ou erep verai n ev6aoq Aeia Arrog yere TNV EKBEGN OTN Gap TWV akr vuv Figyelem A kazett k kiv telekor l thatatlan l zersug rz s l phet fel ha a biztons gi kapcsol nem m k dik Ker lj k el a l zersugarat Pericolo Emissione di radiazioni laser durante la rimozione delle cartucce e del blocco Evitare l esposizione ai raggi Fare Usynlig laserstraling nar kassetter tas ut og sperren er satt ut av spill Unnga eksponering Niebezpieczenstwo niewidoczne promieniowanie laserowe po wyj ciu kasety i wy czeniu blokady Unika ekspozycji na wi zk OnacHo Mpu cHaTbIx kaptpuaxax n Hapywennn nkcaynn HEBYAMMOE rriasy nasepHoe usnyyeHve Via6era te BosnelicrBwa nyua Pozor Nebezpe enstvo nevidite n ho laserov ho iarenia pri odobrat ch kazet ch a odblokovanej poistke Nevystavujte sa l om Peligro Se producen radiaciones l ser invisibles al extraer los cartuchos con el interbloqueo desactivado Evite la exposici n al haz de l ser erstr lning n r kassetterna r borttagna och sp rren avaktiverad Undvik att uts tta dig f r str len RRUWHR BHAA EAR ABT A i ERT ER 3 Uy 7 23A BED 2 DSTI RAV LET HRC SUKDICUT PAU
292. rs This menu is available from the Network Ports menu Network Ports gt Standard Network or Network x gt Std Network Setup or Net x Setup gt TCP IP Description Menu item Activate Activates TCP IP On Note On is the factory default setting Off View Hostname Lets you view the current TCP IP hostname Note This can be changed only from the Embedded Web Server IP Address Lets you view or change the current TCP IP Address Note Manually setting the IP address sets the Enable DHCP and Enable Auto IP settings to Off It also sets Enable BOOTP and Enable RARP to Off on systems that support BOOTP and RARP Netmask Lets you view or change the current TCP IP Netmask Gateway Lets you view or change the current TCP IP Gateway Enable DHCP Specifies the DHCP address and parameter assignment setting On Off Enable RARP Specifies the RARP address assignment setting On Note On is the factory default setting Off Enable BOOTP Specifies the BOOTP address assignment setting On Note On is the factory default setting Off Understanding printer menus 163 Description Menu item AutolP Specifies the Zero Configuration Networking setting Yes Note Yes is the factory default setting No Enable FTP TFTP Enables the built in FTP server which allows you to send files to the printer using the Yes File Transfer Protocol No Note Yes is the factory default setting Enable HTTP Server Enables t
293. rs to do so except as and to the extent expressly permitted to do so by applicable law for the purposes of inter operability error correction and security testing If you have such statutory rights you will notify Lexmark in writing of any intended reverse engineering reverse assembly or reverse compilation You may not decrypt the Software Program unless necessary for the legitimate Use of the Software Program ADDITIONAL SOFTWARE This Software License Agreement applies to updates or supplements to the original Software Program provided by Lexmark unless Lexmark provides other terms along with the update or supplement Notices 328 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 TERM This Software License Agreement is effective unless terminated or rejected You may reject or terminate this license at any time by destroying all copies of the Software Program together with all modifications documentation and merged portions in any form or as otherwise described herein Lexmark may terminate your license upon notice if you fail to comply with any of the terms of this Software License Agreement Upon such termination you agree to destroy all copies of the Software Program together with all modifications documentation and merged portions in any form TAXES You agree that you are responsible for payment of any taxes including without limitation any goods and services and personal property taxes resulting from this Software Li
294. rsion RGB Graphics Vivid sRGB Display Display True Black sRGB Vivid Off Manual Color Customizes the CMYK color conversions CMYK Image Notes US CMYK Euro CMYK e US CMYK is the US factory default setting US CMYK applies a color conversion Vivid CMYK table that tries to produce output that matches SWOP color output Off Euro CMYK is the international factory default setting Euro CMYK applies a color CMYKText conversion table that tries to produce output that matches EuroScale color output ex US CMYK Vivid CMYK increases color saturation for the US CMYK color conversion table Euro CMYK Off turns off color conversion Vivid CMYK Off CMYK Graphics US CMYK Euro CMYK Vivid CMYK Off Color Adjust Initiates a recalibration of color conversion tables and allows the printer to make adjustments for color variations in output Notes Calibrating starts when the menu is selected Calibrating appears on the display until the process is finished Color variations in output sometimes result from changeable conditions such as room temperature and humidity Color adjustments are made on printer algorithms Color alignment is also recalibrated in this process Understanding printer menus 219 Utilities menu Menu item Remove Held Jobs Confidential Held Not Restored All Description Removes confidential and held jobs from the printer hard disk Notes Selecting a setting affects only print j
295. rsion table Enter the RGB or CMYK color number on QAU A W N Enter an Increment value from 1 255 Note The closer the value is to 1 the narrower the color sample range will appear 9 Click Print to print the detailed Color Samples set Troubleshooting 310 Embedded Web Server does not open These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following CHECK THE NETWORK CONNECTIONS Make sure the printer and computer are turned on and connected to the same network CHECK THE NETWORK SETTINGS Depending on the network settings you may need to type https instead of http before the printer IP address to access the Embedded Web Server For more information see your system administrator Contacting Customer Support When you call Customer Support describe the problem you are experiencing the message on the display and the troubleshooting steps you have already taken to find a solution You need to know your printer model type and serial number For more information see the label on the inside top front cover of the printer The serial number is also listed on the menu settings page In the U S or Canada call 1 800 539 6275 For other countries regions visit the Lexmark Web site at www lexmark com Troubleshooting 511 Notices Product information Product name Lexmark X730 Series Machine type 7526 Model s 235 275 295 436 476 496 636 676 Edition notice May 2009 The following p
296. rstanding printer menus 223 Tray Renumber Assign MP Feeder Off None 0 199 Assign Tray lt x gt Off None 0 199 Assign Manual Paper Off None 0 199 Assign Man Env Off None 0 199 Menu item Description Configures the printer to work with printer software or programs that use different source assignments for trays drawers and feeders Notes e Off is the factory default setting None is not an available selection It is only displayed when it is selected by the PCL 5 interpreter None ignores the Select Paper Feed command 0 199 allows a custom setting to be assigned Tray Renumber View Factory Def None Displays the factory default setting assigned to each tray drawer or feeder Tray Renumber Restore Defaults Yes No ee Returns all tray drawer and feeder assignments to the factory default settings Understanding printer menus 224 HTML menu Font Name Albertus MT Antique Olive Apple Chancery Arial MT Avant Garde Bodoni Bookman Chicago Clarendon Cooper Black Copperplate Coronet Courier Eurostile Garamond Geneva Gill Sans Goudy Helvetica Hoefler Text M Intl CG Times Sets the default font for HTML documents Intl Courier Note The Times font will be used in HTML documents that do not Intl Univers specify a font Joanna MT Letter Gothic Lubalin Gothic Marigold MonaLisa Recut Monaco New CenturySbk New York Optima Oxford Palatino Stemp
297. rt one end of the USB cable into the camera Note Use only the USB cable that came with your camera 2 Insert the other end of the USB cable into the USB port on the front of the printer Notes Make sure the PictBridge enabled digital camera is set to the correct USB mode See the camera documentation for more information fthe PictBridge connection is successful then a confirmation message appears on the printer display 3 Follow the instructions on the camera to select and print photos Note If the printer is turned off while the camera is connected then you must disconnect and then reconnect the camera Printing 88 Printing information pages Printing a font sample list To print samples of the fonts currently available for your printer 1 Make sure the printer is on and Ready appears On the home screen touch Touch Reports 2 3 4 Touch the down arrow until Print Fonts appears 5 Touch Print Fonts 6 Touch PCL Fonts or PostScript Fonts A font sample list prints 7 Touch Al to return to the home screen Printing a directory list A directory list shows the resources stored in flash memory or on the printer hard disk 1 Make sure the printer is on and Ready appears 2 On the home screen touch 3 Touch Reports 4 Touch the down arrow until Print Directory appears 5 Touch Print Directory Printing the print quality test pages Print the print quality test pages to isolate print quality
298. rtcuts Note A password may be required If you do not have an ID and password get one from your system support person 4 Click FTP Shortcut Setup 5 Enter the appropriate information into the boxes Scanning to an FTP address 137 6 Enter a shortcut number If you enter a number that is already in use then you are prompted to select another number 7 Click Add Creating an FTP shortcut using the touch screen 1 On the home screen touch FTP Type the address of the FTP site Touch Save as Shortcut Enter a name for the shortcut Uu A W N Verify that the shortcut name and number are correct and then touch OK If the name or number is incorrect then touch Cancel and then reenter the information If you enter a number that is already in use then you are prompted to select another number 6 Touch Send It to start the scan or touch Al to return to the home screen Understanding FTP options Original Size This option opens a screen where you can choose the size of the documents you are going to copy e Touch a paper size button to select that size as the Original Size setting The FTP screen appears with your new setting displayed e When Original Size is set to Mixed Letter Legal you can scan an original document that contains mixed paper sizes e When Original Size is set to Auto Size Sense the scanner automatically determines the size of the original document Sides Duplex This option in
299. rts all outgoing faxes to black and white Note On is the factory default setting Enable Fax Receive Allows fax jobs to be received by the printer On Note On is the factory default setting Off Rings to Answer Specifies the number of rings before answering an incoming fax job 1 25 Note 1 is the factory default setting Auto Reduction Scales an incoming fax job so it fits the size of the paper loaded in the designated On fax source Off Note On is the factory default setting Paper Source Specifies the paper source selected to supply paper for the printer to print an Auto incoming fax Tray lt x gt Multi Purpose Feeder Output Bin Specifies an output bin for received faxes Standard Bin Note Bin 1 is available only when the finisher is installed Bin 1 lt x gt Sides Duplex Enables duplex printing two sided printing for incoming fax jobs On Off Fax Footer Prints the transmission information at the bottom of each page from a received fax On Note On is the factory default setting Off Understanding printer menus 196 Max Speed 2400 4800 9600 14400 33600 Menu item Description Specifies the maximum speed in baud at which faxes are received Fax Forwarding Forward Print Print and Forward Enables forwarding of received faxes to another recipient Forward to Fax E mail FTP LDSS eSF Specifies the type of recipient to which faxes will be forwarded Note This item is available o
300. ry Defaults Do Not Restore Restore Now Returns the printer settings to the factory default settings Notes Do Not Restore is the factory default setting Do Not Restore keeps the user defined settings Restore Now returns all printer settings to the factory default settings except Network Ports menu settings All downloads stored in RAM are deleted Downloads stored in flash memory or on a printer hard disk are not affected Understanding printer menus 185 Copy Settings menu Menu item Description Content Text Photo Photograph Printed Image Text Specifies the type of content contained in the copy job Notes Text Photo is the factory default setting Text Photo is used when the original documents are a mixture of text and graphics or pictures Photograph tells the scanner to pay extra attention to graphics and pictures This setting increases the time it takes to scan but emphasizes a reproduction of the full dynamic range of tones in the original document This increases the amount of information saved Printed Image is used when jobs are composed primarily of images Printed Image converts the images to halftone Halftoning makes a grayscale or color image printable by transforming it to a pattern of small spots with a limited number of colors Text emphasizes sharp black high resolution text against a clean white background Color On Off Specifies whether color is printed from
301. s of your printer in the Address field Click Add For AppleTalk printing In Mac OS X version 10 5 1 au hWN From the Apple menu choose System Preferences Click Print amp Fax Click Click AppleTalk Select the printer from the list Click Add In Mac OS X version 10 4 and earlier 1 On A Ui UN o 10 From the Finder desktop choose Go Applications Double click Utilities Double click Print Center or Printer Setup Utility From the Printer List click Add Choose the Default Browser tab Click More Printers From the first pop up menu choose AppleTalk From the second pop up menu select Local AppleTalk zone Select the printer from the list Click Add Note If the printer doesn t show up in the list you may need to add it using the IP address Contact your system support person for assistance Additional printer setup 53 Changing port settings after installing a new network Internal Solutions Port When a new network Lexmark Internal Solutions Port ISP is installed in the printer the printer configurations on computers that access the printer must be updated because the printer will be assigned a new IP address All computers that access the printer must be updated with this new IP address in order to print to it over the network Notes fthe printer has a static IP address that will stay the same then you do not need to make any changes to the computer configurations I
302. se especially when the printer is idle Printerengine motors do not start until a job is ready to print You may notice a short delay before the first page is printed The printer enters Power Saver mode after one minute of inactivity When the printer enters Power Saver mode the printer control panel display and the standard exit bin lights are turned off The scanner lamps are activated only when a scan job is started Paper Enable the automatic duplex feature Turn off print log features Energy Paper Use all the settings associated with Energy mode and Paper mode Minimizing your printer s environmental impact 59 Use factory default settings for all settings associated with Eco Mode This setting supports the performance specifications for your printer To select an Eco Mode setting 1 On the home screen touch Touch Settings Touch General Settings 2 3 4 Touch Eco Mode 5 Touch the arrows to select a setting 6 Touch Submit Submitting changes appears Reducing printer noise Use Quiet Mode to reduce the printer noise Note See the table for the multiple settings that change when you select a Quiet Mode setting On Text Graphics Reduce printer noise Note This setting is best suited for printing text and line Print jobs will process at one half the normal processing graphics speed Printer engine motors do not start until a job is ready to print There will
303. ssy Texture Specifies the relative texture of the glossy paper loaded in a specific tray Smooth Note Normal is the factory default setting Normal Rough Labels Texture Specifies the relative texture of the labels loaded in a specific tray Smooth Note Normal is the factory default setting Normal Rough Vinyl Labels Texture Specifies the relative texture of the labels loaded in a specific tray Smooth Note Normal is the factory default setting Normal Rough Bond Texture Specifies the relative texture of the paper loaded in a specific tray Smooth Note Rough is the factory default setting Normal Rough Envelope Texture Specifies the relative texture of the envelopes loaded in a specific tray Smooth Note Normal is the factory default setting Normal Rough Understanding printer menus 151 Menu item Description Rough Envelope Texture Specifies the relative texture of the envelopes loaded in a specific tray Smooth Note Rough is the factory default setting Normal Rough Letterhead Texture Specifies the relative texture of the paper loaded in a specific tray Smooth Note Normal is the factory default setting Normal Rough Preprinted Texture Specifies the relative texture of the paper loaded in a specific tray Smooth Note Normal is the factory default setting Normal Rough Colored Texture Specifies the relative texture of the paper loaded in a specific tray Smooth Note Normal is the factory default settin
304. st page of the transmission station name identification of the business other entity or individual sending the message and station number telephone number of the sending fax machine business other entity or individual To enter your fax setup information use the printer control panel or use your browser to access the Embedded Web Server and then enter the Settings menu Note If you do not have a TCP IP environment then you must use the printer control panel to enter your fax setup information Using the printer control panel for fax setup When the printer is turned on for the first time or if the printer has been off for an extended time a series of start up screens appear If the printer has fax capabilities then the following screens appear Station Name Station Number 1 When Station Name appears enter the name to be printed on all outgoing faxes 2 After entering the Station Name touch Submit 3 When Station Number appears enter the printer fax number 4 After entering the Station Number touch Submit Using the Embedded Web Server for fax setup 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser Note If you do not know the IP address of the printer then print a network setup page and locate the address in the TCP IP section 2 Click Settings 3 Click Fax Settings Faxing 113 4 Click Analog Fax Setup 5 Click inside the Station Name box and then enter the name to be printed on a
305. standing printer menus 164 Network Ports gt Standard Network or Network x gt Std Network Setup or Net x Setup gt IPv6 Enable IPvG On Off Menu item Description Enables IPv6 in the printer Note On is the factory default setting Auto Configuration On Off View Hostname View Address View Router Address Specifies whether the network adapter accepts the automatic IPv6 address configuration entries provided by a router Note On is the factory default setting Lets you view the current setting Note These settings can be changed only from the Embedded Web Server Enable DHCPv6 On Off Enables DHCPv6 in the printer Note On is the factory default setting Wireless menu Use the following menu items to view or configure the wireless internal print server settings Note This menu is available only for models connected to a wireless network This menu is available from the Network Ports menu Network Ports gt Network x gt Net x Setup gt Wireless Menu item Description 802 11b g n Network Mode Specifies the network mode Infrastructure Notes Ad hoc e Infrastructure mode lets the printer access a network using an access point Ad hocis the factory default setting Ad hoc mode configures the printer for wireless networking directly between it and a computer Compatibility Specifies the wireless standard for the wireless network 802 11n 802 11b g
306. support person When a custom overlay is created a button with an icon of that overlay will be available Content This option enhances copy quality Choose from Text Text Photo Photograph or Printed Image Text Use this setting when copying original documents that are mostly text or line art Text Photo Use this setting when copying original documents that are a mixture of text and graphics or pictures e Photograph Use this setting when copying an original document that is a high quality photograph or inkjet print Printed Image Use this setting when copying halftone photographs documents printed on a laser printer or pages from a magazine or newspaper Advanced Duplex This option controls whether the documents are one sided or two sided what orientation your original documents have and how your documents are bound Note Some Advanced Duplex options may not be available on all printer models Save as Shortcut This option allows the current settings to be saved as a shortcut Improving copy quality Question Tip When should I use Text mode Use text mode when text preservation is the main goal of the copy and preserving images copied from the original document is not a concern Text mode is recommended for receipts carbon copy forms and documents that contain only text or fine line art When should use Text Photo mode Use Text Photo mode when copying an original document that contains a m
307. t on AU Ff W N Touch Al Administrative support 255 Troubleshooting The indicator light is blinking The indicator light blinks until you set up Fax and E mail To disable the blinking light follow these steps Note Before completing these instructions for a printer on a network make sure the fax cables are connected 1 bh W N o 0 NGAU Touch Menus Touch Settings Touch General Settings Touch the left or right arrow next to Run initial setup to select Yes and then touch Submit Submitting changes appears Turn the printer off and then turn the printer back on From the printer control panel touch your language Touch your country or region and then touch Continue Touch the left or right arrow to select your time zone and then touch Continue Touch Fax and E mail to deselect them and then touch Continue Note You can use these same steps to enable Fax and E mail Solving basic printer problems If there are basic printer problems or the printer is unresponsive make sure The power cord is plugged into the printer and a properly grounded electrical outlet The electrical outlet is not turned off by any switch or breaker The printer is not plugged into any surge protectors uninterrupted power supplies or extension cords Other electronic equipment plugged into the outlet is working The printer is turned on Check the printer power switch The printer cable is securely attached to the pr
308. t sturdy and stable surface Keep the printer Away from the direct airflow of air conditioners heaters or ventilators Free from direct sunlight humidity extremes or temperature fluctuations Clean dry and free of dust Allow the following recommended amount of space around the printer for proper ventilation Learning about the printer 10 100 mm 3 9 in 100 mm 3 9 in 482 6 mm 19 in 100 mm 3 9 in uUum WwW N 393 7 mm 15 5 in J TN Learning about the printer 11 Printer configurations Basic model S Automatic Document Feeder ADF ADF input tray Standard exit bin Printer control panel Standard 550 sheet tray Tray 1 a uu Win Multipurpose feeder Learning about the printer 12 Configured model LE Automatic Document Feeder ADF ADF input tray Standard exit bin Printer control panel Optional 550 sheet tray or specialty media drawer Optional 2 000 sheet tray Standard 550 sheet tray Tray 1 ON OU RP UN Multipurpose feeder Basic functions of the scanner The scanner provides copy fax and scan to network capability for large workgroups You can Make quick copies or change the settings on the printer control panel to perform specific copy jobs Send a fax using the
309. t faxes There is not enough memory to print the fax job Touch Continue to clear the message without printing Held faxes will attempt to print after the printer has been restarted Remove paper from standard output bin Remove the stack of paper from the standard exit bin Restore Held Jobs Try one or more of the following Touch Continue to restore all held jobs stored on the printer hard disk Touch Do not restore if you do not want any print jobs to be restored Scan Document Too Long The scan job exceeds the maximum number of pages Touch Cancel Job to clear the message SMTP server not set up Contact system administrator An error occurred on the SMTP server or the SMTP server is not configured properly Touch Continue to clear the message If the message appears again contact your system support person Unsupported disk An unsupported printer hard disk has been installed Remove the unsupported device and then install a supported one 31 Missing or defective color cartridge The specified toner cartridge is either missing or not functioning properly Try one or more of the following Remove the specified toner cartridge and then reinstall it Remove the specified toner cartridge and then install a new one Troubleshooting 259 32 Cartridge part number unsupported by device Remove the unsupported toner cartridge and then install a supported one 34 Short paper Try one or more of the follow
310. t print jobs Std Network Setup Reports or Network Reports Network Card TCP IP IPv6 AppleTalk NetWare LexLink Net x Setup Reports or Network Reports Network Card TCP IP IPv6 Wireless AppleTalk NetWare LexLink For descriptions and settings of the network setup menus see the following Network Reports menu on page 163 Network Card menu on page 164 CP IP menu on page 163 e IPv6 menu on page 164 Wireless menu on page 165 AppleTalk menu on page 166 NetWare menu on page 166 LexLink menu on page 167 Note The Wireless menu appears only when the printer is connected to a wireless network Understanding printer menus 161 SMTP Setup menu Use the following menu to configure the SMTP server Menu item Description Primary SMTP Gateway Specifies SMTP server port information Primary SMTP Gateway Port Note 25 is the default SMTP gateway port Secondary SMTP Gateway Secondary SMTP Gateway Port SMTP Timeout Specifies the amount of time in seconds before the server stops trying 5 30 to send the e mail Note 30 seconds is the factory default setting Reply Address Specifies server information This is a required item Use SSL Notes Disabled mn e Negotiate The message box has a limitation of 512 characters Required Disabled is the factory default setting for Use SSL SMTP Server Authentication No authentication required Login Plain CRAM MD5 Digest MD5 NTLM
311. t quality but it increases the fax transmission time for outgoing faxes Note Standard is the factory default setting Original Size Letter Legal Executive Folio Statement Universal 4x6in 3x5in Business Card Custom Scan Size x A4 A5 Oficio Mexico JIS B5 Book Original Auto Size Sense Mixed Letter Legal Specifies the paper size of the document that is being scanned Note Letter is the US factory default setting A4 is the international factory default setting Understanding printer menus 193 Sides Duplex Off Menu item Description Specifies how the text and graphics are oriented on the page Dialing Prefix Rules Prefix Rule lt x gt Notes Long edge Short edge e Off is the factory default setting e Long edge assumes binding along the long edge of the page left edge for portrait orientation and top edge for landscape orientation e Short edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page top edge for portrait orientation and left edge for landscape orientation Content Specifies the type of content that will be scanned to fax Text Notes Text Photo Photograph Text is used when the document is mostly text Text Photo is the factory default setting Text Photo is used when the documents are mostly text or line art Photograph is used when the document is a high quality photograph or inkjet print Darkness Lightens or darkens the output 1 9 Note 5 is the
312. t surface 5 Remove the jammed paper and then replace each photoconductor unit 6 Close the lower front door 7 Close the upper front door 8 Touch Continue 201 paper jam 1 Open the upper front door and then open the lower front door Warning Potential Damage To avoid overexposing the photoconductors do not leave the front doors open for more than 10 minutes CAUTION HOT SURFACE The inside of the printer might be hot To reduce the risk of injury from a hot component allow the surface to cool before touching 2 Determine where the jam is located and then remove it a If paper is visible under the fuser then grasp it on each side and pull it forward b If paper is not visible then you will need to remove the fuser unit Warning Potential Damage Do not touch the center of the fuser unit Doing so may cause your fingers to touch the roller underneath the fuser unit Touching the fuser roller will damage the fuser Troubleshooting 270 1 Turn the screws on the fuser to the left to loosen them 3 Remove the jammed paper 4 Align the fuser unit using the handholds on each side and then place it back into the printer 3 Close the lower front door and then close the upper front door 4 Touch Continue Troubleshooting 271 202 paper jam If the paper is visible in the standard exit bin then grasp the paper and pull it away from the bin Paper jam under the fuser 1 Open the upper front door a
313. talling software for network printing click Additional on the Software and Documentation CD and then select the Networking Guide link under Publications on this CD Memory card Make sure the memory card is securely connected to the printer system board USB parallel interface card Check the USB parallel interface card connections Make sure the USB parallel interface card is securely connected to the printer system board Make sure you are using the correct cable and that it is securely connected Solving paper feed problems Paper frequently jams These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following CHECK THE PAPER Use recommended paper and other specialty media For more information see the chapter about paper and specialty media guidelines MAKE SURE THERE IS NOT TOO MUCH PAPER IN THE PAPER TRAY Make sure the stack of paper you load does not exceed the maximum stack height indicated in the tray or on the multipurpose feeder CHECK THE PAPER GUIDES Move the guides in the tray to the correct positions for the paper size loaded HAS THE PAPER ABSORBED MOISTURE DUE TO HIGH HUMIDITY Load paper from a fresh package Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it Paper jam message remains after jam is cleared CHECK THE PAPER PATH The paper path is not clear Clear jammed paper from the entire paper path and then touch Continue Troubleshooting 294 Page that jammed does not reprint after
314. ted to a telephone interface The terminus of an interface may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all the devices does not exceed five The modem REN is located on the rear of the equipment on the product labeling Telephone companies report that electrical surges typically lightning transients are very destructive to customer terminal equipment connected to AC power sources This has been identified as a major nationwide problem It is recommended that the customer install an appropriate AC surge arrestor in the AC outlet to which this device is connected An appropriate AC surge arrestor is defined as one that is suitably rated and certified by UL Underwriter s Laboratories another NRTL Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory or a recognized safety certification body in the country region of use This is to avoid damage to the equipment caused by local lightning strikes and other electrical surges This equipment uses CA11A telephone jacks Avis r serv aux utilisateurs du r seau t l phonique du Canada Ce produit est conforme aux sp cifications techniques d Industrie Canada Le num ro REN ringer equivalence number num ro d quivalence de sonnerie fournit une indication du nombre maximum de terminaux pouvant tre connect s l interface t l phonique En bout de ligne le nombre d appareils qui peuvent tre connect s n est pas directement limit mais la somm
315. ter Recognition OCR processing Selecting a color eliminates the color from a form enabling improved OCR capabilities Contrast Click the arrow buttons to increase or decrease the contrast JPEG Quality Click the arrow buttons to increase or decrease the image compression Mirror Image Select this box to create a mirror image scan Negative Image Select this box to create a negative image scan Shadow Detail Click the arrow buttons to increase or decrease the visible detail in the shadows Scanning to an FTP address 139 Scan edge to edge Select this box to scan edge to edge Sharpness Click the arrow buttons to increase or decrease the sharpness Custom Job Job Build Combines multiple scanning jobs into a single job Transmission Log Prints the transmission log or transmission error log Scan Preview Displays the first page of an image before it is included in the FTP file When the first page is scanned the scanning is paused and a preview image appears Edge Erase Eliminates smudges or information around the edges of a document You can choose to eliminate an equal area around all four sides of the paper or pick a particular edge Edge Erase will erase whatever is within the area selected leaving nothing on that portion of the scan Darkness Adjusts how light or dark your scanned documents will turn out Improving FTP quality Question Tip When should I use Te
316. ter menus 154 Determines whether 2 sided printing occurs for all jobs that specify Menu item Description Heavy Glossy Loading Determines whether 2 sided printing occurs for all jobs that specify Duplex Heavy Glossy as the paper type Off Note Off is the factory default setting Bond Loading Determines whether 2 sided printing occurs for all jobs that specify Duplex Bond as the paper type Off Note Off is the factory default setting Letterhead Loading Determines whether 2 sided printing occurs for all jobs that specify Duplex Letterhead as the paper type Off Note Off is the factory default setting Preprinted Loading Determines whether 2 sided printing occurs for all jobs that specify Duplex Preprinted as the paper type Off Note Off is the factory default setting Colored Loading Determines whether 2 sided printing occurs for all jobs that specify Duplex Colored as the paper type Off Note Off is the factory default setting Light Loading Determines whether 2 sided printing occurs for all jobs that specify Duplex Light as the paper type Off Note Off is the factory default setting Heavy Loading Determines whether 2 sided printing occurs for all jobs that specify Duplex Heavy as the paper type Off Note Off is the factory default setting Custom lt x gt Loading Determines whether 2 sided printing occurs for all jobs that specify Duplex Custom lt x gt as the paper type Off Notes e Off is the
317. ter or terminal adapter then follow these steps to connect the equipment 1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the printer LINE port 2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to the port designated for fax and telephone use Notes Make sure the terminal adapter is set to the correct switch type for your region Depending on the ISDN port assignment you may have to connect to a specific port When using a PBX system make sure the call waiting tone is off When using a PBX system dial the outside line prefix before dialing the fax number For more information on using the fax with a PBX system see the documentation that came with your PBX system Connecting to a distinctive ring service A distinctive ring service may be available from your telephone service provider This service allows you to have multiple telephone numbers on one telephone line with each telephone number having a different ring pattern This may be useful for distinguishing between fax and voice calls If you subscribe to a distinctive ring service follow these steps to connect the equipment 1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the printer LINE port L 2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to an active analog telephone wall jack 3 Change the Distinctive Rings setting to match the setting you want the printer to answer Note The factory default setting for dis
318. th heat resistant inks designed foruse in xerographic copiers The ink must be able to withstand temperatures up to 190 C 374 F without melting or releasing hazardous emissions Use inks that are not affected by the resin in toner Inks that are oxidation set or oil based generally meet these requirements latex inks might not When in doubt contact the paper supplier Preprinted papers such as letterhead must be able to withstand temperatures up to 190 C 374 F without melting or releasing hazardous emissions Using recycled paper and other office papers As an environmentally conscientious company Lexmark supports the use of recycled paper produced specifically for use in laser electro photographic printers While no blanket statement can be made that all recycled paper will feed well Lexmark consistently tests papers that represent recycled cut size copier papers available on the global market This scientific testing is conducted with rigorand discipline Many factors are taken into consideration both separately and as a whole including the following Amount of post consumer waste Lexmark tests up to 10096 post consumer waste content Temperature and humidity conditions Testing chambers simulate climates from all over the world e Moisture content Business papers should have low moisture 4 5 Bending resistance and proper stiffness means optimum feeding through the printer Thickness impacts how much can be loaded
319. that imply warranties or conditions or impose obligations on Lexmark that cannot be excluded or modified If any such provisions apply then to the extent Lexmark is able Lexmark hereby limits its liability for breach of those provisions to one of the following providing you a replacement copy of the Software Program or reimbursement of the price paid for the Software Program TheSoftware Program may include internetlinks to other software applications and or internet web pages hosted and operated by third parties unaffiliated with Lexmark You acknowledge and agree that Lexmark is not responsible in any way for the hosting performance operation maintenance or content of such software applications and or internet web pages 3 LIMITATION OF REMEDY TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW ANY AND ALL LIABILITY OF LEXMARK UNDER THIS SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT IS EXPRESSLY LIMITED TO THE GREATER OF THE PRICE PAID FOR THE SOFTWARE PROGRAM AND FIVE U S DOLLARS OR THE EQUIVALENT IN LOCAL CURRENCY YOUR SOLE REMEDY AGAINST LEXMARK IN ANY DISPUTE UNDER THIS SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT SHALL BE TO SEEK TO RECOVER ONE OF THESE AMOUNTS UPON PAYMENT OF WHICH LEXMARK SHALL BE RELEASED AND DISCHARGED OF ALL FURTHER OBLIGATIONS AND LIABILITY TO YOU IN NO EVENT WILL LEXMARK ITS SUPPLIERS SUBSIDIARIES OR RESELLERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL INCIDENTAL INDIRECT EXEMPLARY PUNITIVE OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOST PROFI
320. the box Use this adapter to connect an answering machine telephone or other telecommunications equipment to the printer 1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the printer LINE port L Note There is a special RJ 11 plug installed in the printer EXT port fs Do not remove this plug It is necessary for the proper operation of the fax function and connected telephones 2 Connect the other end of the telephone cableto the adapter andthen connect the adapter to the active telephone wall jack Note Your telephone adapter may look different than the one shown It will fit the wall jack used in your location 3 Connect the answering machine or telephone to the adapter Faxing 119 Use one of the following methods Answering machine Telephone Faxing 120 Austria Germany and Switzerland There is a special RJ 11 plug installed in the printer EXT port T Do not remove this plug It is necessary forthe proper operation of the fax function and connected telephones Connecting to a telephone wall jack in Germany Note There is a special RJ 11 plug installed in the printer EXT port Do not remove this plug It is necessary for the proper operation of the fax function and connected telephones 1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the printer LINE port 2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to the adapter
321. the paper size loaded in each tray Use THE SAME Paper Size AND PAPER TYPE SETTINGS Print a menu settings page and compare the settings for each tray f necessary adjust the settings from the Paper Size Type menu Note The standard 550 sheet tray and the multipurpose tray do not automatically sense the paper size The Paper Size setting for the standard 550 sheet tray and the multipurpose tray must be set manually from the Paper Size menu The Paper Type setting must be set for all trays from the Paper Type menu The Paper Type menu and the Paper Size menu are both available from the Paper Size Type menu Large jobs do not collate These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following Make sure COLLATE is SET TO ON From the Finishing menu or Print Properties set Collate to On Note Setting Collate to Off in the software overrides the setting in the Finishing menu REDUCE THE COMPLEXITY OF THE PRINT JOB Reduce the complexity of the print job by eliminating the number and size of fonts the number and complexity of images and the number of pages in the job Troubleshooting 283 MAKE SURE THE PRINTER HAS ENOUGH MEMORY Add printer memory or an optional hard disk Unexpected page breaks occur INCREASE THE PRINT TIMEOUT VALUE 1 Make sure the printer is on and Ready appears On the home screen touch ES Touch Settings Touch General Settings Touch the down arrow until Timeouts appears Touch Timeouts Touch th
322. the printer 20 Button Function Selected radio button This is a selected radio button The radio button is blue to show it is selected Cancel Jobs Opens the Cancel Jobs screen The Cancel Jobs screen shows three headings Print Fax and Network The following items are available under the Print Fax and Network headings Print job Copy job Fax profile e FTP E mail send Each heading has a list of jobs shown in a column under it which can show only three jobs per screen Each job appears as a button which you can touch to access information about the job If more than three jobs exist in a column then an arrow appears enabling you to scroll through the jobs Continue Touch this button when more changes need to be made for a job or after clearing a paper jam Cancel Select t Cancels an action or a selection Cancels out of a screen and returns to the previous screen Selects a menu or menu item Learning about the printer 21 Features Feature Menu trail line Menus Settings Copy Settings Number of Copies Description A Menu trail line is located at the top of each menu screen This feature acts as a trail showing the path taken to arrive at the current menu It gives the exact location within the menus Touch any of the underlined words to return to that menu or menu item The Number of Copies is not underlined since this is the current screen If yo
323. the printer 234 6 Close the lower front door and then close the upper front door Adjusting scanner registration Scanner Registration is a process to align the scan area with the paper location To manually adjust the scanner registration 1 Turn the printer off 2 Clean the scanner glass and backing material 3 Hold down 9 and S while turning the printer on 4 Release the buttons when the screen with the progress bar appears The printer performs a power on sequence and then the Configuration menu appears Touch the down arrow until Scanner Manual Registration appears Touch Scanner Manual Registration Touch Print Quick Test to print a registration page N QAU Choose the section of the scanner to align To align the scanner glass flatbed a Place the Quick Test page facedown on the scanner glass Maintaining the printer 235 9 10 b Touch Copy Quick Test The scanner prints a copy of the Quick Test page c Touch Flatbed d Use the copy of the Quick Test page to adjust the Left Margin and Top Margin settings e Touch Submit f Touch Copy Quick Test and compare the new copy to the original Repeat the flatbed alignment steps until the position on the page of the Quick Test copy closely matches the original To align the ADF a Doone of the following Toalign the ADF front place the Quick Test page faceup short edge first into the ADF Toalign the ADF back place the Quick Test page facedown s
324. the printer and then remove the cover 2 Remove the old air filter and then discard it Maintaining the printer 250 3 Replace the air filter and then replace the cover 4 Turn the printer on Replacing the waste toner box Replace the waste toner box when 82 Replace waste toner boxor82 Waste toner box nearly full appears The printer will not continue printing until the waste toner box is replaced 1 Unpack the replacement waste toner box and remove it from its shipping box 2 Locate the waste toner box release button on the left side of the printer 3 Press the release button to the left and pull the waste toner box out to remove it from the printer Maintaining the printer 251 4 Peel the seal from the side of the full waste toner box as shown and then place it over the hole to seal off the waste toner box 5 Place the sealed waste toner box in the recycling bag 6 Place the bag into the shipping box you just removed the replacement part from 8 Insert the new waste toner box into the printer Maintaining the printer 252 Moving the printer to another location Warning Potential Damage Damage to the printer caused by improper moving is not covered by the printer warranty A CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY Follow these guidelines to avoid personal injury or printer damage Turn the printer off using the power switch and then unplug the power cord from the wall outlet Disc
325. the shadows Sharpness Click the arrow buttons to increase or decrease the sharpness Color Dropout Color dropout is used for form Optical Character Recognition OCR processing Selecting a color eliminates the color from a form enabling improved OCR capabilities Color Dropout Threshold Click the arrow buttons to increase or decrease the amount of color dropout Scan edge to edge Select this box to scan edge to edge Mirror Image Select this box to create a mirror image scan Negative Image Select this box to create a negative image scan Improving scan quality Question Tip When should use Text mode Use Text mode when text preservation is the main goal of the scan and preserving images copied from the original document is not a concern Text mode is recommended for receipts carbon copy forms and documents that only contain text or fine line art When should I use Text Photo mode e Use Text Photo mode when scanning an original document that contains a mixture of text and graphics Text Photo mode is recommended for magazine articles business graphics and brochures When should I use Photo mode Use Photo mode when scanning photos printed on a laser printer or taken from a magazine or newspaper Me S Scanning to a computer or flash drive 144 Understanding printer menus Menus list Anumber of menus are available to make it easy for you to change printer settings This diagr
326. the temperature in the printer fuser e Preprinted papers that require a registration the precise location on the page greater than 2 3 mm 0 9 in such as optical character recognition OCR forms In some cases registration can be adjusted with a software application to successfully print on these forms Coated papers erasable bond synthetic papers thermal papers Rough edged rough or heavily textured surface papers or curled papers Recycled papers that fail EN12281 2002 European testing Paper weighing less than 60 g m 16 Ib Multiple part forms or documents For more information about Lexmark visit www lexmark com General sustainability related information can be found at the Environmental Sustainability link Paper and specialty media guidelines 78 Storing paper Use these paper storage guidelines to help avoid jams and uneven print quality For best results store paper where the temperature is 21 C 70 F and the relative humidity is 40 Most label manufacturers recommend printing in a temperature range of 18 to 24 C 65 to 75 F with relative humidity between 40 and 60 Store paper in cartons when possible on a pallet or shelf rather than on the floor Store individual packages on a flat surface Do not store anything on top of individual paper packages Supported paper sizes types and weights The following tables provide information on standard and optional paper input sources an
327. this menu all inactive ports are omitted Menu item Description PCL SmartSwitch Sets the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job requires On it regardless of the default printer language Off Notes Onis the factory default setting When the Off setting is used the printer does not examine incoming data When the Off setting is used the printer uses PostScript emulation if PS SmartSwitch is set to On It uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu if PS SmartSwitch is set to Off PS SmartSwitch Sets the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job requires On it regardless of the default printer language Off Notes Onis the factory default setting When the Off setting is used the printer does not examine incoming data e When the Off setting is used the printer uses PCL emulation if PCL SmartSwitch is set to On It uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu if PCL SmartSwitch is set to Off NPA Mode Sets the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional Off communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol Auto Notes Auto is the factory default setting Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart The menu selection is updated Understanding printer menus 160 Menu item Network Buffer Auto 3K to
328. til prompted to do so by the setup software e SSID The SSID is also referred to as the network name Wireless Mode or Network Mode The mode will be either infrastructure or ad hoc Channel for ad hoc networks The channel defaults to auto for infrastructure networks Some ad hoc networks will also require the auto setting Check with your system support person if you are not sure which channel to select Additional printer setup 46 Security Method There are three basic options for Security Method WEP key If your network uses more than one WEP key enter up to four in the provided spaces Select the key currently in use on the network by selecting the Default WEP Transmit Key Or WPA or WPA2 passphrase WPA includes encryption as an additional layer of security The choices are AES or TKIP Encryption must be set for the same type on the router and on the printer or the printer will not be able to communicate on the network No security If your wireless network does not use any type of security then you will not have any security information Note Using an unsecured wireless network is not recommended If you are installing the printer on an 802 1X network using the Advanced method then you may need the following Authentication type nner authentication type 802 1X username and password Certificates Note For more information on configuring 802 1X security see the Networking Guide on the S
329. tinctive rings is On This allows the printer to answer single double and triple ring patterns On the home screen touch ES Touch Settings Touch Fax Settings Touch Analog Fax Settings Touch W until Distinctive Rings appears gt a D Qa g v Touch Distinctive Rings Faxing 116 g Touch the arrow for the pattern setting you want to change h Touch Submit Connecting the printer and a telephone or answering machine to the same telephone line 1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the printer LINE port 2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to an active analog telephone wall jack 4 Connect your telecommunications equipment directly to the printer EXT port fs Faxing 117 Use one of the following methods Answering machine Answering machine and telephone Telephone or a telephone with an integrated answering machine Faxing 118 Connecting to an adapter for your country or region The following countries or regions may require a special adapter to connect the telephone cable to the active telephone wall jack Country region Austria New Zealand Cyprus Netherlands Denmark Norway Finland Portugal France Sweden Germany Switzerland e Ireland United Kingdom Italy Countries or regions except Austria Germany and Switzerland For some countries or regions a telephone line adapter is included in
330. ting or displaying the Software Program If Lexmark has licensed the Software Program to you for concurrent use you must limit the number of authorized users to the number specified in your agreement with Lexmark You may not separate the components of the Software Program for use on more than one computer You agree that you will not Use the Software Program in whole or in part in any manner that has the effect of overriding modifying eliminating obscuring altering or de emphasizing the visual appearance of any trademark trade name trade dress or intellectual property notice that appears on any computer display screens normally generated by or as a result of the Software Program b Copying You may make one 1 copy of the Software Program solely for purposes of backup archiving or installation provided the copy contains all of the original Software Program s proprietary notices You may not copy the Software Program to any public or distributed network c Reservation of Rights The Software Program including all fonts is copyrighted and owned by Lexmark International Inc and or its suppliers Lexmark reserves all rights not expressly granted to you in this Software License Agreement d Freeware Notwithstanding the terms and conditions of this Software License Agreement all or any portion of the Software Program that constitutes software provided under public license by third parties Freeware is licensed to you subject to the te
331. ting on the back of the page Long Edge is oriented in relation to the printing on the front of the page Short Edge Notes Long Edge is the factory default setting Long Edge specifies that binding be placed on the left edge of portrait pages and the top edge of landscape pages Short Edge specifies that binding be placed on the top edge of portrait pages and the left edge of landscape pages Orientation Specifies the orientation of a multiple page sheet Auto Notes Long Edge Short Edge Auto is the factory default setting The printer chooses between portrait and N up pages side Off landscape Long Edge uses landscape Short Edge uses portrait Specifies that multiple page images be printed on one side of a sheet of paper Notes 2 Up 3 Up Offisthe factory default setting 4 Up The number selected is the number of page images that will print per side 6 Up 9 Up 12 Up 16 Up N up Border Prints a border around each page image when using N up pages side None Note None is the factory default setting Solid N up Ordering Horizontal Reverse Horizontal Reverse Vertical Vertical Specifies the positioning of multiple page images when using N up pages side Notes Horizontal is the factory default setting Positioning depends on the number of images and whether the images are in portrait or landscape orientation Understanding printer menus 212 Separator Sheets Specifies whethe
332. tings You can print copies on one or two sides make two sided copies duplex of two sided original documents make two sided copies from one sided original documents or make one sided copies simplex from two sided original documents Copying 102 Collate This option keeps the pages of a print job stacked in sequence when printing multiple copies of the document The factory default setting for Collate is on the output pages of your copies will be ordered 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 If you want all the copies of each page to remain together turn Collate off and your copies will be ordered 1 1 1 2 2 2 3 3 3 Options Touching the Options button opens a screen where you can change Paper Saver Advanced Imaging Custom Job Separator Sheets Margin Shift Edge Erase Header Footer Overlay Content Advanced Duplex and Save as Shortcut settings Paper Saver This option lets you print two or more sheets of an original document together on the same page Paper Saver is also called N up printing The N stands for Number For example 2 up would print two pages of your document on a single page and 4 up would print four pages of your document on a single page Touching Print Page Borders adds or removes the outline border surrounding the original document pages on the output page Advanced Imaging This option lets you adjust Background Removal Contrast Shadow Detail Scan Edge to Edge Color Balance and mirror image before you copy th
333. tion about copy shortcuts E mail Shortcuts Prints a report containing information about e mail shortcuts Fax Shortcuts Prints a report containing information about fax shortcuts FTP Shortcuts Prints a report containing information about FTP shortcuts Profiles List Prints a list of profiles stored in the printer NetWare Setup Page Prints a report containing NetWare specific information about the network settings Note This menu item appears only for printers with an internal print server installed Print Fonts Prints a report of all the fonts available for the printer language currently set in the printer Print Directory Printsa list of allthe resources stored onan optional flash memory card or printer hard disk Notes Job Buffer Size must be set to 100 The optional flash memory or printer hard disk must be installed correctly and working properly Asset Report Prints a report containing asset information including the printer serial number and model name The report contains text and UPC barcodes that can be scanned into an asset database Understanding printer menus 159 Network Ports menu Active NIC menu Description Active NIC Notes Auto lt list of available network cards gt Auto is the factory default setting This menu item appears only if an optional network card is installed Standard Network or Network x menus Note Only active ports appear in
334. tion when a print job received On through a serial port requires it regardless of the default printer language Off Notes On is the factory default setting When the Off setting is used the printer does not examine incoming data When the Off setting is used the printer uses PostScript emulation if PS SmartSwitch is set to On It uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu if PS SmartSwitch is set to Off PS SmartSwitch Sets the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job received On through a serial port requires it regardless of the default printer language Off Notes Onisthe factory default setting When the Off setting is used the printer does not examine incoming data Whenthe Off setting is used the printer uses PCL emulation if PCL SmartSwitch is set to On It uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu if PCL SmartSwitch is set to Off Understanding printer menus 171 Menu item Description NPA Mode Sets the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional On communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol Off Notes Auto Auto is the factory default setting When the On setting is used the printer performs NPA processing If the data is not in NPA format it is rejected as bad data When the Off setting is used the printer does not perform NPA processing When the Auto setting is used
335. to respond to messages o 3 Lian N ris a FIP e Ready MeL iion Touch any button to begin E 7 6 5 4 3 Display item Description 1 Copy Opens the Copy menus Note From the home screen you can also access the Copy menus by pressing a number on the keypad 2 Email Opens the E mail menus 3 Menus Opens the menus These menus are available only when the printer is in the Ready state Learning about the printer 17 Display item Description sss 4 FTP Opens the File Transfer Protocol FTP menus Note This function must be set up by your system support person Once itis set up itappears as a display item 5 Status message bar Shows the current printer status such as Ready or Busy Shows printer conditions such as Toner Low Shows intervention messages to give instructions on what you should do so the printer can continue processing such as Close doororInsert print cartridge 6 Status Supplies Appears on the display whenever the printer status includes a message requiring intervention Touch this button to access the messages screen for more information on the message including how to clear it 7 Opens a context sensitive Help feature within the display touch screens 8 Fax Opens the Fax menus Other buttons that may appear on the home screen Display item Function Release Held Faxes If t
336. to see more options 2 From the Print dialog and pop up menus adjust the settings as needed Note To print on a specific paper type adjust the paper type setting to match the loaded paper or select the appropriate tray or feeder 3 Click Print Printing on specialty media Tips on using letterhead Useletterhead designed specifically for laser printers Print samples on the letterhead being considered for use before buying large quantities Before loading letterhead fan the stack to prevent sheets from sticking together Printing 82 Page orientation is important when printing on letterhead For information on how to load letterhead see Loading trays on page 66 Loading the multipurpose feeder on page 68 Tips on using transparencies Print samples on the transparencies being considered for use before buying large quantities When printing on transparencies Feed transparencies from any tray or drawer except the optional 2 000 sheet tray Use transparencies designed specifically for laser printers Check with the manufacturer or vendor to ensure transparencies are able to withstand temperatures up to 170 C 338 F without melting discoloring offsetting or releasing hazardous emissions To prevent print quality problems avoid getting fingerprints on the transparencies Before loading transparencies fan the stack to prevent sheets from sticking together We recommend Lexmark part number 12A
337. tomatically center the fax on the page Note Off is the factory default setting Specifies which color to drop during faxing and how much to increase or decrease the dropout None Notes Red Creer e None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout Blue e 128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold Default Red Threshold 0 255 Default Green Threshold 0 255 Default Blue Threshold 0 255 Contrast Specifies the contrast of the output Best for content Note Best for content is the factory default setting 0 5 Mirror Image Creates a mirror image of the original document On Note Off is the factory default setting Off Negative Image Creates a negative image of the original document On Note Off is the factory default setting Off Understanding printer menus 195 Shadow Detail 0 4 Menu item Description Adjusts the amount of shadow detail visible on a fax Note 0 is the factory default setting Scan edge to edge Specifies if the original document is scanned edge to edge prior to faxing On Note Off is the factory default setting Off Sharpness Adjusts the sharpness of a fax 0 5 Note 3 is the factory default setting Enable Color Fax Scans On by default Never use Always use Off by default Enables color faxing Note Off by default is the factory default setting Auto Convert Color Faxes to Mono Faxes On Off Fax Receive Settings Conve
338. touching any system board electronic components or connectors 1 Accessthe system board 2 Unpack the printer hard disk Note Avoid touching the components on the card 3 Locate the appropriate connector on the system board JLA A a Note If an optional ISP is currently installed then the printer hard disk must be installed onto the ISP To install a printer hard disk onto the ISP a Using a flathead screwdriver to loosen the screws remove the thumbscrews that attach the printer hard disk mounting bracket to the printer hard disk and then remove the bracket Additional printer setup 35 b Align the standoffs of the printer hard disk with the holes in the ISP and then press downward on the printer hard disk until the standoffs have seated into place Insertthe plug of the printer hard disk interface cable into the receptacle of the ISP Note The plugs and receptacles are color coded Additional printer setup 36 To install a printer hard disk directly on the system board a Align the standoffs of the printer hard disk with the holes in the system board and then press downward on the printer hard disk until the standoffs have seated into place OY ss Insert the plug of the printer hard disk interface cable into the receptacle of the system board Note The plugs and receptacles are color coded Additional printer setup
339. transfer module 264 83 transfer module life warning 264 83 Transfer module missing 264 84 lt color gt photoconductor low 239 264 84 lt color gt photoconductor nearly low 239 265 84 Replace color photoconductor 239 264 840 01 Scanner Disabled 265 840 02 Scanner Auto Disabled 265 88 lt color gt cartridge low 242 265 88 lt color gt cartridge nearly low 242 265 88 Replace lt color gt cartridge 242 265 900 999 Service message 266 Change lt src gt to lt x gt 257 Check tray lt x gt connection 257 Disk corrupted 257 Fax memory full 258 Fax partition inoperative Contact system administrator 258 Fax server To Format not set up Contact system administrator 258 Fax Station Name not set up 258 Fax Station Number not set up 258 Load lt src gt with lt x gt 258 Load manual feeder with lt x gt 259 Memory full cannot print faxes 259 Remove paper from standard output bin 259 Restore Held Jobs 259 Scan Document Too Long 259 SMTP server not set up Contact system administrator 259 Unsupported disk 259 printer options troubleshooting flash memory card 293 hard disk with adapter 293 internal print server 293 Internal Solutions Port 293 memory card 294 option not working 292 trays drawers 293 USB parallel interface card 294 printer problems solving basic 256 printhead lenses cleaning 234 printing black and white 90 directory list 89 font sample list 89 from flash drive 87 from Macintos
340. transmission are listed in the Fax Queue Touch the arrows to adjust the time the fax will be transmitted The time is increased or decreased in increments of 30 minutes If the current time is shown the left arrow is unavailable Touch Done Touch Fax it Note The document is scanned and then faxed at the scheduled time Viewing a fax log 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser Note If you do not know the IP address of the printer then print a network setup page and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Click Settings 3 Click Reports 4 Click Fax Job Log or Fax Call Log Faxing 130 Blocking junk faxes 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser Note If you do not know the IP address of the printer then print a network setup page and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section Click Settings Click Fax Settings Click Analog Fax Setup Uu A W N Click the Block No Name Fax option This option blocks all incoming faxes that have a private caller ID or no fax station name 6 In the Banned Fax List field enter the phone numbers or fax station names of specific fax callers you want to block Canceling an outgoing fax Canceling a fax while the original documents are still scanning When using the ADF touch Cancel Job while Scanning appears When using the scanner glass touch Cancel Job while Scanning appears or
341. u touch an underlined word on the Number of Copies screen before the Number of Copies is set and saved then the selection is not saved and it does not become the user default setting Attendance message alert If an attendance message occurs which closes a function such as copy or fax then an exclamation point appears over the function button on the home screen and the red indicator light blinks Learning about the printer 22 Additional printer setup Installing internal options A CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD If you are installing memory or option cards sometime after setting up the printer then turn the printer off and unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before continuing If you have any other devices attached to the printer then turn them off as well and unplug any cables going to the printer You can customize your printer connectivity and memory capacity by adding optional cards The instructions in this section explain how to install the available cards you can also use them to locate a card for removal Available internal options Memory cards Printer memory Flash memory Fonts e Firmware cards Bar Code and Forms PDS and SCS TNe PrintCryption M PRESCRIBE Printer hard disk e Lexmark Internal Solutions Ports ISP RS 232 C Serial ISP Parallel 1284 B ISP MarkNet N8150802 11 b g n Wireless ISP MarkNet N8130 10 100 Fiber ISP MarkNet N8120 10 100 1000
342. usts the amount of background visible on a copy 4to 4 Note 0 is the factory default setting Color Dropout Color Dropout None Red Green Blue Default Red Threshold 0 255 Default Green Threshold 0 255 Default Blue Threshold 0 255 Specifies which color to drop during scanning and how much to increase or decrease the dropout Notes None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout 128isthe factory default setting for each color threshold Understanding printer menus 207 Description Menu item Contrast Specifies the contrast of the output 0 5 Note Best for content is the factory default setting Best for content Mirror Image Creates a mirror image of the original document On Note Off is the factory default setting Off Negative Image On Creates a negative image of the original document Note Off is the factory default setting Off Shadow Detail Adjusts the amount of shadow detail visible on a scanned image 4 4 Note 0 is the factory default setting Scan edge to edge On Specifies whether the original document is scanned edge to edge Note Off is the factory default setting Off Sharpness Adjusts the amount of sharpness of a scanned image 1 5 Note 3 is the factory default setting Flash Drive menu Scan Settings Menu item Description Format Specifies the format of the FTP file PDF pdf Note PDF pdf is the factory default
343. ves has been signed by the Director of Manufacturing and Technical Support Lexmark International Inc S A Boigny France This product satisfies the Class A limits of EN 55022 and safety requirements of EN 60950 Industry Canada compliance statement This Class A digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference Causing Equipment Standard ICES 003 Avis de conformit aux normes de l industrie du Canada Cet appareil num rique de classe A est conforme aux exigences de la norme canadienne relative aux quipements pouvant causer des interf rences NMB 003 Regulatory notices for telecommunication terminal equipment This section contains regulatory information pertaining to products that contain telecommunication terminal equipment such as facsimile Notices 517 Notice to users of the US telephone network FCC requirements This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the requirements adopted by the Administrative Council for Terminal Attachments ACTA On the back of this equipment is a label that contains among other information a product identifier in the format US AAAEQIHETXXXX If requested this number must be provided to your telephone company This equipment uses the RJ 11C Universal Service Order Code USOC jack A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises wiring and telephone network must comply with the applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by the
344. work connection This page also provides important information that aids network printing configuration Printing a menu settings page Print a menu settings page to review the current menu settings and to verify printer options are installed correctly Note If you have not made any menu item settings changes yet then the menu settings page lists all the factory default settings Once you select and save other settings from the menus they replace the factory default settings as user default settings A user default setting remains in effect until you access the menu again choose another value and save it To restore the factory default settings see Restoring the factory default settings on page 255 1 Make sure the printer is on and Ready appears 2 On the home screen touch ES 3 Touch Reports 4 Touch Menu Settings Page The menu settings page prints and the printer returns to the home screen Printing a network setup page If the printer is attached to a network then print a network setup page to verify the network connection This page also provides important information that aids network printing configuration 1 Make sure the printer is on and Ready appears 2 Onthe home screen touch 3 Touch Reports 4 Touch Network Setup Page The network setup page prints and the printer returns to the home screen 5 Checkthe first section on the network setup page and confirm that Status is Connected If Status is Not Co
345. ws users change these settings from Print Properties ForMacintosh users change these settings from the Print dialog and pop up menus Troubleshooting 501 THE PRINTER MAY NOT HAVE RECALIBRATED RECENTLY Perform Color Adjust from the printer control panel Quality menu A TONER CARTRIDGE IS WORN OR DEFECTIVE Replace the worn or defective toner cartridge Print is too light These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following CHECK THE DARKNESS BRIGHTNESS AND CONTRAST SETTINGS The Toner Darkness setting is too light the RGB Brightness setting is too light or the RGB Contrast setting is too low From the printer control panel change these settings from the Quality menu For Windows users change these settings from Print Properties ForMacintosh users change these settings from the Print dialog and pop up menus THE PRINTER MAY NOT HAVE RECALIBRATED RECENTLY Perform Color Adjust from the printer control panel Quality menu CHECK THE PAPER Load paper from a new package Avoid textured paper with rough finishes Make sure the paper you load in the trays is not damp Make sure the Paper Type and Paper Weight settings match the type of paper that you are using CoLon SAVER Is ON Turn Color Saver off in the printer control panel Quality menu A TONER CARTRIDGE IS LOW Remove the specified cartridge from the printer Shake the cartridge back and forth several times and then reinstall it
346. x and e mail functions prior to setup The indicator light blinks until you set up Fax and E mail To disable the blinking light follow these steps Note Before completing these instructions for a printer on a network make sure the fax cables are connected 1 Touch Menus Touch Settings Touch General Settings bh W N Touch the left or right arrow next to Run initial setup to select Yes and then touch Submit Submitting changes appears Turn the printer off and then turn the printer back on From the printer control panel touch your language Touch your country or region and then touch Continue Touch the left or right arrow to select your time zone and then touch Continue O 0o NGAU Touch Fax and E mail to deselect them and then touch Continue Note You can use these same steps to enable Fax and E mail Additional printer setup 43 Verifying printer setup Once all hardware and software options are installed and the printer is turned on verify that the printer is set up correctly by printing the following Menu settings page Use this page to verify that all printer options are installed correctly A list of installed options appears toward the bottom of the page If an option you installed is not listed then it is not installed correctly Remove the option and install it again e Network setup page If your printer is a network model and is attached to a network print a network setup page to verify the net
347. xt mode Use Text mode when text preservation is the main goal of sending a document to an FTP site and preserving images copied from the original document is not a concern Text mode is recommended for receipts carbon copy forms and documents that only contain text or fine line art When should use Text Photo mode Use Text Photo mode when sending a document to an FTP site that contains a mixture of text and graphics Text Photo mode is recommended for magazine articles business graphics and brochures When should I use Photo mode Use Photo mode when the original document is composed mostly of photos printed on a laser printer or taken from a magazine or newspaper Scanning to an FTP address 140 Scanning to a computer or flash drive ADF Scanner glass Use the ADF for multiple page documents Use the scanner glass for single pages small items such as postcards or photos transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine c clippings The scanner lets you scan documents directly to a computer or a flash drive The computer does not have to be directly connected to the printer for you to receive Scan to PC images You can scan the document back to the computer over the network by creating a scan profile on the computer and then downloading the profile to the printer Scanning to a computer 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser
348. y Description Prints a border around each page image when using N up pages sides Note None is the factory default setting Menu item Description Specifies whether images are printed in monochrome grayscale or in color Note Color is the factory default setting Color Correction Auto Off Manual Adjusts the color output on the printed page Notes Auto is the factory default setting Auto applies different color conversion tables to each object on the printed page e Off turns off color correction Manual allows customization of the color tables using the settings available from the Manual Color menu Duetothe differences in additive and subtractive colors certain colors that appear on computer monitors are impossible to duplicate on the printed page Print Resolution 1200 dpi 4800 CQ Specifies the printed output resolution Notes e 4800 CQ is the factory default setting 1200 dpi provides the highest resolution output and increases gloss Toner Darkness 1 5 Lightens or darkens the printed output Notes e 4isthe factory default setting Selecting a smaller number can help conserve toner e fPrint Mode is set to Black Only a setting of 5 increases toner density and darkness to all print jobs f Print Mode is set to Color a setting of 5 is the same as a setting of 4 Enhance Fine Lines On Off Enables a print mode preferable for files such as architectural drawin
349. y Lexmark For further explanation of your warranty alternatives and the nearest Lexmark authorized servicer in your area contact Lexmark on the World Wide Web at www lexmark com support Remote technical support is provided for this product throughout its warranty period For products no longer covered by a Lexmark warranty technical support may not be available or only be available for a fee Extent of limited warranty Lexmark does not warrant uninterrupted or error free operation of any product or the durability or longevity of prints produced by any product Warranty service does not include repair of failures caused by Modification or unauthorized attachments Accidents misuse abuse or use inconsistent with Lexmark user s guides manuals instructions or guidance Unsuitable physical or operating environment Maintenance by anyone other than Lexmark or a Lexmark authorized servicer Operation of a product beyond the limit of its duty cycle Use of printing media outside of Lexmark specifications Refurbishment repair refilling or remanufacture by a third party of products supplies or parts Products supplies parts materials such as toners and inks software or interfaces not furnished by Lexmark Notices 325 TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW NEITHER LEXMARK NOR ITS THIRD PARTY SUPPLIERS OR REMARKETERS MAKE ANY OTHER WARRANTY OR CONDITION OF ANY KIND WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WITH RESP
350. y switch to PCL emulation when a print job received On through a USB port requires it regardless of the default printer language Off Notes Onis the factory default setting When the Off setting is used the printer does not examine incoming data When the Off setting is used the printer uses PostScript emulation if the PS Smartswitch setting is On It uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu if the PS SmartSwitch setting is Off PS SmartSwitch Sets the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job received On through a USB port requires it regardless of the default printer language Off Notes Onisthe factory default setting When the Off setting is used the printer does not examine incoming data When the Off setting is used the printer uses PCL emulation if the PCL Smartswitch setting is On It uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu if the PCL SmartSwitch setting is Off Understanding printer menus 167 Menu item Description NPA Mode Sets the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional On communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol Off Notes Auto Auto is the factory default setting Changing this setting from the control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart The menu selection is updated USB Buffer Sets the size of the USB input buffer Disabled Notes
351. you clear the jam TURN ON JAM RECOVERY In the Setup menu Jam Recovery is set to Off Set Jam Recovery to Auto or On 1 O ON A Ui A WwW N Make sure the printer is on and Ready appears On the home screen touch Touch Settings Touch General Settings Touch the down arrow until Print Recovery appears Touch Print Recovery Touch the right arrow next to Jam Recovery until On or Auto appears Touch Submit Touch Al Solving print quality problems The information in the following topics may help you solve print quality problems If these suggestions do not correct the problem contact Customer Support You may have a printer part that requires adjustment or replacement Isolating print quality problems To help isolate print quality problems print the print quality test pages bh W N Turn the printer off Load letter or A4 size paper in the tray Hold down and while turning the printer on Release the buttons when the screen with the progress bar appears The printer performs a power on sequence and then the Configuration menu appears 5 Touch Print Quality Pages 6 Touch Print Quality Pages again The print quality test pages print 7 Touch Back 8 Touch Exit Config Menu Troubleshooting 295 Blank pages These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following PACKING MATERIAL MAY BE ON THE TONER CARTRIDGE Remove the toner cartridge and make sure the packing mat
352. you do not know the IP address of the printer print a network setup page and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Click Device Status The Device Status page appears displaying a summary of supply levels Ordering supplies To order supplies in the U S contact Lexmark at 1 800 539 6275 for information about Lexmark authorized supplies dealers in your area In other countries or regions visit the Lexmark Web Site at www lexmark com or contact the place where you purchased the printer Notes Thetoner gauge is an estimate of how much toner is left in your cartridge e All life estimates for printer supplies assume printing on letter or A4 size plain paper Ordering toner cartridges When 88 Cyan cartridge low 88 Magenta cartridge low 88 Yellow cartridge low or88 Black cartridge low appears order a new cartridge When 88 Replace Cyan cartridge 88 Replace Magenta cartridge 88 Replace Yellow cartridge or88 Replace Black cartridge appears you must replace the specified cartridge Estimated cartridge yield is based on the ISO IEC 19798 standard with about 596 coverage per color Extremely low print coverage less than 1 2596 for a color for extended periods of time may negatively affect actual yield for that color and may cause cartridge parts to fail prior to exhaustion of toner Ordering photoconductors When 84 photoconductor lowor84 color photoconductor nearly low appears order a replacement photoconductor

Lexmark X736DE

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents